ONNItRSITY OF NEWCASTLE ARCHIVES SERIAL

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

Volume 14 1993 The University of Newcastle

Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook CONTENTS

THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE New South Wales FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

LocaUon Address: University Drive, Callaghan SECfION ONE FACULTY STAFF 1 Postal Address: The University of Newcastle NSW 2308 SECTION TWO FACULTY INFORM AnON 9

Telephone: (049) 215000 SECfIONTHREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREEIDIPLOMA RULES 14 Undergraduate DlplornalDegrees offered in the Faculty 14 Telex: AA28194 - Library General Rules 14 AA28618 - Bursar Combined Degree Course Rules IS AA28784 - lUNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Limited) Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management 16 Bachelor of Environmental Science 18 Facsimile: (049) 21.5669 Bachelor of Science 22 Bachelor of Science (A viation) 28 Hours of Business: Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9 am to 5 pm Bachelor of Mathematics 31 Combined Degree Courses 31 The University of NewcasUe Calendar consists of the following volumes: Bachelor of Science (Psychology) 3S Volume I Legislation Diploma in Aviation Science 37 Volume 2 University Bodies and Staff Diploma In A vlalion Science Rules 37 Volume 3 Faculty of Architecture Handbook Volume 4 Faculty of Art, Design and Communication Handbook SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECT LISTS 39 Volume 5 Faculty of Arts Handbook SECfION FIVE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRII'TIONS 54 Volume 6 Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries 54 Volume 7 Faculty of Education Handbook Applied Science and Technology 54 Volume 8 Faculty of Engineering Handbook Aviation 60 Volume 9 Faculty of Health Sciences Handbook Biological Sciences 68 Volume 10 Faculty of Law Handbook Chemistry 72 Volume II Faculty of Medicine Handbook Environmental Science 77 Volume 12 Faculty of Music Handbook Geography 78 Volume 13 Faculty of Nusing Handbook Geology 81 Volume 14 Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook Mathematics 84 Volume 15 Faculty of Social Science Handbook Physics 9S Also available are the Undergraduate Guides Psychology 97 Computer Science 101 This volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in courses conducted by Information Science 103 the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. Philosophy: Scientific Method 103 The colour band, Topaz BCC4, on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Statistics 104 Science of this University. The colour band, Amethyst BCC 28, in the center of the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelor of Mathematics of this University. SECfION SIX RECOMME:\'DED PROGRAMS 107

The information in this Handbook is correct as at 9th October 1992. SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES 114 Bachelor of Science (Honours) 114 ISSN 1034 - 4489 Bachelor of Science Aviation (Honours) 116 Bachelor of Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management) 118 Recommended Price: Five dollars and fifty cents plus postage. Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours) 120 Graduate Diploma in Environmental Studies 122 Designed by: Marie-T Wisniowski Graduate Diploma in Mathematical Studies 124 Typeset. by: Ian Spurr, The Secretariat Division, The University of Newcastle by: NewcasUe Camera Print CONTENTS

Masters Degrees 126 Master of Environmental Studies 126 Master of Mathematics 128 Master of Psychology (Clinical)/Master of Psychology (Educational) 128 Master of Science 130 Master of Scientific Studies 130

SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS 133

SECTION NINE SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS 147

SECTION TEN GENERAL INFORMATION Iocaled in centre section

PRINCIPAL DATES 1993

ADVICE AND INFORMATION II

ENROLMENT AND RE-ENROLMENT III LEAVE OF ABSENCE V THE DEAN'S FOREWORD ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES V The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the development of an efficient note taking system and in Uris you GENERAL CONDUCT V Departments of Aviation. Applied Science and Technology. should seek the assistance of the Student Counselling Unit which Biological Sciences, Chemistry. Geography, Geology. provides relevant short courses. The second is that, apart from EXAMINATIONS v Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. regular tutorials, tests, and final examinations, no one will follow up your com prehension of the lecture material other than yourself. STATEMENTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD viii Undergraduate Degrees handled by the Faculty include the Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science ( Aviation), Bachelorof The Faculty expects you to spend at least one hour of your time UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS - Rules viii Science (Psychology), Bachelor of Mathematics, Bachelor of on private study for every contact hour that you have with Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management), University staff. You need toallocate Uris from the very beginning CHARGES x Bachelor of Environmental Science and a number of combined of your course and if you delay the process you will probably degrees with other Faculties. never make up the lost time. A well planned, uniform program of HIGHER EDUCATION CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HECS) x work to support your lectures, tutorials and laboratory classes This Handbook provides details relating to these degrees. will allow you to develop your understanding of the subjects and LOANS xi Students enrolled in a Science or Mathematics degree should be enjoy the many other facets of university life. REFUND OF CHARGES xi aware that they can apply to take subjects in Computer Science The quality of your tertiary education depends upon your ability (offered within the Faculty of Fngineering) but because of strict to make efficient use of the University Library. Ensure that you xi quota restrictions on entry to Computer Science 101, may not be CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING take part in the orientation programs which the Library staff offer successful in gaining a place. Subjects from Stali sties, Infonnation at the beginning of every year. Throughout your course the MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Science and a number of other disciplines can be pursued within teaching and administrative staff of the University are !"tere to Banking xii the various degree programs. In the Bachelor of Science and guide you and if you need assistance it is available at a number xii Bachelor of Mathematics degrees, students may take a sequence Cashier of levels. DUficulties with particular subjects should bediscussed of subjects from outside the Faculty ,thus combining expertise in Chaplaincy Service xii with the lecturer or tutor concerned or the Year Supervisor in basic science and/or mathematics with a wide range of elective xii each Department. Problems with your degree structure and Community Programmes areas such as languages and other humanities, accountancy, progression are the province of the Assistant Deans and the Dean Convocation xii management, computing and engineering. who will give guidance when required. Day to day changes in xii Co-op Bookshop Those students entering university for the first time will find the your current enrolment are handled by the Assistant Registrar Lost Property xii system of instruction vastly different from that in secondary who can be found in the School Office which is located in the Noticcboards xii schools. Theresponsibility is placed on the student to extract the Science Building adjoining Chemistry. maximum benefit from the course. University staff will lecture to Post Office xii In a climate where government charges for tertiary education you and during that time you are expected to make notes about the have risen steeply, you must make the most of your time at Public Transport xii materia1 being presented. Some students respond by lTying to University by using its resources to the full. Learn to organise Student Insurance Cover xiii take down the lecture verbatim but without understanding, others your thoughts, expand your mind, and develop your critical listen and make notes in outline form, copying down quotations University Computing Services xiii faculties to the utmost in order to provide yourself with or blackboard materia1, while a minority, overwhelmed by the University Libraries xiv qUalifications which will lead to asuccessful carccrand satisfying volume and complexity of the subject matter, sim pi y contempl ate life. their next social engagement, to their own disadvantage. Two issues will beimportant for your ultimate success. The first is the D_C. FINLAY, I Dean il SECTION ONE

PRINCIPAL OFFICERS

Vice-Chancellor and Principal Professor K.J. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhil(Oxf) Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Academic) Professor M.P. Carter, BA(Nott), PhD(Edin) Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Administration) L.F. Hennessy, BA(Syd) Deputy Vice-Chancellor (planning) n.R. Huxley, BA. LittB(NE}, MA. PhD Pro Vice-Chancellor and Dean of Students Professor K.R. Dutton, MA(Syd), DU(Paris), Officier des Palmes acaMmiques, FACE Pro Vice-Chancellor (Development) L.R. EaslCQtt, MEd(Syd), PhD(Alberta), BA, DipEd Deputy President of Academic Senate Professor P.L. Clarke, BEe, PhD(Syd), FCPA, ACIS, ACIM Dean for Research Professor R.I. MacDonald, BSc, PhD(NSW). FAIP SCHOOL/FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF Director B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD Accountant M. Janissen. BCom, MNIA Senior Computer Programmer RJ.Dea:r Computer Programmers C.Mason, MA(Camb), MSc(ply) 1. Symon, BSc T. Wiklendt, BCompSci nean D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Mclb), MAPsS Assistant Deans J.G. Couper, BSc, PhD(NE) C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS Assistant Registrar H.R. Hotchkiss, BA, DipEd(NE) Administrative Assistant K.A. Hodyl, BCom(NSW) Office Staff N.H. Adams

,I"",

'";'-'. -'------...."--<"<;..:-- SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY Technical Officer I. Stephens R. Clark, Teach Cert, BSc, MSc(NSW), FRACI, CChem, MACE (Head of Department) Departmental Office Staff L. Gamer Senior Lecturers R.w. Hosken, BSc(WA), MSc(Monash), MBA, PhD DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES K. McDonald, OAM, MLilt, MA(NE), MEdSlud, FACE, FAAEE,MEIA Professor B. Boettcher, BSc, PhD(Adel) Lecturers Associate Professors L.R. Carlin, BEd. DipAdultEdn, DipFDesign. DipDesign, ACFI R.C. Jones, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd) R.G. Fairall, BSc, MEugSc(NSW), GradDip (Malhs) C.S.U Milchell J.W. Palrick, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq) P.M. Geary, BSc, MSc, DipEd, MEIA,MAWWA T.K. Roberts, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin) S.A. Grenquist, BA, BS. MSc{Notre Dame) RJ. Rose, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq) (Head or Department) R.w. Kidd, BSc(NSW), PhD(Macq), MEIA Senior Lecturers M.A. Linich, DipTeach (NTC), BSc, MScSlud B.A. Conroy, BSc, PhD(Syd) J. Ma, BSc(NSW), MSc, PhD(HK), CEug, MIEE, MIE(AuSl) R.N. Murdoch, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd) M.J. Mahony, BA, DipEd, PhD(Macq) C.E. Offler, BSc, PhD(Adel) KJ. Sutton, BEdSlud, GradOipEdStud(Special Edue), MEdStud, DipTeach(IndArts) J.C. Rodger, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd) A. Williams, DipTeaeh(AppArts)(Avondale), BEd(IA)NCAE) Lecturer R.H. Dunstan, BScAgr(Adel), D.PhiI(Oxf) P.I. Williams, BA, DipTeach, MA, PhD Honorary Associates R.M. Williamson-Haydon, BSe(NSW), ATI D. McNair Associate Lecturers K. Myers, BSc, DSc(Syd) H. Farrah, BSc(Qld), DipEd J.D.stanger, BSc (James Cook), PhD J. Hayden, BEd, DipTeach (NCAE) Associate Lecturers Technical Officers M. Conroy, BSc, Dip Ed(Syd), PGDip Planl & Wildlife Illus(NCAE) A. Lieb P. Lake, BSc, MSc(Tor) J. Wold M. Lin, MSAgric(Jiangxi), PhD Laboratory Craftspcrsons C.M.R. Pelers, BA, BSc(Syd) G. Jenkins Professional Officers M. Chandler D.J. Kay, BSc(Adel), PhD Laboratory Assistant C. Walker 1. Clulow, BSc, BA, PhD Laboratory Attendants Technical Officers R. Davis E. Blajet J. Elliott R. Campbell M. Guest E. Stark K. Strong R.J. Tayler Departmental Office Staff Laboratory Craftsperson J.P. NohUl K Allan Laboratory Assistants L. Linkla1er D.L. Brennan T.D. Frost DEPARTMENT OF AVIATION B. Hayes Professor R.A. Telfer, BA(NSW), MEdAdminHons(NE), PhD, DipEdAdmin(NE) (Head of Department) J.J. Nairn Lecturers L.D. Pezely D. Christley, BA(Macq) FAIN K.H. Stokes N. Crawford, BA DipEd eras) Departmental Office Staff I. Henley, BEd(Alberta), Adult Edue Cert. (Nova Scotia) MA(Alberta), MEd(Manitoba) D.J. Snushall M.J. Ross, BA(Melb), GradDipAppPsych(Chisholm) A.N. Bulloch A. Ulmer, BSc(Phys), BE(Aero)(Syd) ;2 i j 3 SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY Lecturers Professors K.w. Lee, BA(Liv), MA(NE) KJ. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhiI(OXf)(personal Chair) P.M. O'Neill, MA(Macq), DipEd(Macq) W.FJ. Pickering, MSc, PhD(NSW), DSc, ASTC, FRACI, CChem Post Doctoral Fellow M.K. Macphail, BSc(Syd), PhD(Tas) Associate Professors Honorary Associate B.L.Campbell, MSe Honoris causa K.H. Bell, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRACI, CChem Cartographer O. Rey-Leseure L.K. Dyall, MSc, PhD(Melb), FRACI, CChem Technical Officer CG. Dever G.A. Lawnutce, BSc, PhD, DSc(Qld), DipEd(Melb), FRAO, CChem (Head of Department) Departmental Office Staff M.B.Lane Senior Lecturers RA. Fredlein, BSc, PhD(Qld), MRACI, CChem DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY M. Maeder, PhD, Habilitation (Basel), MRACI, CChem Professor C.F.K. Diessel, DiplGeol, DrRerNa1(Berlin), AAusIMM, FAlE (Personal Chair) E.!. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), MRACI, CChem Associate Professors Ledurers B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD RC. Bums, BSc, PhD(Melb), MRACI, CChem R. Offier, BSc, PhD(Adel) (Head of Department) G.L. Orr, BSc(Qld), PhD(NSW), MRACI, CChem Senior Lecturers I.A. van Altena, BSc(Iames Cook), PhD(Alberta) R.L. Boyd, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd) Associate Lecturers P.K. Seccombe, MSc(Melb), PhD(Manit) S.J. Angus-Dunne, BSc W. Collins, BSc(ANU), PhD (LaT) I.A Ferguson, BSc(Syd) Lecturer C.V. Murray-Wallace, BA, PhD(Adel) K.A. Grice, BSc Honorary Associates Honorary Research Associate D.AJ. Swinkels, BSc(NSW), PhD(penn), ASTC, FRACI K.H.R. Moelle, ABS, DPhiI(lnnsbruck) Senior Technical Officer A.I. Beveridge S.SU.Wame, BSc(WA), PhD(NSW) Technical Officers Professional Officer G.L. Dean-Jones, BA, MSe(Macq) R.F. Godfrey Senior Technical Officer R. Bale, BSe F. McKenzie Technical Officers J. Slavek R. Bale, BSe W.J. Thompson E. Krupie Laboratory Assistants I.A. Crawford B. Watson Laboratory Assistant H. Ruming, BSe T. Williams Departmental Office Staff G.A. MacKenzie Departmental Office Staff E. Slabbert DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS M.Munns Professors C.A. Croxton, BSc(Leicester), MA, PhDCCamb), FAIP, FInstP(Lond) DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY I. Raeburn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Utah) Professor E.A. Colhoun, BA(Bclf), MS(Wis), PhD(Belf), MA(Dub) Associate Professors Associate Professors W, Brisley, BSc(Syd), MSc (NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE) H.A. Bridgman, BA(Beloit), MA(Hawaii), PhD(Wis) 1.R Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd), ThL J.C.R Camm, MSc(Hull), PhD P.K. Smrz, PromPhys, CSe, RNDr(Charles(Prague) R.I. Loughran, BSc(Dunelm), MSe, PhDCNE) (Head of Department) Senior Lecturers Senior Lecturers !.M. Benn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Lancaster) G.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD R.F. Berghout, MSc(Syd) J.C. Torner, BScAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wis) J.G. Ceuper, BSc, PhD(NE) H.P.M. Winchester, MA (Oxon), DPhiI(Oxon) W.T.F. Lao, ME(NSW), PhD(Syd) D.L.S. McElwain, BSc(Qld), PhD(York(Can)) 4 5 SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF SECTION ONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

A.G. Robertson, BSc(Edin), PhD(Newcastle, UK) Lecturer P.W. Menk, BSc, PhD(LaT), MAIP B. Sims, BSc, PhD Research Associates W.P. Wood, BSc, PbD(NSW), FRAS (Head of Department) H.J. Hansen, MSc, PhD(Nata!) Lecturers Y.D. Hu, MSc(USTC), PhD, MAlP D.A. Pask, BSc, MSc, Phd(Warwick) M. Radny, MSc(Wroclaw), PhD(Wroc1aw), PPS(poland), IUVISTA W. Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin) Y.Shen,PhD E. Vlachynsky, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd) Honorary Research Associates G.A. Willis, BSc(Adel), PhD(Newcaslle, UK) D. Webster, BSc, PhD Associate Lecturers J.A. Ramsay, MSc(Melb), PhD, FAIP S. Boswell, BMath, MTICA Senior Technical Officers N.B. Hannah, BMath, DipMathStud B. Mason G. Pettet, BSc, DipEd, BMath M.K. O'Neill J. Ryan, BMath(Woll) J.F. Pearson Research Associate M.E. Laca, BSEE(Uruguay), MA(Santa Barbara), PhD(Berkely) J.S. Ratcliffe Professor Emeritus R.G. Keats, BSc, PhD(Adel), DMath(Waterloo), PIMA, FASA, MACS Technical Officers Departmental Office Staff T.W.Burns J. Garnsey, BA(Syd) M.M. Cvetanovski L. Steel J.e. Foster R Pease, BEd(Math)(MCAE) G. Piszczuk Senior Laboratory Craftsperson B. Stevens Division of Quantitative Methods Laboratory Craftspersons Principal Lecturer W.P. Galvin, BA(Syd), MMath, MEd, MEngSc, PIMA 1. Qarke Senior Lecturer M.J. Williams, BA, MEngSc, DipEd P. Greig Lecturers Departmental Office Staff T. Dalby, MSc(Canl), BMath J.Oyston J.MacDougall, BSc, MA(Dalhousie), MPhil(Waterloo) N. Smith M.J. Roberts, BMath, PhD S. Seiffer, BChemEng, BMath DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Division Office Staff Professors L. Locker D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Melb), MAPsS (Head of Department) J. Trayhum M.G. King, BA, PhD(Qld), FAP,S Associate Professor R.A. Heath, BSc, PhD(McM) DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS Senior Lecturers Professor R.J. MacDonald, BSe, PhD(NSW), FAIP M.M. Colton, MA, PhD(NE), MPsych(Clin), MAPsS Associate Professors M. Hunler, BSc, PhD(Lond), CertEd, MBPsS, MAPsS B.J. Fraser, MSc(NZ), PhD(Canl), FAJP, FRAS N.F. Kafer, BA, PhD(ANU), MAPsS C.S.L. Keay, MSc(NZ), PhD(Canl), MA(Tor), CPhy" FIP(UK), FAJP, FAAAS, FRNZAS, FRAS, MACS C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS D.J. O'Connor, BSe, PhD(ANU), FAIP (Head of Department) S.A. McFadden, BSc, PhD(ANU) P.V. Smith, BSc, PhD(Monash), MAIP D. Munro, MA(Manc), PhD(Lond), Cert Soc SI(Glas), Dip Data(SA) Senior Lecturers H.P. Pfister, BA(Macq), PhD, MAPsS F.T. Bagnall, BSc(NSW), MSc(NE), PhD, MAIP J.L. Seggie, BA, PhD J.E.R. Cleary, MSc(NSW) J.D.C. Shea, MA(Canl), PhD(Qld) MASH, MACPCP, MASA, M1SNlM B.V. King, BSc, BE, PhD(NSW) Lecturers P.A. McGovern, BE, BSc(Qld), MS, PhD(CalTech), M1EEE, SMlREAust R Brown, BA, PhD, MASA, MlSNlM RH. Roberts, BE(NSW), MSc, ASTC 6 7 FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF SECTION TWO SECTION ONE

B. Hayes, BSc, BPsyc(CLIN), PhD(NSW) A. Hea1hcote, BSe, PhD(Queens) J. Kenanly, BSc, PhD(Qld», MAPsS S. Provost, BSc(psyc), PhD(NSW) Associate Lecturer J Spinks, BA. MA(Syd). Dip Sc Emeritus Professor lA. Keats, BSc(Adel). BA(Melb), AM, PhD(Prin), FASSA, FEPsS, FAPsS Honorary Associates M. Arthur, BA, DipP,ych(Syd), MHP(NSW), MAP,S D.B. Dunlop, ME, BS(Syd), DO, FRSM, MACa B. Fenelon, BA(Qld), MA, PhD, MAPsS, AAAN, MSPR J. Miles, BA, PhD F.V. Smith, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond), FEPsS, FAPsS, CP,ychol Professional Officer D.F. Bull, BSe Senior Technical Officers L. Cooke R.Gleghom FACULTY INFORMATION A.O. Harcombe J. Lee·Chin, BSc The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the requirements. particularly with regard to prescribed subjects, Technical Officers Departments of Applied Science and Technology, Aviation, prerequisites and corequisites as set out in the appropriatedegree/ Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography. Geology. diploma Rules in this handbook. D. Golvers, BA Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The Departments of Students should note that degrees must be structured to include E.M. Huber Computer Science, Physics and Statistics also offer major a specified number of 300 level subjects. For exam pie, aBachelor P.W.Smith sequences of qualifying subjects for the degrees of Bachelor of of Science degree must include forty credit points at 300 levels in Science and Bachelor of Mathematics in the Faculty of Science Laboratory Craftsperson M. Newton one Department, and at least forty more credit points a1300 level and Mathematics. chosen from subjects approved by Faculty Board. Subject to the Departmental Office Staff Tramition Arrangemenls Exceptional Circumstances Dean's permission, a candidate may be pennitted toeOTol in some W.N. Mead subjects from amongst those offered by another Faculty. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in S. Harris particular transition cases, the Dean may detennine the transition Time limits are set on the duration of an undergraduate course as L. Davies program to be followed. indicated in the appropriate Rules. Maximum workloads are also preset, since limits are placed on the number of subjects students General Information for New Undergraduates are permitted to undertake in anyone year. For information on Students embarking on a university course for the first time may these restrictions consult the appropriate degree Rules. find some difficulty in adapting to the new environment. Tertiary Undergraduate Admission Requiremenls education makes a number of demands on students it requires them to be self-disciplined, organized, self-motivated and In order to be considered for admission for any qualification other moreover, responsible for their own course of study. Hence it is than a postgraduate qualification an applicant shall be required to important that students become familiar with the University either structure, degree courses offered and service organizations (such (i) attain such aggregate of marks in approved subjects at the as the University Counselling Service & Accommodation Service New South Wales Higher School Certificate examination etc.) which offer assistance with study, personal and housing as may be prescribed by the Senate from time to time; or problems. (ii) otherwise satisfy the Admissions & Progression Committee Often students on first entering University are not certain of their thal the applicant has reached a standard of education finalfleldofinterest. Infact, it is usually only after the completion sufficient to enable the approved course to be pursued. of the first year of study that many students finally choose to major in a particular subject. In order to maintain flexibility first Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty year semester subjects (100 level subjects) should be chosen from There are no prescribed prerequisites for entry to the Faculty of areas where the student has some previous expertise or special Science and Mathematics; students are advised that lectures will interest. At the same time, they should take note of the degree commence on the assumption that all students will haveachieved the level indicated.

9 8 FACULTY INFORMATION SECfIONlWO FACULTY INFORMATION SECfIONlWO

include no more than 100 credit points at 100 level, 40 credit Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. The following should be Assumed Knowledge Enrolment Requirements Subject points at 200 level or 20 credit points at 300 level. borne in mind 2~unit, 3~unit or 4~unit Mathematics. Also, (a) In order to be admitted an applicant shall A vialion 109-\15 1. The Facu1ty Board requires that students shall pass at least 2~unit Physics or 4~unit Science (including (i) satisfy appropriate Oiploma/Degree Rules as set out in Additional Information two semester subjects in Uteir first yearoffull~time attendance the Physics 'make~up' eleccives)with alevel Section Three; Advisory Services orin their first two years of part-time attendance. of perfonnance placing them in the top 50% (ii) receive approval to enrol; Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of of the candidature for these subjects. 2. The Faculty Board requires that students shall have passed al (iii) complete the prescribed enrolment procedures; and subjects in the course should seek help fro~ members of the least eight semester subjects by the end of the first two years Higher School Certificate Chemistry or 4- Faculty. In particular. advice should be sought from first, second Biology 101 of full~time altendance or four years of part-time attendance. unit Science is appropriate and students are (iv) pay any fees and charges prescribed by the Council. and third year subject co-ordinators in each Department, Heads advised to include CHEMIOI and (b) An applicant may be admined under such conditions as the of Departments, the Assistant Deans or Dean. 3. The Faculty Board has detennined that a student who fails a semester subject twice shall not be permitted to include that CHEMI02 in their University program. Admissions & Progression Committee may detennine after Enquiries regarding enrolment, variation to program and general However, some lectures in background considering any advice offered by the Dean of the Faculty. subject in the candidate's future program, and that a student administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary who fails four semester subjects twice shall be excluded from chemistry will be offered by the Department (c) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board a candidate for in the School of Science and Mathematics in the Science Building. further enrolment in the Faculty, unless the candidate shows of Community Programmes prior to the a qualification shall not enrol in a subject which does not start of the first semester. Attendance at this For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested cause to the satisfaction ofthe Faculty Board why the candidate count towards that qualification. Preparatory Course is optional. that students should consu1t the University Counselling Service. should be penniued to do so. (d) A candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a course or Student Participation in University Affairs 4. Students should note that a terminating pass can be awarded Chemistry lOJ At least Mathematics (2~unit course), part of acourse for another qualification unless the candidate only at the 100 level or 200 level and that no more than four Chemistry (2~unit course), and Physics (2~ has first obtained the consent of the Dean of the Faculty and, Provision is made for students to be elected as members on tenninating passes, may count ina student's program (with no unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as to other University more than two at the 200 level.) each case. other qualification, the Dean of that Faculty provided that a bodies. Election of student members usually takes place in Geography HSC Geography would be an advantage, student may enrol in a combined degree course approved by Semester One and students should watch Departmental notice Note: Where there is a change in attendance status, two part· but the course is a foundation course that the Senate leading to two qualifications. boards for details of election of student members. time years will be taken as theequivalent of one full-time year for the purposes of this policy. does not require having undertaken (e) A candidate for any qualification other than a postgraduate The Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics has Geography at school. qualification who is enrolled in three quarters or more of a provision for the election of four student members. Examination Rules Geology 101 2-units of Science (preferably Chemistry) normal full-time program shall be deemed to be a full-time Subject Timetable Clashes These Rules are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook. and at least 2-units of Mathematics. student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a part-time Students are strongly advised to check on possible timetable Unsatisfactory Progress Mathematics 111 Mathematics (2-unit course), or higher. course or less than three-quarters of a full-time program shall clashes before enrolling. Clashes may force students to take those be deemed to be a part-time student. Additional Rules are printed in the centre grey pages of this Mathematics 102 Mathematics at 3-unit level with a score of subjects in different years. Although academic staff are always Handbook. at least 120/150 in 3 -unit, or have passed Enrolment Status willing to advise students, it is the student's responsibility to Record of Failure Mathematics 111 A candidate for a qualification shall enrol as either a full-time ensure that chosen subjects may be studied concurrently. Science and Mathematics students taking subjects from other Faculties An applicant who has a record of failure at another tertiary Physics 101 HSC2-unit Mathematics withapeIfonnance student or a part-time student. must examine the timetable to ensure that clashes do not exist in institution shall not be admitted unless thalapplicant first satisfies level in the top 30% of the candidature for Combined Degree Courses their proposed courses. (a) the Faculty Board or the Graduate Studies CommiUeefor the this subject. The decision to take a combined degree course is usually taken at Although the timetable for one particular subject may clash with Faculty as appropriate, in the case of a postgraduate Physics 102 HSC 3~unit Mathematics mark of at least the end of a student's first year in his or her original degree that of another, this may not necessarily mean that this combination qualification; or 110/150. Physics 2-unit or Science 4-unit course, in consultation with the Deans of the Faculties responsible cannot bedone. Often an arrangement can be made by one or both with a perfonnance level in the top 50% of (b) the Admissions & Progression Committee, in the case of any for the two degrees. Pennission to embark on a combined degree Departmental representatives to overcome this problem. candidature for these subjects. course will normally require an average of credit levels in first other qualification that there is a reasonable prospect that the Therefore, see the Departmental representatives before deciding applicant will make satisfactory progress. Mature Age Entry year subjects. upon your final subject combinations. Re-enrolment Entry into the University is available to persons who will be at Non-Degree Students Workload A candidate for a qualification shall be required to re~eruol least 21 years of age by 1st March of the year in which enrolment Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in these The expected maximum workload for students devoting most of is sought and who have completed a limited New South Wales Rules, the Admissions & Progression Committee may on the annually during the period of this candidature. Upon receiving their time to degree studies is 40 credit points per semester. In the approval to re-enrol the candidate shall complete the prescribed Higher School Certificate Program. Subjects which will enable recommendation of the Head of a Department offering any part case of a 20 credit point subject offeredoverafull year, the work entry into the Faculty of Science and Mathematics include four of acomse pennit a person, not being a candidate for aqualifical.ion procedures and pay the fees and charges determined by the load will be rated as 10 credit points per semester. Enrolment in Council not later than the date prescribed for payment. units selected from Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics (3~unit of the University, to enrol in any year in that part of the course on excess of 40 credit points per semester can only be exceeded in course preferred), and 4-unit Science. For entry into the Bachelor payment of such fees and charges as may be prescribed by the exceptional circumstances by students with a good academic Teacher Training Courses of Mathematics degree, include 3~unit mathematics (attaining a Council. A person so enrolling shall be designated a 'non-degree' record and requires the pennission of the Dean. Prerequisites for Diploma in Education Units result of at least 120/150) and one other subject recognised for student. Students with external commitments, such as part-time admission purposes. For other degrees, the subjects should be Faculty Policy in Regard to Credit for Courses Students who intend to proceed to a Diplomain Education should presented as 2~unit courses with a result in the top 50%. employment, should enrol in fewer subjects. Such commitments familiarise themselves with the prerequisites for units offered in Completed Elsewhere cannot be taken into consideration for an extension of time for the course. Limit on Admission written work, or failure to attend examinations some of which The Faculty Board may grant Credit in specified and unspecified These prerequisites arc stated in terms of subjects of the University Where the Council is of the opinion that a limit should be placed may be scheduled on Saturday mornings. semester subjects, aggregating to a maximum of 120 credit of Newcastle. Applicants whose courses of study have inclllded upon the number of persons who may in any year be admitted to points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this Student Academic Progress subjects which are deemed forthis purpose to provide an equivalent a course or part of a course or to the University, it may impose university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions foundation may be admitted to the Diploma course as special such a limit and determine the manner of selection of those All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory determined by the Faculty Board. Such Credit to be granted may persons to be so admitted. progress and, in particular, attention is drawn to the Rules cases.

11 10 SECfIONlWO FACULTY INFORMATION SECfIONTWO FACULTY INFORMATION

In the Diploma course the Problems in Teaching and Learning Applied Science and Technology courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in terms units are grouped as follows: Graduates from the Bachelorof AppliedScience (Environmental of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Australia. The physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There History demand for graduates in areas of environmental monitoring. are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist. Social Science (Geography, Commerce, Social Science) assessment and management is steadily growing throughout Psychology Mathematics Australia. as the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process Science has penneated the requirements for development approvals Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majorlt1g in Psychology Modern Languages (French, German, Japanese) connected with almost all new developments for mining, industry, or a Bachelor of Science (Psychology) may join the Australian Psychological Society. Membership normally requires a four (b) Primary agriculture,andUIbanexpansion. Surveysofnaturalanddisturbed ecosystems are on the agenda for government at local, state and year degree in Psychology. Provision is also made for Student Prerequisites naliona11evels. Subscribers and Affiliates. For information about prerequisites, students are invited to Biological Sciences contact the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education. This contact should be made in the early stages of a degree course. The Australian Institute of Biology Incorporated was inaugurated in 1986. Its objectives are to represent the Biology profession in All secondary methods Australia., to promote education and research in Biology and to Normally at least 50 credit points (20-100;30-200 level) of a improve communication between biologists of different degree in the main teaching area and 20 credit points (20-100 disciplines. The Institute confers on its members a status similar level) of a degree in any subsidiary area. Modem Languages, to that for other Australian professional institutes. Membership Drama, Science and Social Sciences have additional specific grades are Fellow, Member. Associate and Student. Members requirements. and Fellows are able to indicate this by the appropriate letters Primary method after their qualifications. Fellowship requires distinction in Biology and nomination from the existing membership. At least 50 credit points (20-100;30-200 level) of a degree in a Membership requires a first or second class Honours degree in specified area and 20-100 level credit points of a degree in each Biology and three years relevant experience. or a pass degree of two others. The specified area is usually a secondary teaching with five years experience, or a Masters degree with two years area. relevantex perience, or aPhD. An Associaterequires anappropriate Further details may be obtained from the Faculty Secretary, pass degree or contribution to the advancement of Biology. Faculty of Education. Chemistry Role of Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majoring in Chemistry, Mathematics may join the Royal Australian Chemical Institute which has The role of the Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and Mathematics several categories of membership according to qualification and is defined by Faculty Board Rule 7 which stales: experience. Subject to any resolution of the Councilor the Academic Senate, Geology and any provisions of any Rules, a Faculty Board shall: Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science (Honours) majoring in (a) encourage and supervise the teaching, assessment and Geology may join the Geological Society of Australia Inc., the research activities of the Faculty; Australian Instituteof Geoscientists and The Australasian Institute of Mining & Metallurgy which has several categories of (b) make recommendations to the Academic Senate on any membership according to qualification and experience. matter affecting the Faculty; Mathematics (c) determine the grades of pass to be used for subjects offered in the courses for which the Faculty is responsible; For employment as a Mathematician. graduates should have at least one majorin Mathematics. An Honours degree is preferred (d) consider the examination results recommended in respect by many employers. The profession is represented by the of each of the candidates for which the Faculty is responsible Australian Mathematical Society. and takeaction in accordance with the prescribed procedures; Physics (e) make recommendations on matters concerning admissions. enrolment and progression in the courses for which the For employment as a physicist. students must have a minimum of Faculty is responsible to the Admissions and Progression an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. Committee; and An Honours degree in Physics or combined Physics/Mathemalics would be preferred. (f) deal with any matter referred to it by the Academic Senate. Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute Professional Recognition of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum j Graduates of the University of Newcastle enrolled in the Faculty of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a ~ of Science and Mathematics are recognized by a number of number of grades of membership which are related to experience ,I! different professional societies depending on their degree majors. as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors 12 13 SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION THREE Faculty Board shall make all reasonable provision to 8 Subject Requirements permit students already enrolled in the course to progress (1) The subjects which may be completed in the course for normally. the award shall be those approved by the Faculty Board 5 Enrolment and published annually as the Approved Subjects section (1) A candidate may not enrol in any year in a combination of the schedule. of subjects which is incompatible with the requirements (2) A candidate enrolled in a subject shall comply with such of the timetable for that year. academic and practica1 requirements and submit such (2) Except with the pennission of the Dean and subject to written or other work as the Department shall specify. any contrary provision in the schedule (3) ExceptasotherwisepermittedbytheHeadofDepartment. (a) acandidate may not enrol in subjects totalling more any material presented by a candidate for assessment than the equivalent of 40 credit points in any must be the work of the candidate and not have been semester; previously submitted for assessment. (b) a candidate sha1l not enrol in a subject which does (4) To complete a subject acandidate shall satisfy published not count towards the award; and departmental requirements and gain a satisfactory result in such assessments and examinations as the Faculty (c) a candidate shall not be penniued to enrol in any Board shall require. subject which is substantially equivalent to one which that candidate has previously counted towards 9 Withdrawal a degree or diploma. (1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or the course (3) A candidate for an award shall not enrol in a course or only by infonning the Academic Registrarin writing and part of a course for another award in this University the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES unless consent has first been obtained from the Dean of such notification. and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course (2) A student shall be deemed not to have enrolled in a leading to that other award, the Dean of that Faculty, subject if that student withdraws from the subject "schedule" means the schedule to these rules relevant Undergraduate Diploma & Degrees offered in the provided that a student may enrol in a combined course to the award listed under the name of the Faculty; (a) in the case of a semester length subject. before the approved by the Academic Senate leading to two awards. Faculty of Science and Mathematics Higher Education Contribution Schemecensusdate "subject" means any part of acourse for which a result Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and 6 Prerequisites and Corequisites for that semester. or may be recorded. Management (1) The Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head (b) in the case of a full year subject, before the first (2) A reference in these rules to a Head of Department shall Bachelor of Science (Aviation) of the Department may prescribe prerequisites and/or HigherEducationContributionSchemecensusdate be read not only as a reference to the person appointed corequisites for any subject offered by that Department. for that academic year. Bachelor of Environmental Science to that office but also, where a subject is not offered by (2) Except with the pennission of the Dean granted afLer Bachelor of Science a department as such. to the person approved by the (3) Except with the permission of the Dean Academic Senate to undertake the responsibilities of a considering any recommendation made by the I lead of (a) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from Bachelor of Science (psychology) Head of Department for the pUIpOse of these rules. the Department, no candidate may enrol in a subject a subject after the relevant date which shall be: Bachelor of Mathematics unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed 3 Admission as its prerequisites at any grade which may be specified (i) in the case of a semesterlengtb subject, the last Diploma in Aviation Science An applicant for admission to candidature for an award shall and has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is day of that semester, or Rules Governing Academic Awards satisfy therequirements of the University governing admission already enrolled in any subjects prescribed as its (ii) in the case of a full year subject, the last day of 1 Application of Rules to and enrolment in a course and any other additional corequisites. second semester, and requirements as may be prescribed in the schedule for that These rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the (3) Except with the pennission of the Dean, a candidate will (b) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from award. University other than the degrees of Doctor and Master. not have satisfied a prerequisite ifthe prerequisite subject a subject on more than two occasions. 4 Subject has not been completed in the preceding eight ca1endar 2 Interpretation 10 Absence (1) For the purpose of a course, a subject may be classified years. (1) In these rules, unless the context or subject matter Subject to any provision in the schedule, a candidate in good at a level detennined by the Faculty Board. ,(4) A candidate attaining a Terminating Pass in a subject otherwise indicates or requires: academic standing in the course (2) Each subjcct shall be allotted a credit point value by the shall be deemed not to have passed that subject for "award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate (a) may take an absence of one year from the course, or Academic Senate after considering the advice of the prerequisite purposes. diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate Faculty Board of the Faculty in which the department is 7 Credit (b) with the permission of the Dean , may take an absence of two for which a candidate is emolled; consecutive years from the course without prejudice to any located. (1) A Faculty Board may grant credit to a candidate in "course" means thetotal requirements of the program of right of the candidate to re-enrol in the course following such (3) The Academic Senate, after considering a request from specified and unspecified subjects, on such conditions study approved by the Academic Senate to qualify a absence. a Faculty Board. may detennine that a subject be not as it may determine, in recognition of work completed in candidate for the award as set out in the schedule; offered during a particular academic year. the University or another institution approved by the 11 Qualification for the Award "Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty; (4) The Faculty Board shall approve the subjects for the Faculty Board for this purpose. To qualify forthe award acandidale shall satisfactorily complete "department" means the departmentoffering a particular award. Any change in the list of approved subjects (2) Except as may be otherwise provided in the schedule, a the requirements governing the course prescribed in the schedule. subject and includes any other body so doing; which will have effect in the following year shall be i candidate shall not be given credit for more than sixty 12 Combined Dcgrce Programs approved by a date detennined by the Academic Senate. ~ "Faculty" means the Faculty responsible f orthe course; five percent of the (olal number of credit points required (1) Where so prescribed for a particular course, a candidate to complete the course. "Faculty Board" means the Faculty BoardoftheFaculty; (5) Where there is any change in the list of approved may complete the requirements for one Bachelordegree 15 14 SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

in conjunction with another Bachelor degree by (2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have APPROVED SUBJECTS completingacombined degree program approved by the commenced the course from a date determined by the The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Academic Senate on the advice of the Faculty Board Dean al the time al which credit is granted. Code Name Credll Points Prerequisile Corequisile and, where the other Bachelor degree is offered in another Faculty. the Faculty Board of that Faculty. 100 Level Prescribed EAMSIOI (2) Admission to a combined degree program shall be Concepts of Ecology 10 restricted to candidates who have achieved a standard of EAMSl11 Systems Approach in Ecology 10 EAMS101 perfonnance deemed satisfactory for the purposes of EAMS102 Monitoring and Statistics i 10 admission to the specific combined degree course by the EAMS112 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 EAMSI02 Faculty Board(s). EAMC103 Contemporary Environmental Philosophy 10 (3) The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined EAMCI13 Environment and Human Values 1 10 EAMC103 degree program shall be no less in quantity and quality EAMSI04 Environmental Planning and Pollution than if the two courses were taken separately. Control Legislation 10 EAMS114 Local and Regional Environmental Issues 10 (4) To qualify for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall satisfy the requirements for both degrees, except as 200 Level Prescribed may be otherwise provided. EAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 EAMS101/111 13 Relaxing Provision EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10 EAMSI01/111 EAMS201 EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data Analysis I 10 EAMS I 02/112 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Academic Senate on the recommendation of EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data Analysis II 10 EAMS 102/112 EAMS202 the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these rules. EAMC203 Environment and Human Values II 10 EAMC103/113 EAMC213 Development and Social Impact Assessment 10 EAMC103/113 EAMC203 SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE 20 cp from ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10 EAMSI02/112 AND MANAGEMENT EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10 EAMSI02/112 EAMS290 1 Qualification for the Degree EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology 10 EAMSIOI/111 (I) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall EAMS293 Anima1 Systematics and Animal Ecology 10 EAMSIOI/11I EAMS292 pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from or the list of Approved Subjects, including the prescribed other approved subjects at 200 level offered within the University. if approved by the Dean. subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in 300 Level Prescribed a particular case. EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10 EAMS201, EAMS21I (2) The subjects passed shall include: EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10 EAMS201, EAMS21I EAMS301 (a) allcast 80 credit points from 100 level subjects; EAMS302 Specialist Study 20 All Prescribed 200 level subjects (b) allcast 60 credit points from 200 level subjects; EAMS304 Regiona1 and National Environmental Issues 10 EAMSI04/114 (c) allcast 80 credit points from 300 level subjects; and EAMS314 Environmental Impact Assessment 10 EAMS104/114 (d) 20 credit points from approved electives. 2 Credit 20 cp from (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which EAMS390 Soil Consetvation and Management 10 EAMS290, EAMS291 qualified the candidate for an award of the University or EAMS391 Water and Soils: Applications and Modelling 10 EAMS290, EAMS291 EAMS390 for studies completed at another institution up to a total EAMS392 Aorn Component of Environmental Impact of 120 credit points including not more than: Assessment 10 EAMS292, EAMS293 EAMS393 Fauna Component of Environmental Impact (a) 100 credit points at the 100 level; Assessment 10 EAMS292, EAMS293 (b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology 10 EAMC203, EAMC213 (c) 20 credit points at the 300 level. EAMC313 Social Aspects of Environmental Health 10 EAMC203, EAMC213 EAMC303 (2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the or University which have not already been counted towards other approved subjects at 300 level offered within the University. if approved by the Dean. a completed award. Footnotes 3 Time Requirements The normal patternfor the Bachelor ofApplied Science Enyiromnental Assessmenl and Managemenl degree is 80 credit poinlsat 100 (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a leyel, 80 credit poinls at 200 leyel and 80 credit points at 300 level. candidate shall complete the course within nine years of Leave ofAbsence - For the purposes ofRule LO ofthe Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good study. standing if, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re·enrol without restrictions.

16 17 SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULFS

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL APPROVED SUBJECTS SCIENCE The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: 1 Qualification for the Degree Code Name Credit Points PrerequisiJe Corequisile (I) To qualify for admission to the degree. candidates shall 100 Level Prescribed pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from BIOL101 Plant & Animal Biology 10 the list of Approved Subjects including the prescribed B10Ll02 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution 10 subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in CHEM101 Chemistry 101 10 a particular case. CHEM102 Chemistry 102 10 (2) the subjects passed shall include: GEOG101 Introduction to Physical Geography 10 (a) at least 80 credit points from 100 level subjects; GEOLIOI The Environment 10 (b) atleast 60 credit points from ZOO level subjects; and SCEN101 Environmental Investigations I 10 STATIo! Introductory Statistics 10 (c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects. or 2 Credit GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOLIOI (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which 200 Level Prescribed qualified the candidate for an award of the University or SCEN201 Environmental Investigations II 10 SCENIOI for studies completed at another institution up to a total SCEN202 Environmental Planning & Pollution Control 10 of 120 credit points including not more than: SCEN203 Water Resources Management 10 (a) 100 credit points at the 100 level; 300 Level Prescribed (b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and SCEN301 Environmental Project 10 SCEN201 (c) 20 credit points at the 300 level. SCEN302 Environmental Impact Assessment Techniques 10 SCEN202 (2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GEOG20I, GEOG203 University which have not already been counted towards At the 200 and 300 Level the prescribed subjects are taken from one of the three strands of Bioloeical Sciences, Chemistry or Earth a completed award. Science as follows: 3 Time Requirements Prescribed subjects for Biological Sciences strand (1) Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board. a 200 Level candidate shall complete the course within nine years of B10L207 Ecology 10 B10LlOI, BIOLl02 study. CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM1OI,CHEMI02 (2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have 10 cp from commenced the course from a date detennined by the GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOL101 Dean at the time at which credit is granted. PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 See ' GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGlo! GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOG101 20 cp from B10L201 Biochemistry IO B10LlO!, B10Ll02 BIOL202 Animal Physiology 10 BIOLIOI, B10Ll02 BIOL206 Plant Physiology 10 B10LlOI, BIOLI02 300 Level B10L311 Environmental Biology IO B10L203 or B10L207 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 10 cp from PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications IO PHYS102 GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation IO GEOG203 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203 GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 GEOL2130rGEOO204 20 cpfrom B10L302 Reproductive Physiology 10 TwoBIOL2oo BIOL303 Environmental Plant Physiology IO TwoBIOL200 BIOL304 Whole Plant Development 10 TwoBIOL200 BIOL31O Microbiology 10 BIOLZOI & one other BIOL200

18 19 I ; SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RlIT..ES SECTION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

Cod. Name Credit Points Prerequisite CorequisiU Cod. Name Credit Points Prerequisite CorequislU BIOL312 Animal Development 10 TwoBIOL200 300 Level Prescribed subjects for Chemistry strand GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 10 GEOG203 200 Level GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 GEOL213 or GEOG204 GEOG305 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI.CHEMI02 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 20 cp from BIOL207 Ecology 10 BIOLIOI. BIOLl02 PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles, 10 cp from Processes and Applications 10 PHYSI02 BI0L311 CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 Environmental Biology 10 BIOL203 0 BIOL207 CHEM361 CHEM231 Organic Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 Elective CHEM241 Physical Olemistry 10 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 10 See Course Director for approval Footnotes 10 cp from GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOLlO! Tm normal pattern for tm Bachelor ofEnvironmenJal Science degree is 80 credit poinJsallOO level, 80 credit poin/sat 200 level and PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 See ' 80 credit points at 300 level. GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGIOI Leave ofAbsence -For the purposes ofRule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic A wards, a candidate shaJJ be deemed to be in good GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOG101 standing if, at tm conclusion of the year of las/ enrolment in tm course, that candidate was eligible to re·enrol without restrictions.

300 Level I Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science with a BIOL311 Environmental Biology 10 BIOL203 or B10L207 perfonnance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects. CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEM211 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 10 cp from CHEM313 Industrial Olemical Analysis 5 CIIEM211 CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental Systems Not in 1993 CHEM211 CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM221 CHEM33I Organic Olemistry 10 CHEM23 I CHEM341 Physical Olemistry 10 CHEM241. MATH102 orMATH112 CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5 CHEM241. MATHI02 orMATHI12 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 CHEM241 10 cp from PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications 10 PHYS102 GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 10 GEOG203 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203 GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 GEOL213 or GEOG204

Prescribed subjects for Earth Science strand 200 Level GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOLIOI or STATIO! Introductory Statistics 10 GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGIO! GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOGIOI 20 cp from PHYS102 Physics 102 10 See' B10L207 Ecology 10 BIOLIOI. BIOL102 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 GEOL213 Ancient Environments & Organisms 10 GEOLl02

, ~' 20 21 • I SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE APPROVED SUBJECTS Interpretation The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are in the discipline areas of 1. In this schedule, "discipline" means a branch of learning Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics, Physics and Psychology and are listed in Group A Subjects. recognised as such by the Faculty Board. Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite CorequuiJe Qualification for the Degree 2. (1) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall GROUP A SUBJECTS pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES the list of Approved Subjects and comprising - BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology 10 (a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects; B10LI02 Cell Biology, Genetics & Evolution 10 BIOL201 Biochemistry 10 BIOLI01,BIOLI02 (b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects; BIOL202 Animal Physiology 10 BIOLIOI, BIOLI02 (c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects. BIOL204 Cell & Molecular Biology 10 BIOLI01, BIOLI02 (2) The subjects shall be chosen in accordance with the BIOL205 Molecular Genetics 10 BIOLI01, B10LI02 following conditions - BIOL206 Plant Physiology 10 BIOLIOI, B10LI02 (a) the 60 credit points at the 100 level shall be BIOL207 Ecology 10 BIOLI01, BIOLI02 comprised of at least 20 credit points chosen from Students who have each of three disciplines; completed BIOL203 are (b) a sequence of at least 20 credit points at the 100 not eligible to do level, 30 credit points at the 200 level and 40 credit this subject points at the 300 level shall be chosen from a single BIOLJOI Cell Processes Not in 1993 BIOL201 & one BIOL200 discipline; BIOLJ02 Reproductive Physiology 10 TwoBIOL200 (c) not more than 160creditpointsmaYbechosenfrom BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology 10 TwoBlOL200 a single discipline; and BIOL304 Whole Plant Development 10 TwoBIOL200 Immunology TwoBIOL200 (d) subjects at the 300 level may not be chosen from BIOL305 10 more than three disciplines. BIOL307 Molecular Biology of Plant Notin 1993 Two BIOL200 incl. one Development of BIOL201 or B10L204 Credit orBIOL205 3. (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which BIOLJ09 Molecular Biology 10 BIOL201 and B10L205 qUalified the candidate for an award of the University or BIOL31O Microbiology 10 BIOL201 & one other for studies completed at another institution up to a total BIOL200 (BIOL204 of 120 credit points including not more than - advisable) (a) 100 credit points at the 100 level; B10LJll Environmental Biology 10 BIOL207 or BIOl203 (b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and Students who have completed BI0L.306 are (c) 20 credit points at the 300 level. not eligible to do this subject (2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the B10LJ12 Animal Development 10 Two BIOL200. Students who University which have not already been counted towards have completed BI0L308 a completed award. are not eligible to do this subject Time Requirements CHEMISTRY 4. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a CHEM101 Chemistry 101 10 candidate shall complete the course within nine years of CHEM102 Chemistry 102 10 study. CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 (2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEMlOl, CHEMI02 commenced the course from a date determined by the CHEM23 I Organic Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 Dean at the time at which credit is granted. CHEM241 Physical Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 Combined Degrees CHEM251 Applied Chemistry Not in 1993 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 5. A candidate may undertake one of the foUowing combined Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEM211 degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules CHEM311 Governing Academic awards, namely - CHEM312 Chemometrics 5 CHEM211, MATHI020r MATH112 Science/Arts CHEM313 Industria] Chemical Analysis 5 CHEM211 Science/Computer Science CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental Not in 1993 CHEM211 Science!Mathematics Systems ;: Science/Engineering. , CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM221 22 , 23 SECf!ON THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

Cod. Name Credit Poinls Prerequisile CorequisiU Cod. Name Credit Polnls Prerequisite Conqllisile CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding & Cluster GOOL315 Sedimentology 10 GEOL2!2 & GOOL2I3 Chemistry 5 CHEM221 GOOL316 Geology of Fuels 10 GOOL213 CHEM323 Bioinorganic Coordination Chemistry 5 CHEM221 GOOL317 Resource & Exploration Geology 10 GOOL212 & GOOL214 CHEM331 Organic Chemistry 10 CHEM23 I GOOL318 Geology Field Course 318 5 GOOL2I3 CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry 5 CHEM23 I GOOL319 Geology Field Course 319 5 GEOL216 & GOOL3 I3 CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanism Nolin 1993 CHEM23 I GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary En"vuonments 10 GEOL2I3 or GEOG204 CHEM334 Identification of Natural Compounds 5 CHEM23 I GEOL321 Groundwater & Soils Not in 1993 CHEM335 Organic Spectroscopy 5 CHEM23 I CHEM341 Physical Otemistry 10 CHEM24I, MATHI02 MATHEMATICS orMATHII2 MATHIII Mathematics 111 10 2 unit HSC Mathematics CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy 5 CHEM241, MATHI02 MATHII2 Mathematics 112# 10 MATHIII Conversion or MATH112 5 MATHI02 Mathematics 102# 10 See 2 or MATH)) 1 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 CHEM241 MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 See 2 or MATHl02 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 or (MATHIII & GEOGRAPHY MATHII2) GEOGIOI Introduction to Physical Geography 10 See' MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOGI02 Introduction to Human Geography 10 See' or (MATH I II &MATHII2) GEOG201 Methods in Physical Geography 10 GEOGIOI or (MATHI02 & Permission GEOG202 Methods in Human Geography 10 GEOGI02 of the H.O.D.J). GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGIOI MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 MATH201 MATH203 GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOGIOI MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) GEOG207 Population, Culture & Resources 10 GEOGI02 or (MATH I II &MATHII2) GEOG208 Cities & Regions 10 GEOGI02 or (MATH 102 & Permission GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 10 GEOG201 plus either of the H.O.D.J). MATH204 Real Analysis GEOG203 or GEOG204 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography 10 GEOG202 plus either or (MATHI II &MATHII2 GEOG205 or GEOG206 & MATHI03) MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 10 GEOG203 5 MATH204' MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or MATH201 (MATH III & MA THII2) GEOG306 Geography of Australia: An 10 GEOG202 plus either or (MATHI02 & Permission Historical Perspective GEOG205 or GEOG206 of H.O.D.J) GEOG309 Society & Space 10 GEOG202 plus either MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 MA TH206 & MA THI03 GEOG205 or GEOG206 MATH209 Algebra 5 MATH218 4 GEOG31O Directed Studies in Human Geography 10 GEOG202 plus either MATH210 Geometry 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOG205 or GEOG206 or (MATH II I &MATHII2 GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GEOG201 GEOG203 &MATHI03) GEOG315 Production, Work & Territory 10 GECXJ202 plus either MATH211 Group Theory 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOG205 or GEOG206 or (MATHII 1 &MATHII2 GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography Not in 1993 GECXJ201 plus either & MATHI03) GE0G203 or GEOG204 MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 MATHI02or MATHl03 GEOLOGY or (MATHII 1 & MATHII2) GOOLlOI The Environment 10 MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03)or GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOLIOI (MATH III & MA THII2) GOOL211 Optical Mineralogy 5 GEOLl02 MATH214 Mechanics 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GOOL212 Introductory Petrology 10 GEOL211 or (MATHIII & MATHI12 GOOL213 Ancient Environments & Organisms 10 GEOLl02 & MATHI03) GOOL214 Geological Structures & Resources 10 GEOLl02 MATH215 Operations Research 5 MATHI02or MATHI03 GOOL215 Geology Field Course 215 10 GEOLl02 or (MATH II I & MATHII2) GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216 5 GEOL215 MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GOOL311 Igneous Petrology & Crustal Evolution 10 GEOL312 or (MATHIII & MATH! 12 GOOL312 Metamorphic Petrology 10 GEOL212 & COMPIOI) or (MATHIII GEOL313 Structural Geology & Geophysics 10 GEOL214 & MATHlI2 & MATHI03) GEOL314 Stratigraphic Methods 10 GEOL213

24 25 SECTION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

Cod. Name Credit Points Prerequisile Corequisile Code Name Credil Points Prerequisile Corequisile tMATHZI7 Linear Algebra 1 5 MATHIOZ or (MATH11 I PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 10 PHYS203 PHYS301 &MATHllZ) PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 PHYS20Z MATH201 (MATHI02 & MATHl03) tMATHZIS Linear Algebra 2 5 PHYS305 Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism 10 PHYS302 or (MATH111 & MATH11Z &MATHI03) PSYCHOLOGY MATH301 Logic & Set Theory Nolin 1993 20 c.p. from 200 level MATH PSYCI01 Psychology Introduction 1 . \0 incl. one of MATH204, 209, PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 \0 PSYCI01 Zl1, ZIZ, ZIS' PSYC201 Foundations for Psychology \0 PSYCI02 MATH302 General Tensors & Relativity Not in 1993 MATH201 MATHZIS' PSYC202 Basic Processes \0 PSYC102 PSYC201 MATH303 Variational Methods and Integral Not in 1993 MATH201 MATHZ03 PSYC203 DevelopmentaJ & Social Processes \0 PSYCI02 PSYC201 Equations MATH204' PSYC204 Individual Processes 10 PSYC102 PSYC201 MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 10 MATH201 MATH203 PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Not in 1993 PSYCI02 PSYC201 MATH204' MATHZIS' PSYC206 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Not in 1993 PSYCI02 PSYC201 MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 10 MATH201 MATH202 PSYC301 Advanced Foundations for Psychology \0 PSYC201, PSYC202 MA TH203 MA TH204' & PSYC203 MATH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 MATH201 MATHZ03 (Advisory) PSYC302 Independent Project \0 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MA TH204' MA TH206 MATH207 PSYC303 Basic Processes 1 \0 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics 10 MATH201 MATHZ03 PSY004 Basic Processes 2 10 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MATH206 PSY005 Individual Processes \0 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MATH30S Geometry 2 \0 20 c.p. from 200 level PSY006 Advanced Social Processes \0 PSYC201 PSYOOI MATH incl. one of PSY007 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MATH209, MATHZII, PSYOOS Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 \0 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MATHZIS' PSY009 Topics in Neural Science 10 PSYC201 PSYOO1 MATH309 Combinatorics Not in 1993 MATHZIS' MATH310 Functional Analysis 10 MATHZ05 MATH311 Measure Theory & Integration Not in 1993 MATH205 GROUP B SUBJECTS MATH312 Algebra 10 MATH2184 & one of Group B Subjects may be chosen from subjects offered in courses leading to other degrees of the University, and must be approved MATH209 MATHZ\o by the Dean. MATHZll Footnotes MATH313 Numerical Analysis (Theory) 10 MATH201 MATHZ03 The normal pattern/or the Bachelor 0/ Science degree is 80 credit points at 100 level, 80 credit points at 200 level and 80 credit MATH204' MATHZIS' points at 300 level. MATH314 Optimization 10 MATH201 MATHZIS' Leave 0/ Absence-For the purposes a/Rule 10 a/the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in MATH315 Mathematical Biology 10 MA TlU01 MATH203 good standing if, at the conclusion 0/ th£ year of 1o.st enrolment in the courSt!, that candidate was eJigiblt! to re-enrol withoUl MATHZ13 restrictions.

MATH316 Industrial Modelling Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH20Z I Students should notc that GEOGI01 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography, and for admission to MATHZ03 MATHZI3 Geography Honours GEOG401. MATH216 & Permission 1 Fntry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150. ofH.O.D. 3 This option is for students who take MATH103 in second semester. ~ MA TH208 in 1990. MATH317 Number Theory Not in 1993 30 c.p. from 200 level MATH 5 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MA TH204. 5 MATH31S Topology 10 MA TH204 or MA TH205 6 Advisory entry requirement HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a performance in the top 30% of candidature. 7 Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and 2 unit PHYSICS Physics or 4 unit Science with a performance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects. PHYS101 Physics 101 10 Sec' • Students achieving a credit level or better in PIIYSI01 and PHYSI02 may be admitted with the approval of the llead of PHYSIOZ Physics 102 10 See 10r PHYS101 Department. PHYS103 Physics 103 10 PHYS\oZ # Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH112 and MATHI02 PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 MATH \03 PHYS \03' t Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH217 and MATH218 PHYS20Z Mechanics & Thermal Physics 10 MATHIOZ PHYSI03' PHYS203 Solid Slate & Atomic Physics 10 PIIYS201 PHYS205 Scientific Measurements Principles, Processes & Applications 10 PHYS\oZ PHYS301 Mathemalical Methods & Quantum Mechanics 10 PHYSZOI MATHZOI, MATH203 PHYS30Z Electromagnetism & Electronics 10 PHYS201 MATH201

26 27 SECfION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION) APPROVED SUBJECTS 1 Qualification for the Degree The subjects approved* by the Faculty Board for the award are: (1) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall GROUP A SUBJECTS pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising: Code Name Credit Points Prerequlsile Coreq"lslU (a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level Group A 100 Level subjects; AVIAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5 (b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects of AVIAIIO Introductory Navigation 5 which 50 credit points shall be from Group A; and AVIAl11 Introductory Aerodynamics 5 AVIAI13 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5 (c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which 40 credit points shall be from Group A. AVIA114 Right Rules & Procedures 5 AVIA115 Reciprocating Engines 5 2 Credit AVIA116 Commercial Meteorology 5 AVIAI09 (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which AVIA117 Navigation 5 AVIAll0 qualified the candidate for an award ofthe University or AVIA118 Aerodynamics 5 AVIAlll for studies completed at anolherinstitution up to a total AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Right of 120 credit points. Rules & Procedures 10 AVIA114 (2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the AVIA121 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5 University which have not already been counted towards a completed award. 200 Level AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVIA116 3 Time Requirements AVIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 AVIAI17 (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVIA117 candidale shall complete the course within nine years of AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5 AVIA118 study. AVIA211 Jet Engines 5 60 cp AVIA 100 level (2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 60 cp AVIAl 00 level commenced the course from a date detennined by the AVIA214 Jet Aircraft Right Planning 10 AVIA117 Dean at the time at which credit is granted. AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Performance 5 AVIA123 AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 AVIA207 AVIA222 Management of Aviation 5 AVIA120 AVIA223 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5 AVIA121 300 Level AVIA306 Advanced Aircraft Operations 10 AVIA214 AVIA310 Advanced Navigation 10 AVIA209 AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics 5 A VIA318 A VIA223 AVIA315 Advanced Aviation Management 5 AVIA222 AVIA317 Aviation Climatology 5 AVIA207 AVIA318 Aircraft Stability and Control 5 AVIA118 AVIA320 Aviation Instruction Practicum I 5 AVIA308 AVIA321 Aviation Instruction Practicum II 5 AVIA308 AVIA311 AVIA320 GROUP B SUBJECTS 100 Level AVIA112 Introduclory Human Factors 10 AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVIA112 AVIA123 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5 AVIA113 200 Level AVIA212 Human Factors 10 AVIA119 AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 AVIA213 AVIA221 Human Perrormance in Multi-Crew Operations 5 AVIA212

28 29 SECf10N THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS Code Name Credit Points Prerequisile Coreq"lslU 1 Qualincation for the Degree 300 Level (1) To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall AVIA305 Aircraft Design 5 AVIA2I3 AVIA3IS pass subjects totalling 240 credit points from the list of AVIA30S Aviation Instruction 10 60 cp A VIA 200 level Approved Subjects and comprising: AVIA3II Advanced Aviation Instruction 10 AVIA30S (aJ not more than SO credit points from 100 level AVIA314 Directed Study 10 At least two of the subjects of which 20 credit pointS shall be from following: A VIA306 Group A; AVIA30S AVIA310 (b) at least 70 credit points from 200 level subjects of AVIA31S which: AVIA316 Right Deck PerfolDlance 5 AVIA221 (i) at least 25 credit points shall be from Group A; Footnotes (ii) at least 5 credit points shall be from Group B The normal pal/ern/or the Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree is SO crediJ points at }OO level, 80 credit points at 200 level and subjects; and 80 credit points at 300 level. (iii) at least a further 30 credit points shall be from Lea'le ofAbsence - For the purposes ofRule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in Group B and/or Group C~ good standing if, at the conclusion of the year 0/ last elU'o/ment in 1M cOUl'se. that candidate was eligible 10 re·enrol without (c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of restrictions. which: * Refers to the list of approved subjects in the Schedule - Bachelor of Science, Group A Subjects. (i) at least 40 credit points shall be from Group A; and (ii) at least a further 40 credit points shall be from Group A and/or Group C. 2 Credit (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qUalified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than: (a) 100 credit points at the 100 level; (b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and (c) 20 credit points at the 300 level. (2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted toward s a completed award. 3 Time Requirements (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study. from its commencement. (2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall bedeemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted. 4 Combined Degrees A candidate may undertake one of the following combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, namely: Mathematics/Arts; Mathematics/Commerce; Mathematics/Engineering; Mathematics!Economics; Mathematics/Computer Science; Mathematics!Surveying; Mathematics/Science.

31 30 SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIlREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS Code Name Credil Points Prerequisite Corequisile The subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are: MATH314 Optimization 10 MATH201 MATH21S' GROUP A SUBJECTS MATH315 Mathematical Biology 10 MATH201 MATH203 MATH213 MATH316 Industrial Modelling Not in 1993 MA TH20! MATH202 Code Name CrediJ Points Prerequisite Corequisilt MATH203 MATH213 MATHl02 Mathematics 1021 10 See20rMATHIli MATH216 & Pennission MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 See2 or MATHI02 ofH.Q.D. or (MATH 11 I & MATH311 Number Theory Not in 1993 30 c. p. from 200 level MATH MATHI12) MATH31S Topology 10 MA TH204' or MA TH205 MATH112 Mathematics 1121 10 MATHI1 I STATIO! Statistical Inference 10 STAT201 STAT202 MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH201 or (MATHII1 &MATHI12) STATI02 Study Design 10 STAT2O! STAT202 or (MATHI02 & Permission STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 10 STAT201 & STAT202 ofH.O.D.') Advisory ST AT301 MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) STATI04 Time Series Analysis 10 STA1'201 & STA T202 or (MATH111 &MATHI12) Advisory ST AT301 or (MATHI02 & Permission ofH.O.D') GROUP B SUBJECTS MATH204 Real Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) or (MATH111 &MATHI12 or (MATHI1I & & MATHI03) MATHlI2) MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH201 MATH214 Mechanics 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) or (MATHI11 &MATHI12) or (MATH 11 I &MATHI12 or (MATHI02 & Permission & MATHl03) ofH.O.D.') MATH215 Operations Research 5 MA THI 02 or MATHI03 MATH21S Linear Algebra 2 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or (MATHI11 &MATHI12) or (MATH 11 I &MATHlI2 GROUP C SUBJECTS &MATHI03) MATHII1 Mathematics 111 10 2 unit HSC Mathematics MATH301 Logic & Set Theory Not in 1993 20 credit points from MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 MATH20! MATH203 200 level MATH incl. one of MATH204, MATH209, MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces 5 MATH204' MATH211, MATH212, MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 MATH206 & MATHl03 MATH21S' MATH209 Algebra 5 MATH2IS' MATH302 General Tensors & Relativity Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH21S' MATH210 Geometry 1 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) MATH303 Variational Methods and Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH203 or (MATHI 11 &MATHI12 Integral Equations MATH204s & MATHI03) MATH211 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 10 MATH201 MATH203 Group Theory 5 or (MATHI1 1 &MATHI12 MATH204' MATH21S' & MATHI03) MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 10 MA TH201 MATH202 MA TH203 MA TH204' MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 MATHI020rMATH103 or (MATHI1 1 &MATHlI2) MATH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 MATH201 MATH203 Advisory MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MA TH204' MATH206 MATH207 or (MATHI1 1 &MATHII2 MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics 10 MA TH201 MATH203 & COMPlOl) or (MATHII 1 MATH206 & MATHlI2 & MATHI03) MATH30S Geometry 2 10 2Oc. p. from 200 level MATH PHYSICS incl.one of MATH209 PHYS201 MATHI03 PHYS103' MATH21I MATH21S' Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 PHYS202 MATHI02 PHYSI03' MATH309 Combinatorics Nolin 1993 MATH21S' Mechanics & Thennal Physics 10 PHYS203 PHYS20! MATH310 Functional Analysis 10 MATH205 Solid Stale & Atomic Physics 10 PHYS205 MATH311 Measure Theory & Integration Not in 1993 MATH205 Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications 10 PHYSI02 MATH312 Algebra 10 MATH2184 & one of MATH209 PHYS301 PHYS201 MATH2O! MATH203 MATH210 MATH211 Mathematical Methods & Quantum Mechanics 10 PHYS302 10 PHYS201 MATH201 MATH313 Numerical Analysis (Theory) 10 MATH201 MATH203 Electromagnetism & Flectronics MATH204'MATH21S' PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 10 PHYS203 PHYS301 PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 PHYS202 MAT1I201

32 33

" SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DlPLOMA RULES SECTION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES

Code Na",~ endil POUt" Prer~quisil~ SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (pSYCHOLOGy) PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &: Advanced Electromagnetism 10 PHYS302 1 Interpretation In this schedule, "discipline" means a branch of leamina STATISTICS reco&nised as such by the FaQllty Board. 9 STATIO! Mathematical Statistics 10 MATHl030rSTATl01 2 QualiOcation for the Degree IL MATH 1 12 (or equivalent level of Mathematics) (1) To qualify for admission to the dearee. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 320 credit points from the Hst of STATIOZ Re&ression Analysis 10 STATIO! orSTATlO! Approved Subjects and comprising: & MATH1l2lMATHI02 or equivalent level of (a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects of Mathematics which: STATI03 Queues & Simulation 5 MATH1l2lMATHI02 STAT204for (i) 20 credit points shall befrom GroupA subjects; or eqUivalent BSe deere- and STATI04 Non-parametric Statistics 5 STATIOl orSTATlOl STAT203 for (ii) 40 credit points shall be comprised of 20 credit & MATHll21 MATH10Z BSe deere- points from each of two disciplines, or equivalent STAT203 for (b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects of STATI05 Engineerine Slalisticst 5 MATH1l20r MATH10Z which 40 credit points shall be from Group A COMPUTER SCIENCE subjects; COMPZ01 Advanced Data Structures 5 COMPZ05 & MATH212 (c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of COMP202 Computer Architecture 5 COMPZ03 which 60 credit points shall be from Group A COMPZ03 Assembly Language 5 COMPI01 or COMP212 subjects; and COMP204 Proerammine Language Semantics 5 COMPZ05 COMPZ05 System Proeramming 5 COMPI010rCOMP212 (d) 80 credit points from 400 level subjects taken from Group A subjects. COMP206 Theory of Computation 5 COMPI01 COMP212 MATH212 COMP212 Introduction to Programmine 5 3 Grading of the Degree COMP241 Cognitive Science 10 (1) The degree shall be conferred as an ordinary de&ree COMP3O! Compiler Desiifi 10 COMP201 except that, where the peIformance of a candidate has COMP3OZ Artificial Intellieence 10 COMPI01 or COMP212 reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be COMP303 Computer Networks 10 COMPZ01 of sufficient merit, the degree shall be conferred with COMP304 Database Design 10 COMP201 Honours. COMP305 Algorithm Desien & Analysis 10 COMPZ01, COMP206 (2) There shall be three classes of Honours, namely Class I, COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 COMP201 MATH216 & Class II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, either MATH217 or MATH218 namely Division 1 and Division 2. COMP307 Software Engineering PrincipleslO 10 COMP2Ol 4 Credit COMP308 Operating Systems 10 COMPZ01 COMP202 (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which Footnotes qualified the candidate for an award of the University or The normal paltern/or tM Bachelor 0/ Matlwmatics Degree is 80 cruiit points at}OO level, 80 credit poin/s at 200 l~vel and 80 for studies completed at another institution up to a total credit pointsal 300 i~vel. of 120 credit points including not more than: Leave ofAbsence -For lIu! purposes ofRule }O o/t~ Ruks Governing Academic Awards, a candidiJt~ shall be deefMd to be in (a) 100 credit points at the 100 level; good standing if, at IN conciwsion O/IN year of last enrolnwnl in the COlUse, that candidate was eligible to r~-enrol wilhoUl restrictions. (b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and

I Credit cannot be obtained forbolh MATHI12and MATHI02 (c) 20 credit points at the 300 level. 2 Entry requirement HSC 3 Wlit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150. (2) Credit may be granted for 311 subjects completed in the 3 This option is for students who take MATH103 in second semester. University which have not already been counted towards • MATH208 in 1990. a completed award. !i Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do oot need MATH204. S Time Requirements 6 Advisory entry requirement: HSC 2 unit Mathematics with peIfonnance in the top 30% of candidature. (I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a 7 Advisory entry requirement: HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of alleast 110/150 and 2 Unit Physics or 4 Unit Science with a candidate shall complete the course within eleven years peIfonnance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects. of study, from its commencement. • Students achievine a Credit level or better in PHYSI0t and PHYSI02 may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department. (2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall be deemed 9 Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT201 and STAT205. to have commenced the course from a date determined 10 COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion of a Project report in Semester 2. by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted. • Other approved subjects may be chosen from the schedules for the degrees offered elsewhere in the University, if approved by the Dean.

34 35 SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RlIT..BS

APPROVED SUBJECTS SCHEDULE - DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award consist of the following prescribed Group A and Group B subjects: 1 Qualification for the Diploma GROUP A SUBJECTS (1) To qualify for admission to the diplomaacandidate shall Cod. Name Credil Points Prerequisile CorequisiU pass subjects totalling 160 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising: 100 Level (a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level Group A PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10 subjects; and PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10 PSYCIOI (b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects 200 Level including at least 50 credit points from Group A PSYC20l Foundations for Psychology PSYCI02 10 subjects. PSYC202 Basic Processes 10 PSYCI02 PSYC201 Grading PSYCZ03 Developmental & Social Processes 10 PSYCI02 PSYC201 2 PSYC204 Individual Processes 10 PSYCI02 PSYC201 In cases where a candidate's performance in the course has PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Not in 1993 PSYCI02 PSYC201 reached a level determined by Ute Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies in Aviation, the PSYC206 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Not in 1993 PSYCI02 PSYC201 Diploma may be conferred with Merit. 300 Level 3 Time Requirements PSYOOl Advanced Foundations for Psychology \0 PSYC201, PSYC202 (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a PSYC203 candidate shall complete the course within six years of PSY002 Independent Project 10 PSYC201 PSYOOI study. and 40 cp from (2) A candidate who has beengranted credit shall bedeemed PSY003 Basic Processes 1 10 PSYC201 PSYOOI to have commenced the course from a date determined PSY004 Basic Processes 2 10 PSYC20l PSYOOI by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted. PSY005 Individual Processes \0 PSYC20l PSYOOI PSY006 Advanced Social Processes \0 PSYC20l PSYOOl PSY007 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10 PSYC201 PSYOOl PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 10 PSYC201 PSYOOI PSY009 Topics in Neura] Science \0 PSYC201 PSYOO1 400 Level PSYC40l Psychology Honours 401 40 see ' PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 40 PSYC401 or PSYC403 Psychology 403 30 Consult Dept. PSYC404 Psychology 404 50 PSYC403 Footnotes The normal pattern/or the Bachelor 0/ Science (Psychology) degree is 80 credit points at 100 level, 80 credit points at 200 level, 80 credit points aJ 300 level and 80 credit points at 400 level. uave 0/ Absence-For the purposes o/Rule 10 o/the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shalJ be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion 0/ the year 0/ last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions. I Entry to PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302: consult the Department for details. GROUP B SUBJECTS Group B Subjects are in the following discipline areas: Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics and Physics: they are referred to in the Bachelor of Science Schedule of Approved Group A Subjects (excepting the discipline of Psychology).

36 37 UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECf!ON THREE SEcnONFOUR

APPROVED SUBJECTS 1be subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are: GROUP A SUBJECTS Cotk Name CTHil Points Prerequisile Corequism 100 Level AVIA!09 Introductory Meteorology S AVIAI\o Introductory Navigation S AVIAll! Introductory Aerodynamics S AVIA113 Aircraft Performance & Systems S AVIA114 Flight Rules & Procedures S AVIA115 Reciprocating Engines 5 AVIA116 Commercial Meteorology 5 AVIAI09 AVIA117 Navigation 5 AVIAI10 AVIA118 Aerodynamics 5 AVIA111 AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight Rules & Procedures \0 AVIA114 AVIAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5 200 Leve! AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVIA116 AVIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 AVIA117 APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR TIlE BACHELOR DEGREES AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVIA117 AVIA2\o Compressible Aerodynamics 5 AVIA118 AVIA211 Jet Engines 5 60 cp AVIA 100 level List of Approved Subjects Referred to in Bachelor Degree Schedules AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 60 cp A VIAl 00 level F::: Full Year; S1 :: Semester 1 ~ S2 = Semester 2 AVIA214 Jet Aircraft FJiaht Planning \0 AVIAI17 Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance 5 AVIAI23 1993 1994 1993 AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 AVIA207 APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY AVIA222 Management of Aviation 5 AVIAI20 Environmental Assessment and Management suhjects AVIA223 Aviation Computing and FJeclronics AVIAI21 5 Available only to Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management candidates GROUP B SUBJECTS EAMCI03 Contemporary Environmental 10 SI 3 100 Level Philosophy AVIA112 Introductory Human Factors \0 EAMC113 Environment and Human 10 S2 3 EAMCI03 AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVIA112 Values I AVIAI23 Aircraft Petformance & Loading 5 AVIAI13 EAMC203 Environment and Human 10 Sl 3 EAMCI03 200 Level Values II EAMC1l3 AVIA212 Human Factors \0 AVIA119 EAMC213 Development and Social 10 S2 3 EAMCI03 EAMC203 AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 AVIA213 Impact Assessment EAMC1l3 AVIA221 Human Performance in Multi-Crew Operations 5 AVIA212 EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene & 10 FY 3 EAMC203 Footnotes Toxicology EAMC213 The normal pattern/or the Diploma in Aviation Science course is 80 credit points al100 level and 80 credit points at 200 level. EAMC313 Social Aspects of 10 52 3 EAMC203 EAMC303 Leave ofAbsence-For the purposes ofRule 10 o/the Rules Governing Academic A wards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good Environmental Health EAMC213 standing if, at the conclusion oflhe year 0/ last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions. EAM5101 Concepts of Ecology 10 SI 4 • Refers to the list of approved subjects in the Schedule - Bachelor of Science Group A SUbjects. EAM5111 Systems Approach in Ecology 10 S2 4 EAM5101 EAMSI02 Monitoring and Statistics I 10 51 5 llAMSI12 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 52 5 EAM5102 llAM5104 Environmental Planning and 10 SI 4 Pollution Control Legislation llAMSl14 Local and Regional 10 S2 4 Environmental Issues llAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 51 4 EAM5101 EAMS1l1

38 39 SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrS SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBfficrs

Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10 52 4 EAM5101 EAM5201 AVIAt19 Aviation Psychology 5 52 3 AVIA112 EAM5111 & Medicine EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data 10 51 5 EAM5102 AVIAl20 Aviation Law, Commercial 10 52 4 AVIA114 Analysis! EAM5112 Flight Rules and Procedures EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data 10 52 5 EAM51 02 EAM5202 A VIAl 21 Aircraft Systems 5 52 3 Analysis II EAM5112 & Propulsion EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10 51 4 EAMSlO2 AVIAl23 Aircraft Performance & 5 52 3 AVIA113 EAM5112 Loading EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10 52 4 EAM5102 EAM5290 AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 51 3 AVIA116 EAM5112 A VIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 51 3 AVIA117 EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant 10 51 4 EAM5101 A VIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 51 3 AVIAI17 Ecology EAM5111 AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5 51 3 AVIA118 EAMS293 Animal Systematics and 10 52 4 EAM5101 EAM5292 A VIA211 Jet Fngines 5 52 3 60cp Animal Ecology EAM5111 AVIAIOO level EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10 51 4 EAM5201 AVIA212 Human Factors 10 51 4 AVIA119 EAM5211 AVIA213 Aircraft Structures 5 51 3 60cp EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10 52 4 EAM5201 EAM5301 & Materials A VIAlOO level EAM5211 A VIA214 Jet Aircraft Flight Planning 10 52 6 AVIA117 EAMS302 Specialist Study 20 F 4 All Prescribed AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft 5 51 3 AVIAI23 200 level subjects Performance EAMS304 Regional and National 10 51 4 EAM5104 A VIA219 High Altitude 5 52 3 AVIA207 Environmental Issues EAM5114 Meteorology and EAMS314 Environmental Impact 10 52 4 EAM5104 Forecasting Assessment EAM5114 A VIA220 Aircraft Fatigue 5 52 3 AVIA213 EAMS390 Soil ConselVation and 10 51 4 EAM5290 Management Management EAM5291 AVIA221 Human Performance 5 52 3 AVIA212 EAMS391 Water and Soils Applications 10 52 4 EAM5290 EAM5390 in Multi-Crew and Modelling EAM5291 Operations EAMS392 Flora Component of 10 51 4 EAM5292 AVIA222 Management in Aviation 5 52 3 AVIA120 Environmental Impact EAM5293 AVIA223 Aviation Computing 5 52 3 AVIA121 Assessment and Electronics EAMS393 Fauna Component of 10 52 4 EAM5292 Environmental Impact EAM5293 AVIA305 Aircraft Design 5 51 3 AVIA213 AVIA318 Assessment AVIA306 Advanced Aircraft 10 51 4 AVIA214 Operations AVIATION AVIA308 Aviation Instruction 10 51 4 60 cp 200 level Availahle to Bachelor of Science (Aviation) candidates AVIA310 Advanced NaVigation 10 51 4 AVIA209 A VIAl 09 Introductory Meteorology 5 SI 3 AVIA311 Advanced Aviation 10 52 4 AVIA308 A VIAl 10 Introductory Navigation 5 SI 3 Instruction AVIAl I I Introductory Aerodynamics 5 Sl 3 AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics 5 52 3 AVIA318 A VIAl12 Introductory Human Factors 10 SI 4 AVIA223 A VIAl 13 Aircraft Performance 5 SI 3 AVIA314 Directed Study 10 52 4 At least two & Systems of the following: A VIAl 14 Flight Rules & Procedures 5 51 2 AVIA306 A VIAl 15 Reciprocating Engines 5 51 2 AVIA308 A VIAl16 Commercial Meteorology 5 52 3 AVIA109 AVIA310 A VIAl 17 Navigation 5 52 3 AVIAIIO AVIA318 A VIAl18 Aerodynamics 5 52 3 A VIA111 Advanced Aviation 5 52 3 AVIA222 Management 40 41 APPROVED SUBJECTS SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS SECTION FOUR

Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 A VIA316 Right Deck Performance 5 52 3 AYIA221 BI0L311 Environmenta1 Biology 10 51 6 BIOL203 or A VIA317 Aviation Climatology 5 52 3 AYIA207 BIOL207 AVIA318 AircraftSlability Students who and Control 5 51 3 AYIA118 have completed A VIA320 Aviation Instruction BIOLJ06are Practicum I 5 51 2 AYIA308 not eligible to AVIA321 Aviation Instruction do this subject Practicum II 5 51 2 AYIAJ08 AYIA311 BI0L312 Animal Development 10 51 6 TwoBIOL200 AYIA320 Students who BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES have completed B10LlOI Plant & Animal Biology 10 51 6 BIOL308 are BIOLI02 Cell Biology. C'.renetics 10 52 6 not eligible to & Evolution do this subject B10L201 Biochemistry 10 51 6 B10LlOI CHEMISTRY BIOLl02 CHEM10l Chemistry 101 10 51 6 BIOL202 Animal Physiology 10 51 6 B10LlOI CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 10 52 6 B10LlO2 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 52 6 CHEM101 BIOL204 Cell & Molecular 10 52 6 B10LlO1 CHEM102 Biology BIOLl02 CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 51 6 CHEM101 BIOL205 Molecular Genetics 10 51 6 B10LlO1 CHEMI02 B10L102 CHEM23 I Organic Chemistry 10 51 6 CHEMIOI BIOL206 Plant Physiology 10 52 6 B10LlOI CHEMI02 B10Ll02 CHEM241 Physical Chemistry 10 52 6 CHEM101 B10L207 Ecology 10 52 6 B10LlO1 CHEM102 BIOLl02 CHEM251 Applied Chemistry 10 Not in 6 CHEM101 Students who 1993 CHEMI02 have completed CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 51 6 CHEMIOI BIOL203 are CHEM102 not eligible to CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10 51 6 CHEM211 do this subject CHEM312 Chemometrics 5 52 3 CHEM211 BIOLJ01 Cell Processes 10 Not in B10L201 & MATHI02 (or 1993 6 one BIOL200 MATH112) BIOL302 Reproductive 10 52 6 Two BIOL200 CHEM313 Industrial Chemical Analysis 5 52 3 CHEM211 Physiology CHEM314 Trace Analysis in 5 Not in 3 CHEM211 BI0L303 Environmental Plant 10 51 6 TwoBIOL200 Environmental Systems 1993 Physiology CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 51 6 CHEM221 BIOL304 Whole Plant 10 52 6 TWoBIOL200 CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding 5 52 3 CHEM221 Development & Cluster Chemistry BI0L305 Immunology 10 52 6 TWoBIOL200 CHEM323 Bioinorganic Co- 5 52 3 CHEM221 BI0L307 Molecular Biology of 10 Not in 6 Two BIOL200 ordination Chemistry Plant Development 1993 incI.one of CHEM331 Organic Chemistry 10 51 6 CHEM231 BIOL201 or CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry 5 52 3 CHEM231 B10L204 or mOL205 CHEM333 Organic Reaction 5 Not in CHEM231 BI0L309 Molecular Biology 10 52 6 B10L201 and Mechanism 1993 BIOL205 Identification of Natural 5 52 3 CHEM231 BI0L310 Microbiology 10 51 6 BIOL201 & Compounds one other Organic Spectroscopy 5 52 3 CHEM231 BIOL200 (BIOL204 advisable) 42 43 SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs

Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 CHEM341 Physical Chemistry to SI 6 CHEM241 GEOG305 Climatic Problems to 52 4 GEOG203 MATHl02 (or GEOG306 Geography of Australia 10 51 4 GEOG202 plus GEOG202 MATHIl2) An Historical Perspective either GEOG205 plus CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar 5 52 3 CHEM241 orGEOG206 GEOG207 Energy Conversion MATHI02(or orGEOG208 MATHIl2) GEOG309 50ciety & 5pace 10 52 4 GEOO202 plus GEOG202 CHEM343 Molecular 5pectroscopy 5 52 3 CHEM241 either GEOO205 plus either CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 S2 6 CHEM261 orGEOG206 GEOG207 NOTE Prior to 1991 CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM231 and CHEM241 were numbered CHEM201 CHEM202 CHEM203 and orGEOG208 CHEM204 respectively. ' , GEOO310 Directed Studies in 10 To be 4 GEOG202 plus GEOG202 Human Geography advised either GEOG205 plus either ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECTS orGEOO206 GEOG207 Consult other Departmental lists for other prescribed subjeds required: See Award Rules orGEOG208 Available only to Bachelor of Environmental Stience Degree candidates GEOG311 Hydrology to 51 4 GEOG201 SCENI01 Environmental Investigations I 10 F 3 GEOO203 SCEN201 Environmental Investigations 1110 F 3 SCEN101 GEOO315 Production, Work & 10 52 4 GEOO202 plus GEOG202 SCEN202 Environmental Planning & 10 SI 4 Territory either GEOG205 plus either Pollution Control orGEOG206 GEOG207 or SCEN203 Water Resources Management 10 52 4 GEOG208 3 days GEOG316 Directed Studies in 10 Not in 4 GEOG201 SCEN301 Environmental Project to F 5CEN201 Physical Geography 1993 plus either SCEN302 Environmental Impact to 52 4 5CEN202 GEOO203 or Assessment Techniques GEOG204 GEOGRAPHY Footnote GEOOI01 Introduction to 10 51 4 see' 1 Students should note that GEOOI01 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography, and for admission to Physical Geography Geography Honours GEOG401 GEOGI02 Introduction to to 52 4 see' Human Geography GEOLOGY GEOG201 Methods in Physical to 51 4 GEooto1 GEOL101 The Environment 10 51 6 Geography GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 52 6 GEOLlOI GEOO202 Methods in Human to 52 4 GEOGto2 GEOL211 Optical Mineralogy 5 51 3 GEOL102 Geography GEOL212 Introductory Petrology 10 52 6 GEOL211 GEOO203 Biogeography & 10 52 4 GEooto1 GEOL213 Ancient Environments & 10 52 6 GEOLl02 Climatology Organisms GEOG204 Geomorphology of 10 51 4 GEooto1 GEOL214 Geological Structures & 10 51 6 GEOLl02 Australia Resources GEOG207 PopUlation, Culture to 51 4 GEooto2 GEOL215 Geology Field Course 215 10 51 14 GEOLl02 & Resources days GEOO208 Cities & Regions to 52 4 GEOG102 GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216 5 52 7 GEOL215 GEOO301 Advanced Methods in to 52 4 GEOG201 days Physical Geography plus either GE0L311 Igneous Petrology & 10 52 6 GEOL312 GEOG203 or Crustal Evolution GEOO204 GEOL312 Metamorphic Petrology 10 51 6 GEOL212 GEOG302 Advanced Methods in to 51 4 GEOO202 plus GEOO202 GE0L313 Structural Geology & 10 51 6 GEOL214 Human Geography either GEOG205 plus either Geophysics orGE0G206 GEOO207 GE0L314 Stratigraphic Methods 10 52 6 GEOL213 orGEOG208 GE0L315 Sedimentology 10 52 6 GEOL212& GEOG304 The Biosphere & 10 51 4 GEOO203 GEOL213 Conservation 44 45 SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS

Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 GEOLJI6 Geology of Fuels 10 SI 6 GEOL213 (MATHI02& GEOLJI7 Resource & Exploration 10 SI 6 GEOL212& Permission of Geology GEOL214 H.O.D.') GEOLJIS Geology Field Course 318 5 SI 7 GEOUI3 MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 S2 2 MATH206& days MATH103 GEOLJ19 Geology Field Course 319 5 S2 10 GEOL216& MATH209 Algebra 5 S2 2 MATH21S' days GEOLJ13 MATH2IO Geometry 1 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& GEOLJ20 Geology of Quaternary 10 S2 6 GEOU13 or MATHI03) or Environments GEOG204 (MATHIII & GEOLJ21 Groundwater & Soils 10 Nolin 6 MATHII2& 1993 MATHI03) MATH211 Group Theory 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& MATHEMATICS MATHI03)or MATHlll Mathematics 111 10 S1,S2 6 2 unit HSC Mathematics (MATH1II & #MATH112Mathematics 112 10 S1,S2 6 MATHIIl MATH112& #MATHI02Mathematics 102 10 SI 6 see20r MATHI03) MATHlII MATH212 Discrete 5 SI 2 MATHI020r MATH103 Mathematics 103 10 S2 6 see2 or Mathematics MATHI03 or MATHI020r (MATIlIll & (MATHlll & MATH112) MATH112) MATH2I3 Mathematical 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& MATH201 Multivariable 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& Modelling MATHI03)or Calculus MATH103) or (MATHl11 & (MATHlll & MATH112) MATH112) or MATH214 Mechanics 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& (MATHI02& MATHI03)or Permission of (MATHIll & H.O.D.') MATHlI2& MATH202 Partial Differential 5 S2 2 MATH201 MATH203 MAnu 03) Equations 1 MATH21 5 Operalions 5 S2 2 MATH 102 or MATH203 Ordinary Differential 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& Research MATHI03 or Equations 1 MATHI03) or (MATHlll & (MATHl11 & MATH112) MATH112) or MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 SZ 2 (MATHIOZ& (MATHIOZ& MATHI03)or Permission of (MATHl11 & H.D.D') MATH 112 & MATH204 Real Analysis 5 SI 2 (MATHIOZ& CDMPI0l) or MATHI03) or (MATHlll & (MATHlII & MATH112& MATH II 2 & MATHI03) MATH103) tMATH217 Linear Algebra 1 5 SI 2 MATHI020r MATH20S Analysis of 5 S2 2 MATH204' (MATH 1 11& Metric Spaces MATH112) MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& MATH201 tMATH21S Linear Algebra 2 5 SI 2 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) or MATH 103) or (MATH111 & (MATH111 & MATH112) or MATH112& MATH103) 46 47 SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs SECfION FOUR APPROVED sUBmcrs

Number Subject Points When HfW Prerequisites Corequlsites Number Subject Points When HfW Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 MATH301 Logic & Set JO Nolin 3 20cp from 200 level MATH316 Industrial JO NOlin 3 MATH2DI Theory 1993 MATH inel. one of Modelling 1993 MATH2D2 MATH2D4, 209, 211, MATH2D3 212, 21S' MATH213 MATH302 General Tensors JO Nolin 3 MATH2DI MATH216& & Relativity 1993 MATH21S' Permission of MATH303 Variational Methods 10 NOlin 3 MATH2DI H.O.D. and Integral Equations 1993 MATH2D3 MATH317 Number Theory 10 Not in 3 30cp from MA TH200 MATH2D4' 1993 MATH304 Ordinary Differential JO SI 3 MATH2DI MATH31S Topology JO S2 3 MATH2045 or Equations 2 MATH2D3 MATII205 MATH2D4' Footnotes MATH21S' 2 Entry requirement - HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150 MATH305 Partial Differential JO S2 3 MATH2DI 3 This option is for certain students who take MATHI03 in second semester Equations 2 MATH202 4 MATH2DS in 1990 MATHZ03 5 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MATH2D4 MATH2D4' #Credit cannot be obtained for both MA THIl2 and MATHI 02 MA TH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 S2 3 MATH2DI (Advisory) tCredit cannot be obtained for both MATH217- and MA TH218. MATH203 MATH207 MATH204' DIVISION OF QUANTITATIVE METHODS MATH206 MAQM214t Quantitative Methods 10 S2 4 INF0101 & MATH307 Quantum & 10 S2 3 MATH2DI STATIOJ Statistical MATH2D3 Subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods to Bachelor of Education courses in the Faculty of Education in 1993 Mechanics MATH206 These subjects are available only to Bachelor of Education students. MATH30S Geometry 2 10 S2 3 20cp from 200 level MATH inel. one of H.Ed (Mathematics Education) MATH209, 211, 21S' MAQM135 Mathematics lA 2D F 4 MAQM136 Mathematics 1 B 20 F MATH309 Combinatorics 10 Nolin 3 MATH21S' 4 1993 MAQM235 Mathematics ITA 20 F 4 MAQM135 MAQM236 Mathematics lIB JO F 2 MATH3JO Functional 10 FY 1 l/Z MATHZ05 Analysis MAQM237 Mathematics lIe 10 F 2 MAQM335_ Mathematics IllA F MATH311 Measure Theory 10 Not in 3 MATHZ05 20 4 MAQM235 & Integration 1993 MAQM336 Mathematics IIIB IS F 3 MATH312 Algebra JO SI 3 MATH2184 & one of MAQM337 Mathematics me IS F 3 (MATH209, MAQM435 Mathematics IVA 10 F 2 MATH210 MAQM436 Mathematics IVB 10 F 2 MATH211) MAQM437 Mathematics rye JO F 2 H.Ed (Primary Education) MATH313 Numerical Analysis JO SI 3 MATH2DI (Theory) MATH2D3 MAQM146 Foundation Studies IS F 3 MATH2045 in Elementary Mathematics MATH21S' B.Ed (Early Childhood) MAQM147 Mathematics lEe JO SI 4 MATH314 Optimization JO FY 1 1/2 MATH201 MATH2184 Footnote Credit cannot be obtained for bath MATH215 and MAQM214 MATH315 Mathematical JO SI 3 MATH2DI t Biology MATH203 MATH213 PHYSICS PHYSJOI Physics 101 JO SI 6 See6 PHYSJ02 Physics 102 JO SI,S2 6 See? or PIIYSI01 4S 49 SECI'ION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS

Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When ww Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 PHYS103 Physics 103 10 S2 6 PHYSI02 PSYC304 Basic Processes 2 10 S2 4 PSYC201 PSYOOI PHYS201 Quantum 10 SI 6 MATH103 PSYC305 Individual Processes 10 52 4 PSYC201 PSYOO1 Mechanics PHYS103' PSY006 Advanced Social 10 SI 4 PSYC201 PSYOOI & Electromagnetism Processes PHYS202 Mechanics & 10 SI 6 MATH102 PSYC307 Advanced Applied Topics 10 51 4 PSYC201 PSYOOI Thermal Physics PHYSI03' in Psychology I PHYS203 Solid Slale & 10 S2 6 PHYS201 PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics 10 S2 4 PSYC201 PSYOO1 Atomic Physics in Psychology 2 PHYS205 Scientific Measurement PSYC309 Topics in Neural Science 10 S2 4 PSYC201 PSYOOI Principles, Processes PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401 40 F 12 See' and Applications 10 S2 6 PHYS102 PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 40 F 12 PSYC401 PHYS301 Mathematical 10 SI 6 PHYS201 PSYC403 Psychology 403 30 F 8 Consult Dept. Methods & Quantum MATH201 PSYC404 Psychology 404 50 F 16 PSYC403 Mechanics MATH203 Footnote PHYS302 Electroma20etism 10 SI 6 PHYS201 9 Entry to PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at & Electronics MATH201 PSYC300 obtaining a Credit grade in each of four 300 level subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Additional conditions PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular 10 S2 6 PHYS203 apply; see the Department for details. & Solid State Physics PHYS301 LIST OF OTHER APPROVED SUBJECTS FROM GROUP B PHYS304 Statistical Physics 10 S2 6 PHYS202 & Relativity MATH201 COMPUTER SCIENCE PHYS305 Nuclear Physics & 10 S2 6 PHYS302 COMP101 Computer Science I 20 F Advanced COMP201 Advanced Data Structures 5 COMPIOI MATH212 Electromagnetism orCOMP212 Footnotes or Graduate 6 Advisory entry requirement· HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a enrolment perfonnance in the top 30% of candidature. COMP202 Computer Architecture 5 2 COMP203 7 Assumed Imowled&e of HSC2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC3 unit COMP203 Assembly Language 5 COMPIOI mathematics (with a mark of at least 110/150). Students with lesser attainment than this are advised to attempt Physics 101, orCOMP212 together with a first year mathematics subject before proceeding to Physics 102. or Graduate 8 Students achieving a credit level or better in PHYSI01 and PHYSI02 may be admitted with approval of the Head of enrolment Department. COMP204 Programming Language Semantics 5 2 COMP205 MATHll1 and MATH112 may substitute for MATHI03 with approval of Head of Department COMP205 System Programming 5 COMPIOI orCOMP212 PSYCHOLOGY or Graduate PSYCI01 Psychology Introduction I 10 SI 5 enrolment PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10 S2 5 P5YCI01 COMP206 Theory of Computation 5 2 COMPlOl MATH212 PSYCZOI Foundations for Psychology 10 SI 4 PSYC102 orCOMP212 PSYC202 Basic Processes 10 SI 4 P5YCI02 PSYC201 or Graduate PSYC203 Developmental & Social 10 52 4 P5YCI02 PSYC201 enrolment Processes COMP212 Introduction to Programming 5 PSYC204 Individual Processes 10 52 4 P5YCI02 PSYC201 COMP241 Cognitive Science 10 F PSYC205 Applied Topics in 10 Not 4 P5YCI02 PSYC201 COMP299 Project 5 1,2,F Permission of H.O.D. Psychology I in 1993 COMP301 Compiler Design 10 I COMP2Ol PSYC201 PSYC206 Applied Topics in 10 Not 4 PSYC102 COMP302 Artificial Intelligence 10 2 COMPIOI Psychology 2 in 1993 orCOMP212 PSYC301 Advanced Foundations 10 51 4 PSYC20I,P5YC202 COMP303 Computer Networks 10 COMP2Olor for Psychology & P5YC203 Graduate enrolment PSYC302 Independent Project 10 F 2 P5YC201 PSYOOI COMP304 Database Design 10 2 COMP2010r PSYC303 Basic Processes I 10 51 4 P5YC201 PSYOOI Graduate enrolment 50 51 SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs SECTION FOUR APPROVED sUBmcrs

Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993 COMP305 Algorithm Design and STAT2O! Mathematical Statistics· 10 SI 4 MATH103 or Analysis 10 COMP201 STATIO! & COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 2 COMP201 MATH112 (or MATH216 equivalent level of and either Mathematics) MATH217 STAT202 Regression Analysis 10 S2 4 STAT20lor orMATH218 STATIOI & COMP307 Software Engineering MATHl12/MATHI02 Principles 10 F** COMP2010r (or equivalent level Graduate of Mathematics) enrolment STAT203 Queues & Simulation 5 SI 2 MA TH112/MA THI 02 STAT204 COMP202 COMP308 Operating Systems 10 2 COMP201 or equivalent forBSc COMP391 Special Topic 1 10 Not in Yr II of BCompSc degree 1993 STAT204 Non-parametric Statistics 5 S2 2 STAT2010r STAT203 * Elective subjects. Not all elective subjects will be available in anyone year. Elective subjects indicated as potentially available STATIO! & forBSc may be cancelled if enrolments are insufficient. Availability should be confirmed with the Department Office. MATHl12/MATHI02 degree ** COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion of a project report in Semester 2. (or equivalent) STAT205 Engineering Statistics· 5 SI 2 MATHl12/MATHI02 INFORMATION SCIENCE STAT3O! Statistical Inference 10 SI 3 STAT201 & INF0101 Introduction to 10 SI,S2 5 MATH201 Information Systems STAT302 Study Design 10 S2 3 STAT201 & STAT202 LAW STAT303 Generalized Linear Models 10 SI 3 STAT201 & Compulsory Subjects STAT202 The following subjects are compulsory for candidates enrolled in the combined Bachelor of SciencelBachelor of Laws Advisory ST AT301 degree: consult the Faculty of Law Handbook for further details. STAT304 Time Series Analysis 10 S2 3 STAT201 & LL.B.101 Legal Progress 20 STAT202 LL.B.102 Criminal Law and Procedure 20 Advisory ST AnOt LL.B.201 Torts 20 STAT310 Total Quality Management 10 S2 2 LL.B.202 Property I 10 Footnote LL.B.301 Contracts 20 Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT20t and STAT205 LL.B.401 Constitutional Law I 10 Credit cannot be obtained for both ST ATl 01 and STATt 03 LL.B.402 Administrative Law I 10 LL.B.403 Equity and Trusts 10 LL.B.404 Civil Procedure 10 LL.B.405 Evidence 10 LL.B.406 Company Law I 10 LL.B.407 Jurisprudence 10 LL.B.408 Professional Conduct 10

PHILOSOPHY PHIL207 Scientific Knowledge and 10 SI 4 Scientific Method STATISTICS STATIO! Introductory Statistics 10 SI, 5 S2 STATl03 Introductory Mathematical 10 S2 5 Advisory MATHt02 Statistics t and INFOIOI

52 53 SECTION FIVE SEctION FIVE APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Content Emphasis is placed on scientific method, group dynamics and a Theory of open, cybernetic systems, comprising inputs, changes, continuation of relevant principles in environmental chemistry. outputs and negative feedback mechanisms. Analysis of natural The statistics program runs parallel and deals with tests of systems in systems terms. Employment of Odum symbols. significance. Calculations of energy flow through both natural and human Text modified systems. Calculations of partitioning and budgeting of nutrients. Structure and dynamics of ecological communities. Laidler, G. 1991, Environmental Chemistry Australian Perspective Longman. Texl Shield, MJ. 1984, Statistics Jacaranda Kormondy, E.J. 1986, Concepts of Ecology 3rd edn Prentice Hall. Reference References Rump, H. and Krist, H. 1988, Laboratory Manual for the examination of water waste and soil VCH. Kupchella, c., and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon. EAMCI03 CONTEMPORARY Recher, H.F. et al. 1986, A Natural Legacy Ecology in Australia ENVIRONMENTAL PHILOSOPHY lOcp 2nd edn Pergamon. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. EAMSI02 MONITORING AND STATISTICS I lOcp Examination Tutorial work and assessment, essay, take-home examination. Hours 5 Hours per week for one semester. Content Examination Final examination. The historical foundations of despotic and destructive attitudes Content UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS toward the natural environment, contemporary responses to the Cell theory, diversity, Whittakers scheme of classification, need for an environmental ethic, eg, Stewardship, Animal and Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Applied Science and Technology microbiology of aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems sampling Ecological Rights - Liberation, the Land Ethic, Deep Ecology, methods. Bright field, dark field, phase contrast, polarising Eco-feminism, Social Ecology and Eco-anarcrusm, Gaia and Subject outlines and reading lists are set out in a standard fonnat BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL microscopy and the use of the optical microscope in environmental other "New Age" environmental philosophies. to facilitate easy reference. ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT analysis. Relevant introductory environmental chemistry. There References An extensive list of references will be provided at the is emphasis on group work and problem solving. An explanation is given below of some of the technical terms EAMS/EAMC subjects are available only to candidates enrolled commencement of lectures. used in this Handbook. in the Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment The statistics program runs parallel to the above and reviews 1. (a) Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed at a and Management degree. basic mathematical analysis, probability. multinomial, binomial EAMC1l3 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN Pass level or betterbefore a candidate enrols in a particular theories and patterns of distribution. VALUES I lOcp EAMSIOI CONCEPTS OF ECOLOGY lOcp subject. Texts Prerequisite EAMC103. Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. (b) Where a subject is marked Advisory it refers to a pass in Curtis, H. and Barnes, N. 1985,Invitation to Biology 4th edn Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures will Examination Written reports and end of semester examination. Worth. be given on the assumption that a pass has been achieved ExaminaJion Tutorial assessment, essay, take-home examination. Content Pentz, M. and Shott, M. 1988, Handling ExperimenJal Data at the level indicated. Content The fundamental concepts of ecology are examined in relation to Open University Press. (c) Preparatory subjects are those which candidates are A. An examination of the major responses from economics to various natural systems, including dry forests, rainforests, References strongly advised to have completed before enrolling in heathlands, lakes, and wetlands. The ecosystem processes of "green" philosophies and science. Responses include; Green Willdnson,J.F.1986,AnlnJroductiontoMicrobiology Blackwell. the subject for which the preparatory subject is energy flow, nutrient and water cycling, population dynamics, Capitalism, Eco-Socialism, Buddhist Economics, Negative recommended. and successional change are studied through both theoretical Kupchella, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Growth Economics, Steady -Stale Economics andEcologically 2. Corequisites refer to subjects or topics which the candidate considerations and relevant field and laboratory investigations. Allyn and Bacon. Sustainable Development (ESD). must either pass before enrolling in the particular subject or Text B. The values that underpin scientific and technological be taking concurrently. EAMSIl2 MONITORING AND STATISTICS II lO,p knowledge and achievements. The Philosophy of Science, Kormondy, E.J. 1986, Concepts of Ecology 3rd edn Prentice 3. Under examination rules "examination" includes mid-year Prerequisite EAMS 102. the social shaping of Science and Technology, Technology Hall. and Development. examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which Hours 5 Hours per week for one semester. the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some References References An extensive list of references will be provided at the Examination Progressive assessment plus 2 hour final attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how Kupchella, C., and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science commencement of lectures. examination. assessment is determined. Living wilhin the System ofNature Allyn and Bacon. Content 4. TeXIs are books recommended for purchase. Recher, H.F. et al. 1986, A NaJural Legacy Ecology in Australia EAMSI04 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING An introduction to water qUality and water quality analysis using AND POLLUTION 5. References are books relevant to the subject or topic which 2nd edn Pergamon. the concept of a water quality index as a model. CONTROL LEGISLATION lOcp need not be purchased. EAMSlll SYSTEMS APPROACH IN ECOLOGY Hkp Student groups carry outan analysis of the water quality in alocal Hours 4 Hours per week lectures, field work and directed Prerequisite EAMSlOl. stream whilst they develop and refine laboratory skills in water reading. quality analysis. Each group then embarks on a biogeographical Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. study of a small enclosed water body in the Newcastle area Examination Written reports and end of semester examination. S4 SS SECITON FIVE APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOOY SUBJECT DlOSCRIPTIONS

Content Corequisite EAMS201 Data analysis runs parallel and involves computer applications of McDonald, R.C. Isbell, R.F.,et al. 1990, Australian Soil and group developed models and their analysis. This course examines the environmental planning and HOUTS 4 Hours per week for one semester. Survey, Field Handbook, 2nd edn Inkata Press. development oontrol system in NSW and pollution control ExmninaJion Assignments and final examination. Reference legislation. 1M emphasis in the course is to understand the EAMS291 WATER RESOURCES Conknt Roberts, N. et al. 1983,Inlroduclion to computer simulation A system which regulates development and requires environmental system dynamics modelling approach Addison Wesley. MANAGEMENT likP studies to be undertaken. Industrial and urban systems are the focus for further studies of PrereqllisiJes EAMSI02, EAMS112. the impact of humans on the natural environment. 1be notion of Text EAMC203 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN· Human Activity Systems is developed as an approach to the Corequisite EAMS290. VALUES II IOcp Farrier, D., Enllironmenlal Law Handbook Planning and Land improvement of complex, environmental issues. HOUTS 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and Use in NSW Redfern Legal Centre, 1988. PrerequisiJe EAMC103, EAMCI13. ruding. Text directed Reference HOUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester. KupcheUa, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Department of Environment and Planning. Manual for Living within the System o/NaJure Allyn and Bacon. Examination Tutorial assessment, essay, take·homeexamination. Contenl En'llironmenlallmpact Assessment 1985. References Conlent Examination of many of the majorenviroruneruaJ. issues associated with water resources development. Topics covered include EAMS1I4 LOCAL AND REGIONAL Wilson, J. 1988, Changing Agriculture. An Introduction to Public policy and environmental issues; eg energy policy, ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IOcp Systems Thinking Kangaroo Press, ecologically sustainable development, ethics and a sustainable reseIVoir and catchment management, wateruse, entrophication, society, ethics and acceptable risk. ideology and green political thermal stratification of storages, floodplain management, Checkland, P. 1981, Systems Thinking, Systems Practice Wiley. Hours 4 Hours per week lectures, field work and directed thought in the national and international contexts. irrigation/salinisalion and wastewater disposal to land and water reading. Checkland, P. and Scholes, 1990, Soft Systems Methodology in 1. References bodies. Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Action Wiley. References An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to Conlenl EAMS202 SYSTEMS DYNAMICS AND DATA students at the commencement of the semester. Petts, G.E. 1984, Impounded Rivers Perspective/or Ecological Case studies of particular local and regional environmental issues ANALYSIS I IOcp Management 10hn Wiley, including the environmental impact of mining, solid waste EAMC213 DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL Prerequisite EAMS102, EAMS112. Pigram,l,]. 1986, Issues in the Management ofAustralia's Water disposal, water quality management, industrial development and IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp Resources Longman Cheshire. sewage treatment. Introduction to environmental assessment Hours S Hours per week for one semester. Prerequisites EAMC103, EAMCI13, Carter, L. 1986, Environmental Impact of Water Resources techniquesandanalysisofreasonsforconflict. Particularattenlion Examination Progressive assessment and final examination. Corequisite EAMC203. Projects Lewis Publishers. is given to skills in communication. Conlenl Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. References This module develops system dynamics theory using Forresters EAMS292 PLANT SYSTEMATICS AND Examination Tutorial assessment, essay, take-home examination. Beder,S.1989,ToxicFishandSewerSurfing Allen and Unwin. system dynamics language as applied to natural and man made PLANT ECOLOGY IOcp Content Laidler, G.1991, Environmental Chemistry 2nd ed Longman systems. It examines positive and negative feedback control Prerequisites EAMSI01, EAMSll1. loops, rates, levels, auxiliaries, sources, sinks, information Cheshire. The role of Social Impact Assessment (SIA) in Environmental Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. feedback and system boundaries, Models are developed taking Impact Assessment (EIA), theory and methods of SIA, social Examination Assignments,laboralOIy and field reports, andfinal EAMS201 AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS IOcp account of perspective, reference modes, time horizons and variables studies by SIA, Heritage considerations and the National policy choices. Emphasis is placed upon the importance of group examination. PrerequisiJe EAMS101, EAMSl11. Estate, Cultural values and SIA. work and action research. ContenJ Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. References An extensive set of references for this subject will be Models of a chosen catchment are developed as part of an given to students at the commencement of the semester. A study of botanical concepts and principles with particular Examination Assignments and final examination. ongoing catchment management study. emphasis upon Australian species and ecosystems, Students will Content The data analysis program runs parallel. It reviews and further EAMS290 HYDROLOGY AND SOILS acquire skills in plant identification and classification. Physiological processes and evolutionary adaptations will be The effect of human disturbance of natural ecosystems is studied develops tests of significance using the minitab software program. ANALYSIS IOcp studied along with checklists, distributions, and plant associations using agriculture as the focus. Systems concepts are further References Prerequisites EAMSI02, EAMS112. reflecting environmental factors. Current theories in plant ecology developed using a series of agricultural systems of increasing Roberts, N., et al. 1983,Inlrodudion to Computer Simulation A Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and will be examined. complexity and energy demand. directed reading. system dynamics modelling approach Addison Wesley. TexI To be advised. Text Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Ryan, B., et al. 1985. Minitab Handbook 2nd edn PSW Kent Reference Kupchella, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Contenl Living within the System ofNature Allyn and Bacon. EAMS212 SYSTEM DYNAMICS AND DATA Beadle, N.C.W. Evans et al., 1981, Flora oflhe SydfU!yRegion Basic components of the hydrologic cycle and soil classification ANALYSIS II IOcp 2nd edn A.H. & A.W. Reed. References and identification. Topics include rainfall/runeff analysis Wilson, J. 1988, Changing Agriculture. An Introduction to PrerequisiJe EAMSI02, EAMSI12. (RATIONAL method), soil moisture and permeability, EAMS293 ANIMAL SYSTEMATICS AND Systems Thinking Kangaroo Press. Corequisite EAMS202. interception, flood analysis, solute mixing, pollutant loading, ANIMAL ECOLOGY IOcp instrumentation and small catchment hydrology. Checkland, P. 1981 ~ Systems Thinking, Systems Practice Wiley. Hours 5 Hours per week for one semester. Prerequisites EAMSI0l, EAMS111. References Checkland, P. and Scholes, J. 1990, Soft Systems Methodology in Examination Progressive assessment and final examination. Corequisite EAMS292. Action Wiley. Dunne, T. and Leopold, L. 1978, WalerinEnvironnumtaJPlanning Content Freeman. Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Further development of system dynamics models, Introduction Examination Assignments, laboratory and field reports and final EAMS211 INDUSTRIAL AND URBAN SYSTEMS IO

Content Dorney, L,C. 1987, The Professional Practice ofEnvironmenlal EAMS390 SOIL CONSERVATION AND techniques of transect studies, species composition analyses, and A study of the systematics, evolution, ecology and distribution of MantJgement Springer-Verlag. MANAGEMENT 10 cp assessment of physical and chemical factors will be studied. the Australianfauna. Theidentificalion of Australian vertebrates Prerequisites EAMS290, EAMS291. References EAMS301 SPECIALIST STUDY 20cp to at least the level of sub·class or order. Diagnostic structures HOUTS 4 Houn per week lectures and practicals, field work and Groves, R.H. (ed) 1981, Australian Vegetalion Cambridge such as skeletal and dental features will be studied along with Prerequisite All prescribed l..evel200 subjects, directed reading, University Pres. trapping and tagging techniques to estimate population size and Hours 4 Hours per week (minimum) for one year. distribution. Terrestrial and aquatic systems will beexamined for Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Australian Surveying and Land Infonnation Group (AUSUG). Examination Maintenance of log book, performance at viva. and life histories and ecological relationships. Contenl 1990,AtlasofAustralianResourcesVol6VegetaiionGovemment submission of final report. Printer, Canberr. Text To be advised. Examination of soils,land use and conservation. particularly in ConJenl relation to soils of NSW, Soil and water management principles EAMS393 FAUNA COMPONENT OF EAMS301 ENVIRONMENTAL The student is assigned to a co-operating host organisation and for various types of land use including urban development. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT MANAGEMENT I 10 cp placed in a problem solving orteam situation to study an issue or Practical analysis of control structures, sizing and prediction. Use ASSESSMENT IOcp Prerequisites EAMS201, EAMS211. set of issues currently being addressed by that organisation, The of soils for domestic and industrial wastewater disposal and site student will report on the structure and functions of the host rehabilitation. Prerequisite EAMS292, EAMS293. Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. organisation and on progress made towards the resolution of the Text Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Examination Assignments, field reports and final examination. particular issue(s) under study. Channan, P,E.V. and Murphy, B. W. 1991 ,Soils Their Properties Content Conlenl References lists will be provided by the student's supervisor and and Management Sydney University Press. A study of the assessment of the faunal factor in environmental by the host organisation. The skills, attitudes and knowledge needed for environmental Reference impact studies and plans of management. Fluctuations in animal management practices will be developed through experiential populations due to various factors such as season, drought, fire and team learning strategies. The economics of the ecologically EAMS304 REGIONAL AND NATIONAL McDonald, R.C. Isbell, R.F. et all990, Australian Soil and Land and developmental impact will be studied. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IOcp Survey, Field Handbook, 2nd edn Inkata Press. sustainable utilisation of natural resources will be a prime focus. References Management practices in AustraJia and selected foreign countries Prerequisites EAMSI04, EAMSI14. will be studied. EAMS391 WATER AND SOILS Reader's Digest 1988, Complete Book of Australian Birds Hours 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading. APPLICATIONS AND MODELLING IOcp Reader's Digest Services, Ply Ltd. Text To be advised. Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Prerequisites EAMS290 EAMS291. Strahan, R. (ed) 1983, Complete Book of Australian Mammals References Content Corequisite EAMS390. Angus and Robertson. IUCN. WWF, and UNEP, 1991, Caring for tM Earth United This course examines case studies of regional and national Kennedy. M. (ed) 1990,Australia' s Endangered Species, Simon Nations Environment Program. Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and environmental issues which highlight the major types of directed readings, Schuste. World Commission on Environment and Development Our environmental assessment. The Commonwealth environmental Common Future The Brnndtland Report. legislation and environmental law are also covered. Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. EAMC303 OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENE AND TOXICOLOGY IOcp UNEP, 1987. Reference Content Dorney, L.C, 1987 , TM Professional Practice of Environmental Thomas, I. 1987. Environmental Impact Assessment Australian The use and application of micro-computers to model water Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213 or equivalent. Managemenl Springer-Verlag. Perspectives and Practice Monash University. balances, runoff, stormwater quality, non-point source pollution Hours 2 hours per week for one year. and soil erosion. Specific examination of practical applications using POLLUTE, SOILOSS (USLE), ANSWERS, CREAMS, Examination Two major written assisgnments and an examination EAMS311 ENVIRONMENTAL EAMS314 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT at the end of each semester. MANAGEMENT II IOcp ASSESSMENT IOcp OPT and other soft ware models to simulate hydrologic processes and water quality and pollutant variables. Content Prerequisites EAMS201, EAMS211. Prerequisites EAMS104. EAMSI14. References A study of human organ systems and the nature of environmental Corequisite EAMS301. Hours 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading. Lal,R. (ed) 1988, Soil ErosionResearchMethods Soil and Water pollutants and theiradverseeffects on human health. TIlis subject Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Conservation Societ. also studies hazard identification, hygiene standards and the Examination Assignments, field reports and final examination. Content control of environmental conditions in the workplace. Visits to Various software manuals. industrial sites are undertaken together with practice in the use of Content This course covers the rationale and methodology of monitoring and protective devices. environmental impact assessment (ElA). Also covered areimpact The principles of land management and people management will EAMS391 FLORA COMPONENT OF assessment techniques in the practice, the role of International Text be explored in relation to the impact of developments in Australia ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT Restoration and rehabilitation techniques and practices will be Aid agencies, current developments in environmental ASSESSMENT IOcp Harrington, J .M. and Gill, F.S. 1987, OccupationalHealLhPoc/cet management, environmental audits and risk analysis. studied in conjunction with cost/benefit analysis and the Prerequisites EAMS292, EAMS293. Consultant, 2nd edn, Blackwell Scientific Publications, maintenance of biological diversity, freshwater, soil and marine Texts Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. References resources. Walhem, P. (ed). 1988, EnvironmentallmpactAssessmentTMory An extensive list of references will be provided at the Examination Assignments, field reports, and f'mal examination Text To be advised. and Practice Unwin Hyman. commencement of lectures. Content References Beder, S. (ed), 1990, Environmental Impact StatemenlsSelected EAMC3I3 THE SOCIAL ASPECTS OF Readings Sydney University. A study of the skills and knowledge required for competence in IUCN, WWF, and UNEP, 1991, Caring for the Earth United the compilation of vegetation surveys in connection with ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH IOcp Nations Environment Program. Reference environmental impact studies and plans of management in Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213. World Commission on Environment and Development Our Buckley, R. 1991 ,A Handbookfor EnvironmentalAudit AIDAB. connection with both development projects and the conservation Corequisile EAMC303 Common Future The Brundtland Report, UNEP, 1987. and management of natural ecosystems. The use of relevant field

58 59 SECfION FIVE AVIATION SUBlECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE AVIATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester. Aviation SUbject Descriptions AVIAIlI INTRODUCTORY AERODYNAMICS Scp Texts Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Civil Aviation Regulalions (CAA). Exanu:nation Tutorial assessment, essay, take·home examination. A VIA subjects areavailable only tocandldatesenrolled Intbe ConlenJ Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree Examination Progressive assessment plus examination. Civil Aviation Orders 20-99. The social origins of disease, case studies and history, social 100 Level Aviation Syllabus Content Aeronautical Information Publicatwn (CAA). forms of disease conteol, eg the sanitation movement, lifestyle The aviation syllabus is based upon four broad areas of study: Basicfluid mechanics of an incompressible flow • Reynold's No., Thom, T.BasicAeronautical Knowledge Aviation Theory Centre. related disease, standards of living and health, environmental Bernoulli's equation. The genera1ion of lift, drag,.induced drag, 1 Aeronautical Engineering (aerodynamics, engines, systems degradation and health, ecologically sustainable development lift·augmentation devices, downwash and wake turbulence. A VIAIl4 FLIGHT RULES AND PROCEDURES s.:p and health, the social construction of health related terminology, and design); Properties of aerofoils, three dimensional effects on section Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. eg 'risk' ,risk.tak:ing and risk·imposition, health protection policy, 2 Aviation Science (meteorology and navigation); characteristics. Aerodynamic factors influencing aircraft Examinmion Progressive assessment plus a fmal examination. justice and the political economy of health at national and 3 Human Factors (aviation psychology, medicine, and performance drag index, IJD ratios, configuration and altitude international levels. ergonomics); effects, climb and descent. Content References 4 Aviation Management (aviation law, administration, and References Overview of International aviation regulation. Australian Civil An extensive list of references will be provided at the computer applications). Anderson, 1.D.1989, Introduction to Flighl 3rd edn McGraw­ Aviation Regulations and Orders governing aircrew procedures and the airworthiness of aircraft and their design standards. commencement of lectures. The syllabus has a spiral design with a broad foundation in first Hill. Aircrew licensing requirements, Air Traffic Control procedures year proceeding to in-depth and more individualised study in the Shevell, R.S. 1987, Funckunentals of Flighl 2nd edn Prentice­ and pilot's airworthiness responsibilities. The course introduces third year. The project in third yearis designed as background to Hall. CAA requirements to the level of the Private Pilot licence and pursue a postgraduate Bachellro of Science (Aviation) Honours Dole, C.E. 1988, Flighl Theory for Pilots 2nd ed. addresses the international and local regulations of aviation program. Group or individual projects are problem·based and activities. requ~ stu4z"ts to gain industry experience to link theory and Thorn, T. Basic Aeronautical Knowledge Aviation Theory praCllce. Centre. Texts The sequence and scheduling of aviation subjects is determined Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA). AVIA1I2 INTRODUCTORY HUMAN FACTORS IOcp by the needs of integration with flight training and commercial Civil Aviation Orders 20-99,100.101,104, (CAA). pilot licensing over the first two years of the degree. Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Enroute Supplement - Australia (CAA). Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests, AVIAI09 INTRODUCTORY METEOROLOGY s.:p seminars, assignments and a 2 hour examination. Aeronauticallnformmion Publication (CAA). Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Content Aerodrome Diagrams (CAA). Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and Information processing; vision/balance; spatial disorientation; A VIA115 RECIPROCATING ENGINES Scp tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination. perception; memory; decision making; motor control. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Content Texl Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments plus Introduction to atmospheric pressure, wind, humidity, Trollip,S. &1ensen, R.1991,HumanFactorsforGeneraIAviation. end of semester examination. thermodynamics, cloud, precipitation and icing; Structure of the atmosphere; Introduction 10 A vialion forecasts and meteorological Reference Conten! reports. Green, R. 1991, Human Factors for Pilots. Air standard thennodynamic cycles, two and four stroke cycles, Texl petrol and diesel engines, construction features, induction, A VIAIl3 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE lu brication and cooling, engine instrumentation, effect of altitude P.P.L Meteorology AND SYSTEMS 5cp and mixture on combustion, power output, aircraft engine Bureau of Meteorology ,Manual ofMeteorology Part I, General Hours 3 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for one operation, turbo/superchargers, thermodynamic efficiency, Meteorology, Part 2 Aviation Meteorology. semester. vibrations and balancing. Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination. Text AVIAlIO INTRODUCTORY NAVIGATION Scp Conten! Bent, R.D. & McIGnJey, J.L. 1985, Aircraft Powerplants, 5th Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. edn, McGraw-Hili. ExaminaJion Progressive assessment based on assignments and (a) Principles of operation of aircraft fuel, hydraulicand electrical tutorials plus a 2 hour examination. systems, undercaniageand flight controls. The application of mechanical linkages, and electrical circuits to these systems. A VIA116 COMMERCIAL METEOROLOGY Scp COnlent Basic circuit theory. Prerequisite AVIAI09. Practical methods of pilot navigation flight planning. The (b) Aircraft weight and balance, performance and structural Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. theoretical aspects of navigation; the fonn of the earth; map weight limitations, determination of take-off and landing Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, projections, scale and scale variation, confonnality; navigational weight and centre of gravity, aerodynamics reasons of centre tutorials, seminars, and a 2 hour final examination. astronomy; the vector triangle and its solution by plotting and by of gravity limitations, use of aircraft loading systems computing; flight and navigational instruments, theoretical (mathematical and graphical approaches), adjustment of Content aspects, accuracy, errors and use. weight and centre of gravity, regulatory requirements. Atmospheric pressure; wind, humidity and thermodynamics; c1oud, precipitation and i clog; orographic effects; thunderstorms; T"", (c) International Standard Atmosphere, factors affecting aircraft tropical meteorology; synoptic situations and fronts;jet streams. Aeronautical Information Publication (CAA). penonnance, use of performance charts for take·off and landing, limitations and safety considerations, regulations Hazardous weather windshear, microbursts and macrobursts. and requirements for Authorised Landing Areas. 60 61 SEcrION FIVE AVIATION SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS SEcrION FIVE A VIA nON SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS

Text Texis Content Reference Manual of Meteorology Parts 1 and 2 (A.G.P.S.). O'Hare. D. and Roscoe, S. 1990, FlighldeckPerformance-The (a) Mean Aerodynamic Chord; advanced use of loading charts; Heel, S. 1992, Instrument Rating Course, Action Aviation Human Factor, Iowa U.P. adjustment of weight and centre of gravity. Supplies. AVIA117 NAVIGATION Scp References (b) Multi·engine operations and performance consideIations~ use Thorn, T.lnslrumenl Rating Manual, Vol. 1 & 2 Aviation Theory Prerequ~ile AVlAllO. of take-off enToute; and landing performance charts for single Centre. Harding & Mills. 1988, Aviation Medicine, British Medical and multi·engine aircraft, knowledge of Ute perfonnance and HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester. Associalion,.London. operation of Ute Echo MK IV aeroplane. . A VIA209 LONG RANGE NA VIGA TlON Scp Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, tutorials presenta1ions and a 2 hour final examination. A VIAl20 A VIA TlON LAW, COMMERCIAL Texts Prerequisite A VIA 117. FLIGHT RULES & PROCEDURES lOcp Content Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA). Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Prerequisite AVIA114. Theoretical aspects of Rhumb line navigation. The development Civil Aviation Orders 20-99 (CAA). Examination Progressive assessment plUS a 2 hour final of pilot navigation techniques from air plot and track plot meUtods. Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Aeronaulicallnformation Publication (CAA). examination. The development of metal DR and of orientation systems. Pilot Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and Abridged Performance and Operation Manualfor Echo Mk IV. Conlent navigation radio aids. Their basic principles, signal propagation, tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination on Part A and a 3 hour The construction properties and use of orthomorphic charts use, errors. final examination on Part B. AVIA207 AVIATION METEOROLOGY Scp suitable for long range navigation. The calculation of great circle Flight planning for twin piston engined aircraft. The point of no Content Prerequisite A VIA116. tracks and distances. Grid navigation; navigation in polar regions; return and critical point. navigation on the climb and descent~ high speed/high altitude Part A The origins of Law in Australia; Legal Institutions in Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. navigation including the use of radio aids and area navigation Text Australia; Constitution; Tort (Negligence); Criminal Law; Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final systems; weather radar; inertial navigation systems; operational Contract (Hire & Insurance); Criminal Law; Deregulation of the AeronaUlicallnformo.tion Publication (CAA). examination. problems including the use of off track alternates; searches. Aviation Industry; International Conventions; Administrative A VlA118 AERODYNAMICS Scp Law; ContenJ Text To be advised. Part B Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing Operational meteorology, tropical meteorology, complex. Prerequisite AVIA 111. AVIA210 COMPRESSIBLE AERODYNAMICS Scp aircrew licensing and procedures to the level of Commercial Pilot thennodynamics, micro and meso·sca1e winds, surface synoptic HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester. Licence. charts, dynamics of lows and highs, visibility, fog, hazardous Prerequisite A VIA 118. Examination Progressive assessment based on laboratory reports Texts weather analysis. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. and assignments plus a final examination. Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA). Text Examination Progressive assessment, tutorials plus a final ConJent examination. Civil Aviation Orders 20-99,100, (CAA). Bureau of Meteorology, Manual of Meteorology Parts 1 and 2 Aircraft stability and control; longitudinal and lateral stability, Department of Aviation Meteorology Handbook Content aerodynamic coupling, CG effects on stability, gyroscopic AVIA121 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS AND Thennodynamics of a compressible perfect gas, effects of coupling; effect of aircraft configuration on stability, wing sweep, PROPULSION Scp A VIA208 INSTRUMENT NA VIGA T[ON Scp dihedral, canards. Aerofoil characteristics. Boundary layer· compressibility on lift, Prandtl·Glauert equation, critical mach laminar and turbulent and transition. Wind Tunnel experiments. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Prerequisite A VIA 117. number, shock stall and drag of vergence. Supersonic and transonic aerofoils and wings, wave drag, area ruling. Incompressible fluid dynamics. Vorticity. Propeller analysis Examination Assessment based on assignments and laboratory Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. blade element and disc Uteories, propeller efficiency and sizing, reports plus a final examination. Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final Vortex lift at low speeds from delta wings and strakes. constant speed units. Content examination. References References Hydraulic and mechanical systems on aircraft, air conditioning Content Houghton, E.L. & Carruthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Shevell, R.S. 1989, Fundamentals of Flight, 2nd edn, Hall. and pressurisation including thermodynamics, ice protection and Radio Navigation Systems and Aids; Radio Navigation teclutiques Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnold. Houghton, E.L. and Canuthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamicsfor fire systems, under caniage and flight controls. Electrical systems, using conventional aids; ADF/NDB, VOR, DME, U.s, Right Shevell, R.S. 1989, Fundamentals of Right, 2nd edn, Prentice· Engineering Students Arnold. analo gdevices, basic circuit anal ysis using Kirchoff and Thevenin Director, Radar; Principles and errors of radio and radar aids. Hall. methods, tuning circuits, filters. Introduction to database and Instrument Flight Procedures, Airspace, and Air Traffic Control; McCormick, B.W. Aerodynamics, Aeronautics and Flight AVIA119 AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY AND spreadsheet software Departure Procedures; Enroute Procedures; Holding Procedures; Mechanics. MEDICINE Scp References Instrument Approach Procedures; Emergency Procedures; IFR Prerequisite AVIAI12. Smith, RJ. 1987, Electronics Circuits and Devices Wile. Right Planning AVIA211 JET ENGINES Scp HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester. Pallet, Aircraft Electrical Systems. Texts Prerequisite 60 credit points A VIAl00 level Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests, Lombardo, D.A. 1988, Aircraft Systems- Understanding Your Enroute Charts (CAA). Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester plus field trip. assignments, tutorials and a 2 hour examination. Aeroplane TAB. Departure and Approach Procedures (CAA). Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. ContenJ Basic Functional Devices and Systems (CAA). Tenninal Area Charts. ContenJ Medicine altitude, atmosphere and respiration; acceleration, CAO's. Characteristics of gas turbine engines and basic thermodynamic A VIA123 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE vision, hearing, air sickness; health, drugs; first aid, pilot fitness; analysis, requirements for combustion, fuel specifications, AND LOADING Scp Enroute supplement. fatigue; combustion chambers, turbines, compresor design features, Psychology attention, workload, stress, personality, Prerequisite AVIA113. A.J.P.'s. materials employed in aviation gas turbines, turbo·jets, turbo­ communications. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. fans, turbo-props, ramjets, requirements for supersonic intake and nozzle designs, developments in transonic, supersonic and Examination Progressive assessment plus a fmal examination.

62 63 SECfION FIVE A VIA nON SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECIION FIVE A VIA TION SUBIECI DESCRIPTIONS

hypersonic propulsion systems. Jet and Turbo-prop operations Content AVIA219 HIGH ALTITUDE METEOROLOGY Content with application to in-service aircraft engines. This course provides the core component of the study of flight AND FORECASTING Scp Management of a charter airline operation. Industrial Relations. TexJ planning, bringing together jet aircraft performance; safety Prerequisite A VIA207. Financial Management, HumanResourceManagement Industrial Gas Turbine Powerplants and Their Maintenance on Aircraft requirements; legal requirements; the economics of aircraft Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. safety including legal requirements and management (1987 AGPS-DTC-CAA Main! TexJ 6). operation; the route structure. 1be requirements for all stages of responsibilities. Airworthiness regulatory requirements for the the flight, (including emergency operations) are considered and Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final establishment and operation of organisations involved in various Reference evaluated examination. aviation activities. Rolls Royce, 1986, The Jet Engine, 4th edn, Derby, Rolls Royce. TexJ Content References 8727 Performance Manual CAA. Upper air meteorology ,jet streams, c1earairturbulence, complex CAO's 80 and 82. 100 - 104 series (CAA). AVIA212 HUMAN FACTORS lOcp flows, thermal winds, wind shear, forecasting using radar, use of Prerequisite AVIA119. References satellites, forecasting meso-scale phenomena CAR's (CAA). Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Jet Transport Operations and Performance. Text To be advised. AVIA223 AVIATION COMPUTING AND Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2hourexamination. Manuals - as available. ELECTRONICS Scp AVIA220 AIRCRAFT FATIGUE MANAGEMENT Scp Content Prerequisite AVIA121. AVIA218 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT Prerequisite A VIA213. Ergonomics; displays; aircraft concrol; automation; simulation; PERFORMANCE Scp Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. training; stress/arousal; flight phobia; fatigue. Hours 3 Hours a week for one semester. PrerequisiJe AVIA 123. Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination. Text Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Content Weiner, E.L & Nagel, P. 1988, Human Factors in Aviation, Content Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination. Amplification and switching circuits using p-n jooctions. Boolean Academic Press. Concepts of safe life, fail safe and damage tolerance. The Content logic,logic gates, TTL and CMOS logic devices, multiplexers, Reference mechanism offatigue; stress concentration, dynamic load spectra, comparators, analog-digital convertors, computer architecture, Application of knowledge and skills gained in principles of crack propagation, fatigue life determination,limitations offatigue O'Hare, D., & Roscoe, S. 1990, Flightdeck Performance-The interfacing standards. The application of electronic circuits and flight; engines, systems, and instrumentation; aircraft perfonnance test methods, non-destructive inspection techniques, damage Human Factor, Iowa U.P. computers in the control of aircraft systems; an oveIView of the and operations; navigation; meteorology; and flight rules and tolerance ratings, certification requirements. aircraft structural glass COCkpit. Transducers; the application of electronic circuits procedures to the operation of charter flights in multi-engine inspection programmes, managing the "aging aircraft" fleet. and computers in data acquisition and the control of servo AVIA213 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES AND aeroplanes. Static structural overload: column and sheet instabilities. Failures MATERIALS Scp devices. a) Concepts and considerations which are distinctive to multi­ in composites. Prerequisite 60 credit point A VIA 100 level References engine flight. References Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester Smith, R J. 1987, Electronics Circuits and Devices, 2nd edn, b) Determining the performance that can be expected following Shigley I.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design metric edn Wiley. Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and an engine failure and explaining the aerodynamic factors and McGraw Hill. lab reports plus examination Lancaster, 0.1989, TTL Cookbook Howard Sams. piloting techniques involved with single-engine flight 1991, Structural Integrity ofAging Airplanes Springer Verla Content c) Fuel requirements, fuel planning for holding or alternate 1987, United Airlines Avionics Fundamentals IA. Properties of materials commonly used in aircraft construction requirements, fuel planning for multi-stage flights, finding AVIA221 HUMAN PERFORMANCE IN Mitchell, Introduction to Electronics Design. and typical fabrication methods. Loads applied to aircraft the minimum or maximum fuel. MULTI-CREW OPERATIONS Scp structures, the Manoeuvre Fnvelope, Gust Loads. d) Determining the maximum take-off weight, esablishing a Prerequisite A VIA212. AVIA30S AIRCRAFT DESIGN Scp Material stress and strain, strength and ductility. Introduction to performance limited or landing weight, finding the maximum Hours 3 Hours for one semester. Prerequisite AVIA213 Metallurgy. Metal corrosion and methods employed in protection. payload, picking up or dropping off weight at intennedia1e Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, exercises Corequisite AVIA318 Intnxluction to sandwich and fibre -matrix composite structures. landing points. (including demonstrated instruction), assignments and a final I/OUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester References e) Weight and Balance, adding weight while keeping the centre examination. of gravity constant, shifting weight to place the C of G on Examination Progressive assessment based on individual and Shigley, J.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design Metric edn forward or aft limits. Content syndicate tasks plus final examination. McGraw-Hill. o Right planning and operations requirements, critical point, Personality; communications; group processes; leadership; cabin Content Dole, C.E. Fundamentals ofAircraft Material Factors, Aviation planning for alternate and/or holding requirements, use of safety. Parametric design of aircraft, performance estimation, power Books. flow charts. Text requirements, international design standards, market feasibility AC 43.13 Acceptable Metlwds, Techniquuand Practices FAA/ g) Overwater flying. mountain flying and float flying. Wiener E.L.. & Nagel D.C. 1988, Hwnan Factors in Aviation studies, aircraft development case studies. The syllabus addresses lAP the various roles Lbe professional pilot may play in the multi­ Texts Academic Pres. US FAR 23 FAA Regulatory Data disciplinary process of aircraft design and development. Civil Aviation Regulations and Civil Aviation Orders 20-99. AVIA222 MANAGEMENT OF AVIATION Scp References AVIA214 JET AIRCRAFT FLIGHT PLANNING lOcp Aeronautical Information Publication. Prerequisite A VIA 120. Civil Aviation Orders 101, 103, 108 series Prerequisite A VIA 117 Abridged Performance and Operation Manual for Echo Mk N. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Stinton, D. 1985, The Design of the Aeroplane Collin. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Different Twin Engine Aircraft Pilot Operating Handbooks. Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars. projects, Raymer D.P. 1989, Aircraft Design: A Conceptual Approach Examination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour final exercises, plus a final examination. AlA. examination.

64 65 SECfION FIVE A VIATION SUBlECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FlVE AVIATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

A VIA306 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT AVIAJII ADVANCED AVIATION second semester, and is due on the first week of the examination AVIAJ20 AVIATION INSTRUCTION OPERATIONS 10cp INSTRUCTION 10cp period at the end of the semester. PRACTICUM I 5cp PrerequisiJe A VIA214. Prerequisite A V1A308. Text To be advised. Corequisile A VIA 308 Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. Hours 4 Hours of lectures and 2 Hours of tutorials a week in Hours 2 Hours per week A VlAJlS ADVANCED AVIATION semester two. Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorial MANAGEMENT 5cp Examinations Progressive assessment based on seminars, presentations and assignments. ExaminationProgressiveassessmentbasedonseminarpreparation preparation and presentation of lesson plans. Prerequisite A VIA222. Content and presentations, practice teaching, assignments and examination. The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Standard and computerized flight planning. The evaluation of Content instructors to apply their knowledge of learning and teaching Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, aircraft types for particular types of operation. The development Inslructional design, problem-based learning, computers in principles to the preparation of lessons plans adapted to the flight and of operational procedures and policy. instruction, simulation, training environments, student stress and assignments final project. training environment. Italsoaimstoprovidenewflightinstructors with the basis of future development in the practice and theory of Text To be advised. training, aircrew perfonnance assessment. Content aviation education. References Text to be advised. Students will be assigned to groups of four which will be A problem-based approach will be used, through small group References responsible for the production of a group report on an aviation Performance Manuals and Right Planning Oataor CUrrent Aircraft management topic to be decided in consultation. discussion and team teaching, to examine the teaching practices Types. Cole, P. and Chan, L.1989. TMching Principles and Practice and problems encountered in flight instruction. Special emphasis Prentice Hall. AVIA316 FLIGHT DECK PERFORMANCE 5cp will be placedon teaching in a non-traditional and oftenthreatening AVIA308 AVIATION INSTRUCTION 10cp environment. Cooper, J.M. et al. 1990, Classroom Teaching Skills, Heath. Prerequisite A VIA221. Prerequisile 60 credit points A VIA200 level Texls Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Hours 4 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for semester A VIA312 APPLIED AERODYNAMICS 5cp Telfer, R & Biggs, J. 1988. The Psychology ofFlighl Training, Examination Progressive assessment and final exam. one. Prerequisites A VIA318, AVIA223 Iowa Slate University Press. Content Examination Progressive evaluation based on seminar preparation Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester Civil Aviation Aurhorily 1988. FlighJ Ins/ruc/or's Manual. Systems theory in aviation; selection and testing of pilots; human and presentation, practice teaching. assignments andexaminations. Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination References Content factors research methods; accident investigation. Conlent Cole, P. & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, The psychology ofleaming. instructional methods, evaluation of Text a) flight simulation using analog and digital computezs, modelling Prentice Hall. instruction and leaming,lesson planning, use and preparation of Flightdeck Performance: Course Resource Materials stability and control characteristics from flight lest data. simulator Cooper, J.M. et al. 1990. Classroom Teaching Skills. Heath. teaching aids. Teaching in the aviation environment. fidelity, aircraft flight control computers. Turney, C. et aI. 1976, Sydney Micro Skills. Teaching SkiUs Texls AVIA317 AVIATION CLIMATOLOGY Scp b) The use of computers in predicting aerodynamic peIformance; Developmenl Project, Sydney University Press. Prerequisite A VIA207. Telfer, R. and Biggs 1. 1988, The Psyclwlogy ofFlight Training comparison of computer predictions with wind tunnel results. Iowa State University Press. modelling real aircraft effects including boundary layers, and Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. AVIA321 AVIATION INSTRUCTION 1988. eAA FlighJ Instructor's Manual CAA,. compressibility. Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final PRACTICUM II s cp References References examination. Prerequisites AVIA308 Cole, P & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Elkin, B. 1982, Dynamics of FlighJ ,Wil. Content Corequisite AVIA 311, A VIA320 Prentice Hall. HOUghton, E.L. & Canuthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Comparative urban and regional climatology. Implication for Hours 2 Hours per week international flight planning and flying. Localised hazardous Cooper, J.M. et al199O, Classroom Teaching Skills, Heath. Engineering Students 3rd edn Arnol. Examinations Progressive assessment based on seminars, climates Europe; North America; the Atlantic routes; polar Katz,J. and Plotkin, A. 1990, Low Speed Aerodynamics McGraw presentations, and practice teaching. routes; Asia and the Pacific. A VIA310 ADVANCED NA VIGA TlON IOcp Hill. Conlent Prerequisites AVIA209. Text To be advised. Nelson. R.C. Flight Stability and AUZomatic Control The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester. instructors to practice their teaching skills and apply their AVIA314 DIRECTED STUDY 10cp A VIA318 AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorials, CONTROL Scp knowledge of learning and teaching principles in the flight presentations and assignments. Prerequisites Atleasl two of the following: A VIA306,AVIA308. training environment under the supervision of practising flight AVIA310, AVIA318 Prerequisite A VIA 118 instructors and university supervisors. Content Hours 3 Hours per week Hours 4 Hours per week in semester two. The practicum will offer demonstrations by practisinginstruClors, This course covers the spectrum of navigation aids, methods and Aircraft stability and control. aerodynamic couplir:.g, stick fixed Examination Satisfactory completion of project. followed by discussions, and supervised practical teaching systems, past, present and projected. The mathematical and / free longitudinal static stability. neutral point, cg margin. static experience for the students. It offers practical links for the physical basis of navigation and navaids. System accuracy and Conlent margin, lateral and directional stability. configuration effects, academic components of the aviation instruction courses and reliability requirements. This subject is designed for students interested in developing a control surface sizing. Introduction to Aeroelasticity. provides the opportunity to integrate the knowledge gained to the Text To be advised specialist topic under the supervision of alecturer. The approval References aviation instruction context. It will expose student instructors to of the lecturer and Year III co-ordinator is required. the variety and complexity of working in the flight training References Houghton. E.L. & Carruthers. N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for environment and allows them to gain professional experience Janes Avionics 1989 -1990. A detailed proposal indicating objective(s) and workplan are to Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnol. be submitted by the end of semester one. The resultant project and development. Manufacturers Technical and Operating Manuals. Stinton. D. 1985, The Design of 1M Aeroplane Collin. should represent the allocation of four Hours per week for the

66 67 SECfION FIVE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Tuls Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions Content BIOL202 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY Uk" Telfer, R & Biggs, J. 1988, TM Psychology ofFlighi Training, Cell Biology Prerequisites BI0L101, BIOLl02 Iowa State University Press. BIOLlOI PLANT & ANIMAL BIOLOGY IOcp Theme The evolution and functional organization of cells. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Cillil AlIialionAUlhority. 1988, Flighllnstructor's Manual. Prerequisites Nil - see notes on BIOLlOl under "Assumed Topics ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper. Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty". References Biological molecules - the structure of proteins, carbohydrates ConunJ Cole, & Chan, '1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. and lipids. P. L. Consideration of the processes involved in the transport of Prentice Hall. ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper. Cell organization - emphasis on organelle ultrastructure and oxygen in mammals and emphasizing the relation between Cooper, J.M. et aI. 1990, Classroom Teacmng Skills, Heath. Content principal function, evolution of cells. structure and function. The course examines molecule. cell and Tumey, C. et aI. 1976, Sydney Micro Skills, Teaching Skills The course is organised into 2 units. Biological energy processes - photosynthesis, cellularrespiration. tissue structure and function, particularly of nerve and muscle. and therespiralory ,cardiovascular andcontrol systems. Particular Dellelopment Project, Sydney University Press. Genetics Unit 1 emphasis is given to physiological adaptations to the environment Plant Diversity - Form and Function. Cell division, Mendelian genetics, Scientific method. Molecular and the effects of the environment on physiological functions. biology. Gene action; development and differentiation. Theme Structural specialization to facilitate efficient functional References Probability. Tests of significance. Immunology. capacity. Eckert, R. & Randall, D. 1983, Animal Physiology Mechanisms An introduction to ecology. Topics and Adaptations, 3rd edn, Freeman. Texts The major plant groups and their life cycles. Higher plant Bloom, W. & Fawcett,D.W. 1975,A TextbookofHistology ,10th structure and function. Plant development. Plant diversity as a Villee, C.A., Solomon, E.P., et al1989, "Biology" 2nd edn edn, Saunders. Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia/Sydney. consequence of adaptation forsuIVival in a range of environments. Prosser, C.L. 1973, Comparative Animal Physiology, 3td edn Unit2 or Saunders. Animal Diversity - Form and Function Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. 1986, Biological Science, 4th edn, Ruch, T.e. & Patton, H.D. 1974, Physiology and Biophysics If Norton. Theme The variety of structural and functional adaptations CircuJationRespiralionand Fluid Balance ,20thedn, Saunders. which have allowed ani mals to exploit the wide range of available Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et al 1985, The Penguin McGilvery, RW. 1983, Biochemistry A Functional Approach, environments. Dictionary of Biology Penguin. 3rd edn Saunders. Topics References BIOL204 CELL AND MOL,~,CULAR BIOLOGY lOcp The Animal Phyla - organisation of tissues and organs, body Ayala, F.M. & Kiger, J.A. 1984, Modern Genetics, Benjamin Prerequisites BIOL101, BIOLl02. plans, body cavities, patterns of development. Cummings. Animal Function - digestion, circulation, respiration, integration Moroney, MJ. 1984, Facts from Figures, Penguin. Hours 6 Hours per week. for one semester. and control, homeostasis, reproduction and development. Parker, RE. 1973, Introductory Statistics for Biology, Edward Examination One 2 hour paper. TexlS Arnold. Content Villee, C.A., Solomon, H.P. et al.1989, "Biology" 2nd edn, Tamarin, R 1991, Principles of Genetics, 3rd edn, Wm. C. Cellular organisation and inter-relalionships. Organelles, their Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia/Sydney. Brown. structure & function. Cellular processes. or Texl BIOL201 BIOCHEMISTRY IOcp Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. 1986, Biological Science, 4th edn, Alberts, B., Bray, D. et aI. 1989, Molecular Biology oftMCell, Prerequisites BIOLlOl, BI0L102. Norton. 2nd edn, Garland. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et al 1985, The Penguin Dictionary of Biology Penguin. Examination One 2 hour paper. BIOL205 MOLECULAR GENETICS IOcp References Content Prerequisites BIOL101, BIOLl02. Pearse & Buchsbaum,el al. 1987 ,Living Invertebrates BlackweW Carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids Wld proteins. Vitamins and Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Boxwood. coenzymes. Enzymes. Intermediary metabolism. Examination One 2 hour paper. Taiz, L. Wld Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology The Benjamin! Texl ContenJ Cummings Publishing Co. Mathews, C.K & van Holde, K. E. 1990, Biochemistry, Benjamin! The structure of chromosomes and chromatin. Genetic mapping Cummings Publishing Co. and recombination. DNA structure, replication and repair, Gene BIOLl02 CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS References action and its control. Immunogenetics. & EVOLUTION IOcp Zuhay, G. 1988, BiocMmistry, 2nd edn MacMillan. Recombinant DNA technology and genetic engineering. Prerequisite See notes on BIOL1 01 under" Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty". Conn, E.E., Stumpf, P.K. et aI. 1987, Outlines of BiocMmistry , TeXIs 5th edn, Wiley. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Tamarin, R. 1991, Principles of Genetics, 3rd edn, Wm. C. Lehninger, A.L. 1983, PrincipiesofBiochemistryGeneralAspecls Brown. Examination One 3 hour paper. ,7th edn McGraw-Hil. Old, R.W. & Primrose, S.B. 1989, Principles of Gene McGilvery, R.W. 1983, Biochemistry. A Functional Approach, Manipulation, 4th edn, Blackwell. 3rd edn Saunders. 68 69 SECfION FIVE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

References BIOLJ02 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY lOc:p Lyndon, R.F. Plant DevelopmenJ. The Cellular Basis. Topics in Cloning Techniques. Methods in Enzymology, Volume 152, Alberts. B., Bray. D. el aI. 1989, Molecular Biology o/the Cell. PrerequisiJes Two BIOL200. Plant Physiology 3, M. Black and J. Chapman (eds). Unwin Academic Press, San Diego and Sydney. Hyman, London. 2nd edn, Garland. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Sarnbrook, J. Fritsch, E.F. & Maniatis, T. 1989, Molecular Sambrook. J" Fritsch. liF. et aI. 1989, Molecular Cloning. 2nd Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985, Plant Physiology, 3rd edn, Cloning. A Laboratory Manti

70 71 SECfION FIVE CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE CHEMISTRY SURlECTDESCRlPTIONS

SECTION B A selection of topics will be taken from: Chemistry Subject Descriptions Text determination (infra-red, proton magnetic resonance, mass The threat of modem agricultural practices to genetic diversity Brown. T.L.. LeMay. H.E .••! aI. 1991. Chemistry-The Cenlral spectrometry); acidity and basicity of organic compounds; Science, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall. reactions of carbonyl compounds; aromaticity; electrophilic The potential of microbiology for waste management CHEMIOI CHEMISTRY 101 IOcp substitution in aromatic systems; reactions of aromatic Students who have not studied Chemistry previously are strongly Methods for detecting biological pollution CHEM211 ANAL ITICAL CHEMISTRY IOcp compounds. An introduction to the chemistry of some biologically advised to read the first six chapters in the main teXt (Brown and important compounds including carbohydrates, amino acids, The principles of conservation Prerequisites CHEMI 01, CHEMI02. leMay) before commencement of the academic year. proteins and nucleic acids. Environmental animal and plant physiology studies Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Adlluory subjects Atleast Mathematics (2 unit course), Otemistry Texis The interaction between vegetation, water.table. irrigation and (2 unitcourse) and Physics (2 unit course), with ranking in the top Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. Solomons, T.W.G. 1988, Organic Chemistry ,4th edn, Wiley. soil salt levels 50% in each case. Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count The commercial harvesting of natura} populations - fish, whale Hours 3 lecture Hours, 1 hour of tutorial and 2 Hours of for 15% of the final assessment buta pass in the laboratory work OR and kangaroo models laboratory classes per week for one semester. is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. (Recommended for students proceeding to Level 300 subjects). Evolution of plant-herbivore and predator-prey systems and Examinalion One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ConJefli Morrison, R. T. & Boyd, R.N. 1987, Organic CMmistry, 5th edn, otherinterspecificinteractions -implications forcontro] programs for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Evaluation and manipulation of analytical data, tiuimetric methods Allyn & Bacon. Environmental consequences of the release of genetically is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. of analysis including theory of acid-base, complex fonnation and Lehman,J.W. 1984, Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry engineered species. ConJenJ oxidation - reduction titrations. Allyn & Bacon. The choice of IOpiCS in Section B should be determined in General Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures) Selected instrumental methods of analysis, atomic spectroscopy, absorption spectrophotometry, potentiometric techniques, gas CHEM241 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY IOcp consultation with the Head of Department. Revision of basic chemical principles. Introduction to atomic and chromatography. TexI molecular concepts. Simple ionic and covalent bonding models. Prerequisites CHEM10t, CHEMI02. Text Krebs. C.!. 1985, EcoLogy, Harper and Row. Organic Chemistry (approximately 241ectures) Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hargis, L.G. 1988, Analytical Chemistry, Principles and Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. References Historical development. The shapes, structures and names of Techniques, Prentice-Hall. Examinillion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count Hedrick. P.W. 1984, PopUlation Biology, Jones & Bartlett. organic compounds; reactions of common functional groups; synthesis, differentiation and structural elucidation of organic for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work CHEM221 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY IOcp Krebs, C.J. 1989, Ecological Methodology ,Harper and Row. compounds. Applications of organic chemistry. is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. Recher, H., Lunney,D. et al 1988. Natural Legacy ,Pergamon Prerequisites CHEMI01,CHEMI02. Texts CofllenJ Press. Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 EITHER Chemical Dynamics - rate laws of chemical kinetics, principles Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. of mechanism, determination; transition stale theory; electrolyte BIOL312 ANIMAL DEVELOPMENT IOcp Brown, W.H. 1988,lnJroduction to Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count activity; thermodynamics of galvanic cells. Only one of BIOLJ08 and BlOLJ12 can be credited towards a Wadsworth student edn, Brooks/Cole & Nelson. for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Surface Chemistry - definitions; binding in crystals; degree. OR is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. condensation coefficient; sticking probability; adsorption Prerequisites Two BIOL200 Hart, H. 1991, Organic Chemistry-A Short Course ,8th edn, ConJem isothenns; Langmuir modeJ; types of isotherms; detennination International student edn, Houghton Mifflin Co. of sunace area of adsorbents (BET); applications of adsorptions. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Main group chemistry and transition metal chemistry. Examination One 2 hour paper. Aylward,G.H. & Findlay, T.J.V. 1974, S.l. Chemical Data, 2nd Coordination complexes and metal ion-ligand interactions~ ionic Atomic & Molecular Spectroscopy - structure of free atom~ edn, Wiley. Bohr model; electronic structure of diatomic molecules; potential ConJenJ bonding; symmetry and structure. Brown, T.L., LeMay,H.E.,eta1.1991,CMmistry-TMCenJral energy cUJVes; rotational spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; The course deals with molecular, cellular and physiological Introduction to reactions and mechanisms, synthesis, Science, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall. vibration-rotation spectroscopy. aspects of the development and differentiation of invertebrates spectroscopic methods, bonding and ligand field theory in Texl and vertebrates. Specific topics include gametes & fertilization, Lehman,J. W. 1984,Molecular Model SetforOrganic CMmistry, coordination compounds and organometallic chemistry. cleavage & gastrulation, molecular biology of development, Allyn & Bacon. Text Atkins, P.W. 1990, Physical Chemistry, 4th edn, Oxford. mammalian development and placentation, sex determination & Cotton, F.A., Wilkinson, G.,d aI. 1987 .Basic Inorganic Chemistry CHEMI02 CHEMISTRY 102 IOcp CHEM251 APPLIED CHEMISTRY IOcp differentiation, embryos & reproductive technologies, and ,2nd edn, Wiley. abnormal development & the role of environmental agents. Hours 3 lecture Hours and 1 hour of tutorial and 2 Hours of Not offered in 1993. References laboratory classes per week for one semester. CHEM231 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY IOcp CHEM261 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY IOcp Alberts, B., Bray, D. et al1989, Molecular Biology of the Cell, Examination One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count Prerequisites CHEMI01, CHEMI02. for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Prerequisites CHEMI01, CHEMI02. 2nd edn. Garland. Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. Austin, C.R. & Short R V. 1982,ReproductioninMammais vols Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 CoflienJ Hours of laboratory each week for one semester. 1 & 2, 2nd edn, Cambridge. Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count Inorganic Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures) for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count Inorganic solids and their structures. Simple molecular orbital is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in this work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. theory and structure and bonding in metals. Transition metal CoflienJ chemistry, coordination compounds. Cofllefll A course covering the basic chemistry of aliphatic and aromatic Physical Chemistry (approximately 24 lectures) compounds and their spectroscopic properties. This subject is an introduction to environmental chemistry, focussing on the hydrosphere and the atmosphere. Specific Chemical equilibria, thermodynamics, electrochemistry, chemical An introduction to spectroscopic methods of structure kinetics. topics include general introduction; properties, composition, 72 73 SECTION FIVE CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS PRINCIPAL DATES 1993 redox equilibria and complexation in natural and waste waters; nuclear chemistry. TopiCS include electronic analytical signal chemical aspects of microbial cycles; water pollution; nature and processing; automated analysis (flow analysers, batch anaJysers, composition oftheatmosphere; inorganic atmospheric pollutants; samplers); applications of computers and robots; X-ray/electron photochemical smog; atmospheric mOnitoring; an overview of microprobe analysis; radiochemical analysis; kinetic and energy sources. enzymatic methods of analysis. Text Text No fOImai text; material to be advised. Manahan,S.B. 1990. Environmenlal Chemistry ,5thedn, Lewis. CHEM314 TRACE ANALYSIS IN CHEM311 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS Scp Prerequisile CHEM211. Not available in 1993. Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 CHEM321 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY lOcp Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. Prerequisite CHEM221. ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 GENERAL INFORMATION is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. 30 Thursday Closing date for UAC applications for enrolment in Exmninalion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count Principal Dates 1993 Content 1994 (Undergraduate courses other than Medicine and Aviation. for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work (See separate entry for the Bachelor of Medicine degree course). Principles of selected instrumental techniques (e.g. emission October is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. January spectroscopy and electro-analytical procedures). Solvent 4 MoNJay Public Holiday-Labour Day extraction; chromatogmphy (theory and techniques). Content 1 Friday Public Holiday - New Year's Day 11 Monday Lectures resume Text A general course exploring the range of modem inorganic 6 Wednesday Last day for return of Enrolment Application Forms chemistry. including synthesis, reactivity and applications of - Continuing Students November Christian. G.D. & O'Reilly. I. E. 1986. Instrumental Analysis, spectroscopic methods. February 5 Friday Second Semester concludes -last date for withdrawal from 2nd edn. Allyn & Bacon. Semester 2 and Full Year subjects Metal Chemistry - transition elements and coordination 5 Friday New students accept UAC main round offer 8 Monday Annual EKaminations begin CHEM312 CHEMOMETRICS Scp chemistry; isomerism, f -block elements, inorganic reaction 12 Friday mechanisms, electron transfer and voltammetry. 26 Friday Annual Examinations end Prerequisites CHEM211. MATH102 (or MATH 112) TO New students enrol Organometallic Chemistry - main group and transition metals; 1994 February Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 22 Monday structure and bonding; cyclic donors; carbonyl and olefin MOIlday First Tenn begins l Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a 26 Friday last date for payment of General Service Charge complexes; applications to industrial cataJysis. DATES FOR THE 1993 ACADEMIC YEAR FOR THE semester. March Inorganic Spectroscopy - electronic spectroscopy; vibrational BACHEWR OF MEDICINE PROGRAM Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboralory/assignment work 1 Monday First Semester begins spectroscopy; nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy; Year I will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the introduction to other methods (e.g. Mossbauer, eleclron spin 30 Tuesday Last day for variation of program in relation Semester 1 commences Monday 1 March, 1993 laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the resonance, and chiroptical spectroscopy). subject. to HECS liability for Semester I. recess Friday 9 April 1993 Text Content April 10 Purcell, K.F. & Kotz, J.e. 1980, An Introduction to Inorganic 9 Friday Good Friday - Easter Recess commences Friday 16 April 1993 Use of computers in chemistry to improve the performance of Chemistry, International edn, Holt-Saunders. Monday 19 April 1993 procedures using optimisation methods and to enhance the analysis 19 Monday - Lectures Resume resumes concludes Friday 2 July 1993 of measurements using linear and non-linear regression and CHEM322 METAL·METAL BONDING AND June commences Monday 19July 1993 factor analysis. Theory is exemplified with lypical everyday CLUSTER CHEMISTRY Scp 7 Monday Public Holiday- Queen's Birthday Semester 2 1993 problems. 11 Friday FirstSemesterconcludes - Last date for withdrawal from recess Monday 27 September Prerequisite CHEM221. Text No formal text; material to be advised. Semester 1 subjects. 10 Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 14 Monday Mid year Examinations begin Friday 8 October 1993 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a 1993 CHEM313 INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Scp 30 Wednesday Closing date for applications for selection to the resumes Monday 11 October semester. Prerequisite CHEM2Jl. BachelorofMedicine and BachelorofScience (Aviation) in 1994. concludes Friday 5 November 1993 Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work: July Examinations commence Monday 8 November 1993 Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the conclude Friday 19 November 1993 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the 2 Friday Mid Year Examinations end semester. Monday 22 November 1993 subject. Mini-Elective commences concludes Friday 3 December 1993 ExaminaJion One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work Content 19 Monday Second Semester hegins will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the NOTE: Metal-metal multiple bonding; lower halide clusters. structure August laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the Semester One consists of Block One (10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block subject. and bonding in boranes and transition metal clusters; higher 30 Monday Last day for variation of program in relation to HECS nuclearity clusters; clusters and catalysis; Zinll species. liability for Semester 2. Two. Content Semester Two consists of the remaining 3 weeks of Block Two, all of September Text No formallext~ material to be advised. Block Three (10 weeks), and Sluvac (1 week). A survey of selected techniques for specialised or high volume 25 Saturday Mid Semester recess hegins analysis used in areas as diverse as industriaJ, R & D,hos pital and 1 Date to be fiNllised

74 ADVICE AND INFORMAnON STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES

Year Two Assessment May 10- May 14 I week Most services are located in the Temporary Buildings adjacent to the Special equipment is available in some lecture theatres and in the Semester 1 commences Monday I March 1993 Vacalioo May 17- May21 I week Computer Teaching Building except where indicated. Most services are Libraries. rece" Friday 9 April 1993 Clinical Audunent 3 May24- July9 7 weeks also available on the Central Coast Campus. If you need academic assistance, please do not hesitate to contact your to Clinical Attachment 4 July 12 - Aug 27 7 week, The Dean of Students, Professor K.R. Dutton (located in the Bowman rele.vant Faculty Adviser. Friday 16 April 1993 Stuvac Aug 30- Sept 3 I week Building) is responsible for the network of SlUdent Services and his Fatuity Advisers Assessment assistance or advice is available to srudents where appropriate. The Sub­ reswnes Monday 19 April 1993 Sept6 - Sept17 2 weeks Mr Arthur Kingsland (049)215783 Dean, Ms. M. Kibby (Hunter Building Room Cl8) will advise students Architecture concludes 2nd Assessment Sept 20 - Sept 2A I week Friday 2 July 1993 on the correct procedures to follow in cases of appeal or grievance Art, Design & Comm. Mr Bruce Wilson 216606 Semester 2 Elective Attachment Sepl27- Nov 19 8 weeks commences Monday 19 July 1993 applications. Both can be contacted on 215806. Am A/Prof. A. Barthofer 215372 FinaJ Assessment Nov 22- Nov 26 I week ""''''' Monday 27 September 1993 Accommodation Omce Economics & Commerce Ms. Anne Finlay 216769 to Nok_" Years 3,4 & 5 do fIOt co1lformwith the UniversityojNewcastie' s Sem.es~T da~s. Offers advice onrental matters and assistance inresolving accommodation Education Ms Margaret Davies 216283 Friday 8 October 1993 problems. Maintains lists of accommodation available off-campus in Engineering Dr David Wood 216198 resumes Advice and Information private homes,rooms, flats and houses. Mrs Kalh Dacey,Accommodation Monday 11 October 1993 Health Sciences Mr Andrew Bertram 216733 Officer. Enquiries phone (049) 215593. concludes Themainpointofcontactforenquiriesconcemingcoursesandenrolment Friday 5 November 1993 Medicine A/Prof. David Powis 215625 Examinations is the Fagdty Office The Faculty Office can provide advice on Faculty Careers & Student Employment Office commence Monday 8 November 1993 Music Mr Paul Curtis 294133 rules and policies, course requirements, procedures relating to course A free service to students atany stage oftheir studies covering all matterS conclude Friday 19 November 1993 Nursing Ms Suzanne Lyons 216312 administration and so on. If academic advice is required, the Faculty relating to employment: careers information and planning, resume and Mini-Elective commences Monday 22 November 1993 Office can direct enquiries to the appropriate Dean, Assistant Dean, interview preparation workshops, graduate recruitment, vacation Science & Mathematics Dr Graham Couper 215529 Course Co-ordinator" or Head of Department. concludes Friday 3 December 1993 employment and part~time student employment service. Ms H. Parker, Social Science Ms Sue Muloin 216787 FACULlY OFFICES NOTE: phone (049) 215588. University Ubraries Ms Anne Robinson 215831 Facility Semester One C01lSists of Block Four {10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block Colllaci Location Telephone Chaplaincy Mr Gary Jones 216465 Five. Architecture JennieGow 1-06N 215570 The Chaplaincy Centres are located in the temporary buildings adjacent ENROLMENT OF NEW UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS to the Computer Teaching Building and also in Room A 187 in the Hunter Semeste: Two consists oflhe remaining 3 weeks of Block. Five, all of Art, Design & Sheila Proust ABI-31 216525 Persons offered enrolment are required to attend in person at the Greal Block SIX(JO weeb) and Stuvac (J week) Communication Maryanne Cartwright Building nearthe Huxley Library. Pastoral and spiritual care is available Hall in February to enrol. Detailed inslructions are given in the Enrolment from denominational chaplains. Phone (049) 215571 or (049) 216648. Year Three Vicki Drewe ABI-10 215639 Guide which Is sent out with the UAC offer. Counselling ServIce Block 7 PebS - April 30 12 weeks: llweekblock Art, David Donnelly CU32 215323 TRANSFER OF COURSE Location: Courtyard level Auchmuty Library building. Assists people 1 week A VCC/Easter Economics & Linda H8JTigan S18 215984 Students currently enrolled in an undergraduate course who wish to whoare having academic orpersonal difficulties, orwho simply want to Vacation 9-16/4 Commerce Natalie Downing S16 215983 transfer to adifferent undergraduate course in 1993 must apply through function more effectively. Individual counselling and group courses are Block 8 May 3 - June 25 8 weeks the Universities Admission Centre (UAC) by 30 September 1992. Late Education Chandra Murti ABI-4I 216529 available. Phone (049) 215806. Vacation applications will be accepted through UAC until 31 October if June 28- July 9 2 weeks (A VCC Katrina Killel ABI-43 216530 Health Service accompanied by a $60.00 late fee. Late applications will be accepted Irene Blyth ABI-39 common week) 216528 after 31 October direct to the University, but such applications will only Block 9 July 12 - Sept 10 9 weeks: 8 week block Nerida Vee ABI-22 216531 Doctor's surgery is located in the Shortland Union building basement, phone(049) 21 6000. A nursing sister is available on the main concourse be considered if places remain after applications that have been submitted 1 week review Engineering Geoff Gordon EA206 216064 Hunter Building, phone 216452. The health service offers medical care through UAC are considered. Stuvac Sept 13 - Sept 17 1 week Jill Norbwn EA204 216061 similar to a general doctor's surgery with a special interest in the health If a student's request to transfer to another course is successful, the Assessment Helen Jackson EAW5 Sept 20 - Oct 8 3 weeks 216066 needs of students. Patients are bulk-billed. All consulwions are strictly studentmustcomplete a separate Higher Education Contribution Scheme Vacation Oct 11 - Detl5 1 week Health Sciences Jenny Hughes ABI-37 216527 confidential. Health education and infonnation also provided. Dr. S. (HECS) Payment Option fonn for the new course at enrolment time. Maurice Chalmers Block 10 Oct 18 - Dec 10 8 weeks Elective ABl-18 216524 Brookman, phone (049)216000. Payment of the General Service Charge must be made using the notice Law issued part of the re-enrolment process. Year Four Linda Harrigan S18 215984 Sport & Recreation Omce as Clinical Auachmentia Peb I - Mar 12 6 weeks Medicine Brian Kelleher K607A 215676 Promotes, controls and administers all sporting activities ofthe University. RE.ENROLMENT BY CONTINUING STUDENTS Clinical Allachment lb Mar 15 - April 30 6 week attachment Organises classes in wide range of sporting and recreational pursuits. There are five steps involved for re-enrolment by continuing srudents: Music Chris Palmer CONLG4 294207 1 week A VCC/Easter Provides assistance to the sludent sporting and recreation clubs. Nursing Janet Hallinan receive a re-enrolment kit in the mail ABI-33 216523 Coordinates participation in the Australian University championships. Vacation 9-16/4 Estelle Graham ABI-16 lodge the Enrolment Application fonn with details of Vacation 216534 Administers the student accident insurance scheme on behalf of the May3 - May7 I week your proposed program Science & Helen Hotchkiss SB210 215562 Sports Union. Mr A. Lakin, phone (049) 215584. Clinical Attachment 2a May 10- June 18 6 weeks Mathematics Kristine Hodyl Student Support Omce receive a fees & charges notice in the mail in late January. Clinical Attachment 2b June21- July30 6 weeks SB210 215569 Socia1 Sciences payment of the General Service Charge a1 any Commonwealth Vacation Aug2 - Aug 13 2 weeks Susan Eade CU31 216526 Student Service enquiries, student loans and financial advice for students Bank by 26 Februaryl993. Clinical Attachment 3a Aug 16 - Sept 24 6 weeks THE STUDENT ENQUIRY COUNTER on low incomes, advice and referal on other welfare matters and assistance and infonnation for students with disabilities. Ms A. Rudd receive an approved program and student card. Clinical Attachment 3b Sept 27 - Nov 5 6 weeks Located in the Chancellery, the Student Enquiry Counter is the main phone (049) 216467. GPPeriod Nov 8 - Nov 17 One and a half weeks point of contact for enquiries relating to 'non-academic' aspects of Re-Enrolment Kits STUDENTS WIlli DISABILITIES (inclusive) student administration, such as the issue of travel concessions matters Re-enrolment kits for 1993 will be mailed to students in October. The Stuvac Nov 18- Nov 26 Oneandahalfweeks relating to the administration of the Higher Education Con~ibution The University of Newcastle has a policy to provide equal opportunity re-enrolment kit contains the student's Enrolment Application and Scheme (flECS), and the issue and receipt of various forms, such as to students with Special Needs. Assessment Nov 29 - Dec 7 One and a half weeks Statistical Fonn, the 1993 Class Timetable, the 1993 HECS booklet and Change of NRfIle/Address and Transcript Request forms. The Enquiry Year Five Practical assistance, which may be required by students with adisability Enrohnent Guide. Counter also acts as a point of referral for general student enquiries. Clinical AUachrnent 1 Feb I - Mar 19 7 weeks to facilitate their participation in their course of study, can be arranged A fees and charges notice will be mailed separately in late January STUDENT SERVICES through the Student Support Officer. Ms Annette Rudd ,located in the (Please note a Fees and Charges Notice will not be sent until all Clinical AUachrnent 2 Mar 22 - May 7 7 weeks Temporary buildings opposite Mathematics, phone (049) 216467. for all students to assist with many practical matters which outstanding debts/fines have been paid.) (Easter 9-16/4) ~vailable may affect personal adjuShnent to University and success in studies. ii iii EXAMINATIONS RE-ADMISSION AFTER ABSENCE

Lodging Enrolment Application Forms A swdeot who withdraws completely from studies should return the students should make every attempt to flOai ise their enrolmen t within the GENERAL CONDUCT first two weeks of semester. The Enrolment Application fonn must be completed carefully and Student Card to the Student Division Office. In accepting membership of the University, students undertake to lodged at the Srudent Division Office by 6 January 1993. Srudents RE·ADMISSION AFrER ABSENCE ENROLMENTCONflRMATION observe the by-laws and other requirements of the University. should know theireum in81ion results beforecomple ting the re-enrolment A person wishing to resume an undergraduate degree course who has Students should ensure thataD details on theirConfjrmation of Program Students ..e expected to conduct themselves at all times in a seemly form. There is no late charge payable if the form is late, but it is very been enroUed previously at the University ofNewcastle, but 1IOl eN'olkd form are corTecL Failure tocheck: this information COIlld create problem s fashion. Smoking is not permitted during let:tures, in examination rooms Important that the Enrolment Application fonn is lodged by 6 January ;11 1992, is required to apply for admissiOQ again through the Universities at examination time. Please note that it is the student'sresponsibility to or in the University Library. Gambling is faroidden. 1993 as late lodgement will mean that enrolment approval and student Admissions Centre, U>cked Bag 500 Lidcombe 2141. Applicatioo Members of the academic staff of the University, senioradministrative card may nOl: be available for the slart of the semester. (i) ensure that all enrolment details are corTect and. forms may be obtained from the UAC or from the Student Division officers, and other peroons authorised for the purpose have authority to (ii) to withdraw from aSemester II subject ifa failure has been incurred Enrolment Approval Office aod clo6e with the UAC OIl 30 September each year. There is a report on disorderly or improper conduct OCCUlTing in the University. $60.00 fee for late applications. Students who withdrew from their in the Prerequisite Semester I subject. All re-enrolling students will receive in early February either a NOTICES confirmation program and student card or a letter asking them to attend course after 31 March 1992 are not required to apply for re~admission. LEAVE OF ABSENCE Official University notices are displayed on Departmental notice board s in person because there is a problem with their proposed program. CHANGE OF ADDRESS Undergraduate Awards and students are expected to be acquainted with the contents of those Enrolment in tutorial or laboratory sessions should be arranged with The University holds on record both an address for correspondence and Subject to any provision concerning your course as set out in the announcements which concern them. Departments on an individual basis. a home address. Students are responsible for notifying the SlUdent schedule, a candidate in good academic standing in the course: The Hunter Building Concourse is used for the specific purpose of Payment of Cbarges Division Office in writing of any change in their address. A Change of (a) may take leave of absence of one year from the course; or displayingexaminationtime-tablesandothernoticesaboutexaminations Address form should be used and is available from the Student Division The Fees and Charges Notice will be mailed to re-enrolling students in (b) with the permission oftheDean, may take leave of absence for two and final results. late January (please note aPeesand Charges Notice will not be sent until Office. consecutive years from the course EXAMINATIONS all outstanding debts/fines have been paid). The 1993 General Service Failure to notify chaoges to your correspondence address could lead to Charge must be paid at any Commonwealth Bank branch using the Pees important correspondence or course information not teQChing you. The without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol in the couse Tests and assessments may be held in any subject from lime to time. In and Charges Notice. Payments made after 26 February 1993 will incur University cannot accept responsibility if official communications fail following such absence. theassessmentofastudent'sprogressinauniversitycourse,consideration a $50.00 late fee. toreach a student who has not notified the SlUdent Division Office of a Candid81es should also refer to the Rules Governing Undergraduate will be given to laboratOry work, tutorials and assignments and to any term or other tests conducted throughout the year. The results of such All charges listed on the Pees and Charges Notice must be paid. The change of address. Awards, Rule 10 Leave of Absence, and the schedules regarding the assessments and class work may be incorporated with those of formal Bank will not accept part payment. CHANGE OF NAME defmition of'good standing'. You should also consult with your Faculty Officer. To re-enrol in your course after leave of absence, you must re­ written examinations. SCHOLARSIDP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED STUDENTS Students who change their name should advise the Student Division apply through the Universities Admissions Centre (UAG, Locked Bag EXAMlNA TION PERIODS Students holding scholarships or receiving other forms of financial Office. A marriage or deed poll certificate should be presented for 500, Lidcombe, NSW, 2141. The closing date for applications is 30 Formal written examinations take place on prescribed dates within the assistance must lodge with the Cashier their Pees and Charges Notice sighting in order that the change can be noted on University records. Sepwmber each year. following periods, Saturdays may be included: together with a warrant or other written evidence that charges will be CHANGE OF PROGRAMME Postgraduate Course work Awards paid by the sponsor. Spoosors must provide a separate voucher warrant MidYear; 14June-2July 1993 Approval must be sought for any changes to the programme for which Leave of absence may not be available for some courses. Ca.'ldidates or letter for each student sponsored. a srudenthas enroJled. This includes adding subjects, withdrawing from End of Year: 8t026November,l993 should refer to the course schedules, and also consult with their Faculty LATE PAYMENT subjects or the course, or replacing one subje<:t with another. Officer regarding any requirement to lodge a formal application for Timetables showing the date and time at which individual examinations will beheld will be displayed in the Hunter Building Concourse, specific The Final date for payment of the GeneraJ Service Charge is 26 All proposed changes should be entered on the Programme Variation leave. February 1992. Payments made after this date will incur a $50.00 late section on the reverse side of the COnfirmation of Programme fomJ.. Deparllnental noticeboards and other prominent locations on campus. Research Higher Degrees tee. Where appropriate, reasons for changes and/or docum en\ar)' evidence in Mi steading of the timetable will not under any circumstances be accepted the form of medical or other relevant certificates must be submitted. Leave of ab.sence is nOl: automatically granted, and candidates are as an excuse for failure to attend an examination. Thereafter enrolment wIll be cancelled lfcharges remain unpaid by required to lodge a written application for leave of absence prior to the 19 March. Programme Variation fQftns should be lodgedatormailed totherelevant end of the preceding semester. Applications should be lodged with the SITTING FOR EXAMINATIONS Faculty Office. FAILURE TO PAY OVERDUE DEBTS Postgraduate Studies Office for approval by the Graduate Studies Formal examinations, where prescribed, arecompulsory. Srudents should Any student who is indebted tothe University by reason of non-payment Withdrawal from Subjects or Course Committee. Refer to the Masters and Doctoral Degree Rules. consult the final timetable in advance to find out the date and time of their of any fee or charge, non-payment ofany fine imposed, or who h as failed Applications received by the appropriate date listed below will be Scholarship Recipients examinations. to pay any overdue debts shall nOl: be permitted to: approved for withdrawal without a failure being recorded against the Scholarship holders, both undergraduate and postgraduate, who wish to LOCATION OF EXAMINATIONS subject or subjects in question. complete enrolment in a following year; take leave of absence from their courSe, or who do not intend to lake a Seat allocation lists for examinations will be displayed about two weeks receive a transcript of academic record; Wi!hdrawal Dates full-time program in any semester, are required to lodge a written before the commencement of the examination period on the noticeboard Semester 1 Subie&ls appl ication for suspension of scholarhsip prior to the end ofthe preced ing of the Department running the subject and on a noticeboard outside the graduate or be awarded a Diploma; or Semester 2lFuil Year Syhiects semester. Applications for suspension should be lodged with the examination room on the day of the examination. Candidates should 5 November 1993 receive a replacement Student ID Card 11 June 1993 Scholarships Office for approval by the Scholarsh ips Commiuee. Refer allow themselves plenty of time to get to the examination room so that until such debts are paid. Except wi!h permission of the Dean: to the Conditions of Award of your scholarship. they can take advantage of the 10 minutes reading time that is allowed before the exam ination commences. Normally,entry intothe examination Students are requested to pay any debts incWTed without delay.

v EXAMINATIONS EXAMINATIONS examination paper that the calculator specified is a permitted aid. j'supervlsor" means the supervisor for an eltaminaUon appointed, prescribe a further or supplementary examination for any (b) auendance at or performance in an examination candidate; and Calculatorsmust be hand held, battery operated and non-programmable" in the case of a (onnal written examination, by the Academic has been affected by illness, disability or other serious cause, and sWdents should note that no concession will be granted: Registrar and. in the case of any other examination, by the Head of (c) to record in an examination return a judgement in respect of may report the circumstances in writing, supported bymedical (a) to a student who is prevented from bringing into a room a Department. each candidate fOT submission to the Departmental or other appropriate evidence to the Academic Registrar and programmable calculator; j'supplementaryel.8mlnation"meansanexaminationadministered Examinations Committee. request that they be taken into account in the assessment of the (b) to a student who uses a calculator incorrectly; or to a candidate in respect of whom any doubt exists as to the Departmental recommendations of results examination results of that candidate. Such request shall be judgement to be recorded in an examination return. made on the prescribed fonn. (c) because of battery failure. 9. The Departmental Examinations Commiuee shall consider the PART 1 - GENERAL judgementsrecordedforcandidatesandshallmakerecommendations (2) A request made pursuant to sub-rule (l)(a) shall be submitted UNLISTED CANDIDATES by the candidate within seven days after any absence arising Examinations other than in single department to the Faculty Board as to the result in the subject to be recorded for Ifyou expect to sit for an examination and your name does not appear on each candidate. from. the illness or eventon which the request is based, or such 3. (1) WhereaFaculty isnotcomposedofDepartments,the functions the displayed seal allocation listing it could mean you are not formally longer-period as theDean of the Faculty in which the candidate Determination of results In subjects recorded as being enrolled and eligible to sit and receive a result. In these and responsibilities of the Head of a Department and the is enrolled may accept. Departmental Examinations Committee shall be undertaken circumstances you will need to visit the Examinations Office to identify 10. (1) The recommendations of the Departmental Examinations (3) A request made pursuant to sub-rule (1)(b) shall be submitted respectively by the person or body in that Faculty approved for the problem. If an enrolment problem is confinned you may also need Committee shall be presented totheFaculty Board by lheHead by the candidate not later than three days after the date of the the purpose of these Rules by the Academic Senate. to discuss the matter with your Faculty Officer. of the Department or the representative of that Head, who shall examination or within such further period as the Dean of the RULES FOR FORMAL EXAMINATIONS (2) WhereasubjectisnottheresponsibilityofasingleDepartment, be entitled to vary any recommended result if of the view that Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled may permiL thepersonorbodytoundertakethefunctionsandresponsibilities it is appropriate to do so on the request of the Faculty Board. (4) Where a candidate is personally unable to take the action PART 1 - PRELIMINARY of the Head ofa Departmentand the Departmental Examinations (2) The Dean shall ensure that in making its recommendations the prescribed under this Rule, some other person may take such Appllcatlon of Rules Committee in respect of that subject shall be decided by the Departmental Examinations Commiuee has considered any action on behalf of that candidate. Faculty Board concerned or, where Departments from more 1. These Rules shall apply to all examinations of the University with request for special consideration made by a candidate pursuant than one Faculty are involved, by theAcademicSenate. (5) The Academic Registrar may call for such other evidence in the exception of the examination of a thesis subm iued by a cand idate to Rule 13. respectofthecandidate'srequestasmayhereasonablerequired. for a degree of Master or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. The Determination of nature and extent of examining (3) Each Faculty Board shaH consider the recommendations of the (6) A candidate who is granted special consideration may be examinationofthesesforthesedegreesortheassessmentofpublished 4. Each Faculty Board shall determine the natw'eand extent ofexamining DepartmentalExaminationsCommitteeand,takingintoaccount works submitted for Higher Doctoral Degrees shall be conducted in in the subjects in the awards for which the Faculty is responsible and any change to a recommendation under sub-rules (1) or (2), required to attend a further examination or to undertake further assessment to determine a result. accordance with the requirements for the degree. such examining may be written, oral, clinical or practical or any shall either: Interpretatlon combination of these. (a) confinn the results; or PART 4· FORMAL WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS 2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise Publlcatlon of requirements (b) defer the decision pending the outcome of such other Responsibility indicates or requires: 5. The Head of Department shall ensure the publication of the action as the Faculty Board deems appropriate. 14. The Academic Registrar shall be responsible for the adminislration "award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate diploma Department's examination requirements in each subject by the end Grading of results In subjects and superv ision ofthe fonnaJ written examinations ofthe University. and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate of the second week of the semester in which the subject commences Timetable for formal written examinations is enrolled; including the weight and timing of each task comprising the total 11. The result awarded in a subjecttoa candidate shaH be one of those assessment to be applied in determining the fmal grade. in the list of approved results determined by the Academic Senate 15. (I) The Academic Registrar shall publish a timetable showing "Department" means the department assigned responsibility for a from time to time. when and where formal wrineo examinations will be held and particular subject and includes any other body so responsible; PenaJUes RevJew of result In subject it shall be the responsibility of candidates to attend those "Departmental Examinations Committee" means the 6. An infringement of any of the rules setout in Rule 16(1), other than examinations prescribed for the subjects in which they are Departmental Examinations Committee of the Department pursuant to Rule 16(2), or the instructions referred to in Rule 19 shall 12. (I) A candidate may apply fora review of any result aWlU"ded in a enrolled. subject to that candidate. constituted in accordance with the Rules governing Deparlments; constitute an offence against discipline. (2) Notwithstanding the previsions of Rule 15(1), where the jjexamlnatlon" includes any form of examination, assignment, test PART3-PROCEDURES (2) An application made under sub-rule (1) shall be made to the Academic Registrar considers it justified on religious, Academic Regislrar on the prescribed form and shall be or any other work by which the final grade of acandidate in asubject External Examiners conscientious or other grounds, special arrangements may be is assessed; accompanied by the prescribed fee. made to allow a candidate to attend a prescribed examination 7. (I) The Academic Senate may, on the recommendation of a fOT a subject at a time and place different from that published Uexternal examiner for a candidate" means an examiner, not (3) A review of the result shall include a check: Faculty Board made 00 the recommendation of a Head of in the examination timetable. being a member of the staff of the University, appointed to assist in Department appoint ODe or more external examiners for the (a) thatallrequiredpartsoftheassessmenthavebeenincluded (3) Subject to the provision of Rule l30)Cb), candidates who fail the examination of an extended essay, project or similar work Department. Such appointment shall be for a tenn of one year in the final detennination of the result; to attend an examination which is show on the examination submitted by a candidate; and, ellcept with the approval of the Academic Senate, no (b) that the content of examination scripts has been fairly timetable will be deemed to have sat for and failed the "externaJ examiner for the Department" means an examiner, not external ex.aminer for the Department shall be reappointed for considered, including, where possible, a review ofmarks examination. being a member of the staff of the University, appointed to assist in more than four consecutive tenns of office. awarded by the examiners; and Rules for formal written examinations the examining processes within a Department; (2) Where theappoinlmentof an external examiner for acandidate (c) that all marks contributing to the final grade have been ''Faculty Board"means the Faculty Board of the Faculty responsible is prescribed by the Rules for an award, or where the Faculty correctly weighted and their total accurately obtained 16. (1) Formal written ex.aminationsshall beconducted in accordance Board considers it appropriate that an external examiner for a with the following rules: for the course in which a candidate is enrolled and includes a Board but shall not include any review of earlier assessments which candidate by appointed, such appoinlment shall bemade by the of Studies where given powers relevant to this Rule; have been made available to the candidate on a continuing (a) candidates shall comply with any instructions given by a Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed in the Rules for that "formal written examination" means an eltamination conducted basis throughout the subject. supervisor relating to the conduct of the examination; award. under Part 4 of these Rules; (4) If the Faculty Board,on the recommendation of the Head of the (b) before the examination begins candidates shall not read Examining usubJect" meansany partof acourseof study foran award for which Department concerned or the representative of that Head, the examination paper until granted permission by the a result may be recorded; 8. The Head of each Deparlment shall arrange for the member or changes the result following review, the fee shall be refunded supervisor which shall be given ten minutes before the members of the academic staff responsible for each of the subjects to the candidate. start of the examination; offered by the Department: Special Consideration Cc) no candidate shall enter the examination room afterthirty (a) to prepare the examination papers in the subjects; minutes from the time the examination has begun; • A programmable calculator may be permitted ifprescribed, provided 13. (1) A candidate who claims that: (b) in consultation with any other members of staff involved in the (d) no candidate shall leave the examination room during the that program cards and devices are not taken into the examination room Ca) study during the year or preparation for an ex.amination; and the H end of Department approves. Consideration is currently being tuition or supervision of the candidates, to assess the scripts first thirty minutes or the last ten minutes of the given to the establishment of a listing of calculators approved for use and other work submitted by candidates and, if required, '" examination; where calcwators are specified as a permitted aid. vi vii CHARGES SPECIAL CONSIDERATION REQUESTS

from the date of posting to the Etudent of the notification of the ''Dean''meanstheDean of the Faculty in whiclt astudentis enrolled. (e) no candidate shall re-enter the examination room after University' sExamination Rules specifies procedures relating to Review decisiOll or such further period as the Committee may accept. leavinj it unless during the full pel'iod of absence that of Rerult in a subject, for details see page ('Ii) and the necessary ''Board'' means the Faculty Boa-d of the Faculty in which the (2) lnhe.inganappealtheCommineemaylakeintoconsideratiOIl candidate has been under approved supervision; applicatioo form. You should read the inslrUctions on the application student is enrolled. anycircumstances wb.atsoever, including matlennotprevlou~1y form before applying foraReview. There is achargeper subject, which (0 acandidate shall not bring inlotheexaminationroomany Termination of Enrolment by Head of Departmmt raised andmayseeksucbinfonnationasitthin.k:sfitconcermng is refundable in the event of an error being discovered, However, it bag. paper, book, written material, device or aid the ~ic record of the appe1Iant and the making of the should be noted that examination results are released only after careful 3. (1) A student's enrolmenlin a subject may be terminated by the whlltSOever, other lhan such as may be specified for the detennination by the Board. Neither the Dean nor the sub.. assessment of slUdenls' performances and that, amongst other things, Head of the Department offering that subject if that student particular examination: Dean shall act as a member of the Committee on the hearing of marginal failures are reviewed before results are released.(see page ix) does not. maintain a rate of progreSE considered satisfactory by (g) a candidate shall not by any means obtain or endeavour the Head of the Department. In determining whether a student any such appeal. SPECIAL CONSlDERA TION REQUESTS to obtain improper assistance, give or endeavour to give is failing to maintain satisfactory progress the Head of (3) The appellant and the Dean. or the Dean's nominee shaH have assistance to any other candidate, or commit any breach All applications for special consideration should be made on the Department may take into consideration such f~tor& as the right to be he.d in person by the Committee. of good order; Application for Special Consideration fonn. unsatisfactory attendanceorfailure tocomplete ata satJ~factory (4) The Committee may confinn the decision made by a&.d~ standard academic or professional componenls specIfied for (h) acandidate shall not take from the examination room any The grmting ofSpecial Consideration could involvea further examination may substitute for it any other decision which the Board IS examination answer book, any examination paper so or /ilSsessment held shortly after the formal examination. Any further the subject. empowered to make pursuant to these Rules, marked, graph paper, drawing paper or other material examination or assessment administered will be by the Department that (2) The enrolmentofa student in a subject shall nothe terminated Committee ConslderaUon of Referred Cases issued for use during the eumination; offered the subject Consequently you must therefore check wltb the pursuant to Rule 3(1) of these Rules unless that stu~nt has (i) no candidate may smoke in the examination room. Departmmt that offered the subject to .ascertaJn that Department's been given prior written notice of the intention to con~lder the 7. (1 ) The Committee shall consider any case refmed to it by a Board requirements. Yousbould also watch the"Deparlment'snooceboard for matter with brief particu! ars of the ground s for so domg, and and may: (2) The provision of sub-rule (I) may be relaxed: further advice concerning Special Consideration. has a1~ been given a reasonable opportunity to make (a) make any decision which the Board itself could have (a) by the Academic Registrar; and Application Forms may be obtained from your FaCUlty Omce, Student representations either in person or in writing or both. made pursuant to Rule 4(1 Xa), (b) or (c) Qfthese Rules; (b) with the exception of paragraphs (e), (0, (g) and (h) by Division Enquiry Counter, Student Health Service, Student (3) A student whose enrolment in a subject is tenninated under the supervisor upon the direction of the Academic Counselling Unit and Examinations & Services Counter, Hunter Rule 3(1) of these Rules may appeal to the Board which shall (b) '"excludethestudentfromenrolmentinsuchothersubjects, Registrar or at the discretion oflbe supervisor, provided Building. determine the matter. courses or Faculties as it thinks fit; or that the circumslances of anycase in which discretion has Part 3 of the University's Examination Rules specifies procedures (4) A student whose enrolment in a subject is tenninated under this (c) exclude the student from the University. been exercised shall be reported in writi ng totheAcademic relating toSpecial Consideration Requests, for details see page (vi) and Rule shall be deemed to have failed the subject Registrar immediately following the conclusion of the the necessary application fonn. You should read the inslructions on the (2) The Committee shall not make any decision pursuant to Rule Review of Performance by Board examination. application form before applying for Special Consideration. 7(1)(b) or(c) of these Rules unless ithas first given ~e student 4. (1) A Boord may review the academic performance of a student the opportunity to be heard in person by the Committee. PART 5 a OlHER EXAMINA nONS STATEMENTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD who does nolmainlain a ra1e ofprogress considered satisfactory Responsibility (3) A student may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any If you wish to he issued with a statement of your academic record, you by the BoW'"d and may determine: decision made by the Committee under this Rule. 17. The Head of Department shall be responsible for the administration must complete the appropriate application form and lodge it with the (a) that the student be pennitted to continue the course; and supervision of the eXhinations of the University, other than University Cashier along with the appropriate fee (see page x). The Actlon by VlceaCbanceilor and Council fonnal written examinations, in the subjects offered by the statement will be mailed out as soon as it becomes available, to the (b) that the student be permitted to continue the course 8. Where there is an appeal against any decision of the Conunittee Departmenl nominated address. Applicanls should allow adequate time for this to subject to such conditions as the Board may decide; made under Rule 7 of these Rules, the Vice-Chancellor may refer the Timetable occur. Computer produced statements can normally be mailed within a (c) that the student be excluded from further enrolment: m.ner back to the Committee with a recommendation or shall week, St.ltements involving pre 1979 records might be expected to take arrange for the appal to be heard by the Council. Th~ Counc~ may (i) in the course; or 18. (1) Where appropriate, the Head of Deparbnent shall publish a longer to produce. Indebted applicants must dear their debt before confum the decision of the Committee or may substitute for It any timetable showing when and where examinations will be held statements can be Issued. Application fonns may be obtained from the (ii) in the course and any other course offered in the other decision which the Committee is empowered to make pursuant and it shaJ I be the res(X>nsibility of candidates to aUend those Student Division Enquiry Counter, Chancellery Building and the Faculty; or to these Rules. examinations prescribed for the subjects in which they are Examination and Services Counter, Hunter Building. (iii) in the Faculty; or enrolled. Reaenrolment UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS (d) if the Board considers its powers todeal with the case are (2) NotwithstandingtheprovisionsofRule 18(1), where the Head 9. (I) A student who has been excluded from further enrohnent in a The University has adopted Rules Governing Unsatisfactory Progress inadequate, that the case be referred to the <:>mmittee Faculty may enrol in acourse in another Faculty only with the of Department considers it justified on religious, conscientious which are set out below. together with a recommendation for such actJon as the pennissionoftheBoard ofthal Faculty and on such conditions or other arounds, special arrangements may be made to allow Board considers appropriate. a c;mdidate to attend a prescribed examination for a subject at Students who become liable for action under the Rules will he infonned as it may detennine. atimeand pJacedifferentfrom that published in the examination accordingly by mail after the release of the End of Ye .. examination (2) Before adecision is made und er Rule 4( 1 )(b), (c) or (d) ofthese (2) A student who has heM excluded from further enrohnent in time~ble. results and will be informed of the procedure to be followed if they wish Rules, the student shall be given an opportunity to m~e any course, Faculty of front the University Dt,Ider the~ Rules to 'show cause'. representations with respect to the matter either in person or ID Compliance with Instructlons may apply for pennission to enrollherein agam, provIded that Appeals Biainst exclusion must he lodged together with Enrohnent writing or both, in no case shall such re-enrolment commence before the 19. Candidates shaJl comply with any instructions given by the Head of Application forms by Wednesday 6 January 1993. A student who has made representations to a Board may appeal expiration of the period of exclusion. A decision on such Department or the supervisor relating to an examination. (3) against any decision made under Rule 4(1)(b) or (c) of these application shall be made: The Faculty'S progress requirements are set out elsewhere in this Any infri niement of these rules constitutes an offence against discipline. Rules to the Committee which shall determine the maUer. volume. (a) by the Bo.d, where the student has been excluded from FINAL EXAMINATION RESliLTS a single course or a single Faculty; or RULES GOVERNING UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS Reference to Committee End of year examination results will be mailed out by late December. 5. Where the proaress of a student who is enrolled in a course (b) by the Committee, in any other case, Applk.Uon of Rules combi~ed Examination resulu for Semester I subjects will be mailed out the week: or who has previously been excluded from enrolme~t m another Appeal Alalnst ReJ«tlon ofRe--enrolment Appllcatlon precedini the commencement of SemeEter 2. 1. These Rules shall apply 10all students of the University except those course or Faculty is considered by the Bowd to be unsatISfactory, the 10. (I) A student whose application to enrol pursuant to Rule 9(1) or who we candidates for a degree of Master or Doctor. BOIlfd shall refer the matter to the Committee. toaether a Final examiantion results are also displayed in the Hunter Building wi~ 9(2Xa) of these Rules is rejected by a Board may appeal tothe recommendation for such action as the Board conSiders appropnate. Concourse as soon as they become available. Interpretation Committee. No results will be given by telephone. 2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise Hearing of Appeals by Committee (2) A studtmt whose application to enrol pursuant to Rule9(2)(b) indicates or requires: REVIEW OF FINAL RESULT 6. (I) An appeal made by astudenttotheCommiuee pursuantto~ule of these Rules is rejected by the Committee may appeal to the "the Committee" means theAdmi ssions and Progression Committee 4(3) of these Rules shall be in such fonn as may be preSCrIbed Vice-Chancellor. After the release of both Semester I and end of year final examination of the Academic Senate as constituted from time to time. by the Committee, and shall be made within fourteen (14) days resulls a student may apply to have a result reviewed. Part 3 of the viii BANKING SCHOLARSHIP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED Sl1JDENTS traffic regulations in regard to bus stops, distance from pedestriSl CHARGES afee-paying student in a "fees-approved postgraduate award course" LOANS crossings, roundabouts etc). y The General ServlcesCbarge ( details below) is payable by all students. a student in a ''basic nurse education course" Students who do not have sufficient funds ~ r:a the ?eneral ~erv~ The University is working with public transport au.thorilleS to im~ve Charge should seek a loan from their bank, buddmg society, cred It UDlan In 1993, a fees and charges notice will be sent to continuing students in a "full-fee·paying overseas student" the level of IJ8Dsport to the University ~ as to ~1~l8te ~ necessity for or other financial institution. staff and ItUdmls to use priva&e vehicles. It IS m the mterests of all late January and to commencing students in mid February. a "student who has paid the Overseas Student Charge" An application for a loan from the student loan fimds is possible when members of the University community, and to the d~elopment and Students are expected to pay charges al any Commonwealth Bank. The a "fully sponsored overseas student" no other help is available. Appoinbnents for loan from these funds must mailltenaDCe of the campus busb.1and setting, to dramatically redu:e ~ g last date for payment of charges with the Commonwealth Bank is 19 be made before the 26 February, 1993 to avoid a,ddition of a late fee. numbers ofvehicles being brou.ghton to the ClWPUS, as .wen as asSlSr:m a student in an "enabling course" th~ March 1993. Student loan funds are available for other essenbal needs. ConlSCt the with the broader issues of air pollution, traffic congesbon and the like. a studmt in a "non-award" course All other payments should be made directly tothe University by cheque, Student Support Omcer, Ms Annette Rudd, pbone (049) 216467 to Students .e urged to coosider alternative modes of transport. such as or in person to the Cashier, level 2, Chancellery. a student who has been awarded "a HECS postgraduate scbolarsh ip" arrange an appointmenL blic ...... , and greater use ofbicycles to takeadvmtage of the new po "--r-'. .L._ U· .'Y Car nnnlino arrmgements are also 1. General ServJces Charge Per Annum Basic Nurse education courses will not be exempt from HECS after REFUND OF CHARGES cycleways servtng ""'" mversl. r-- "0 • encouraged and your Student Representative Council (SRC) can asSist (a) Students Proceeding to a Degree or Diploma $264 1993. Currently enrolled students continuing their studies in such a Arefund of the General Services Charge paid on enrolment wi'.l bemade course will also be liable for HECS in 1994 and in subsequent years. when the student notifies theStudentDivision of a complete withdrawal you in this regard. Plus Students joining Newcastle University The traffIC md parking regulations are stated in full in ~ Universi~'s Union for the first time HECS is administered as part of the enrolment process. Students from studies under the following conditions: $35 Calender Volume I. The scale of penalties for rraf(IC and parking commencing a new course must select one of three sections on the HECS (i) when a student notifies the University of a complete withdrawal (b) Non-Degree Students infringements as contained in the rules are as follows: Payment Options form. from studies by the following dates, a refund will Newcastle University Union Charge $137 apply: (a) exceeding the spwilimiton University roads ...... $30 On enrolment students must do one of the following: Notification on or before 31 March 100% refund (c) EXlerM/ Siudents $37 (b) failing to stop when signalled to do so by an (a) Elect to pay up-front which would require payment of 75% of the Notification by the end of first semester 50% refund The exact amount must be paid in full by the prescribed date. contribution for the semester, with the balance to be paid by the Attendant (patrol) ...... $30 Notification after the end of first semester Nil refund 2. Late Charges Commonwealth. Students electing to pay up-front will be asked to (c) refusal to provide informalion requested by an pay at the CQlnmencement of each semester. (H) when a student solely enrolled in a program of offered QD!l Where the Fees and Charges NOlice is lodged studi~ Attendant (patrol) ...... " ...... " ...... " ...... $30 in Semester2 notifies the University of a complete Withdrawal from with all charges payable after the 26 February 1993 $50 (b) Defer their HEC and elect to pay through the taxation system, in studies by the following dates, a refund will apply: (d) failing to obey instructions given by an 3 3. Other Charges which case they must either provide a tax file number or apply for a Attendant (patrol) ...... $ 0 tax file number as part of their enrolment. Institutions are required Notification on or before 31 August 100% refund (a) Examination under special supervision $15 to ensure that the information given by students of their tax file Nil refund (e) illegal parking: Notification after 31 August per paper number application is the same as that on their enrolment form. (D parking on University roadways ...... $15 provided that in exceptional c~c~~stances the Bursar may vary (b) Review of examination results, per subject $25 (ii) parking on footpaths ...... · .. · ...... · .... · ..·· .. $15 Students electing to defer their HEC and pay through the taxation these provisions in the case of indiVidual students. (c) Replacement ofRe-enrolment kit $10 system are notrequired tomake a payment towards their contribution (iii) parking on areas marked by sign ...... $50 until their taxable income reaches a minimum threshold level. Por The $35 joining fee is not refundable. (d) Replacement of Student Card $5 (iv) parking in a way that may risk injury to others ...... $50 the 1991-92 financial year the minimum threshold was $27,098. A refund cheque will be mailed toa student or if applicable, a sponsor. (e) Statement of Matriculation Status This amount will be increased each year. Any change of address must be notified. (v) not displaying parking penn it ...... $30 for non-member of the University $10 (c) As front 1993 NewZeaJandcitizens residing inAustrai iafor less than A refund will not be made before 31 March. (vi) parking In a restncted area ...... " ...... $15 two years and permanent residents of Australia whose term address (f) Replacement of lost or damaged Testamur $30 CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING (0 parking in an area reserved for handiCapped person . ""'.' ...... $.50 is overseas will berequired to pay their HECS contribution up-front. (g) Academic Transcripts The 25% discount applies. Matters to do with traffic and pW'king on the campus are gove~ed ~y (g) any other breach of the traffic and parking rules ...... " ...... $1 0 traffic and parking rules approved under the authority of the Umverslty (i) First copy $10 New Zealand citizens living outside Australia and enrolled in The penalty will be imposed: (ii) Second Copy No charge external courses at Australian institutions should be treated in the Council. (a) on the spot by an infringement notice being put on the vehicle; or same way as permanent residents of Australia whose semester These rules determine that it is a privilege to bring a vehicle onto ~e (iii) Each additional copy $1 (b) by sending an infringement notice by ordinary prepaid post. to the Un iversity csmpus and th at this priv ilege i s subject to traffic an~ ~lDg address is overseas and be required to pay up-fronl registered person respcnsible for the vehicle, or to the regIStered Note: rules. The rules identify the conditions which govern the ~lDgmg of The requirement to pay up-front will apply to both commencing vehicles onto the campus, parting and movement of v~tllcl~, and owner of the vehicle. (i) Graduands will be providcd with two copies of their transcript and continuing students. free upon notification of e1igibility to graduate. matters to do with breaches and enforcemenL The underlytng rab~nale Any objection to the imposition of ~e ~Ity must include full (d) Provide evidence of exemption from the HECS. of these rules is to ensure the safe and orderly movement and ~~kmg of details of the grounds on which the obJecuon IS based and be lodged (ii) Transcripts will be issued on request free of charge to other vehicles on the campus for the benefit of students, staff and VISitorS and in writing with the Director PropertyService.s within 14 d~ys oflbe tertiary education institutions .. All students enrolling in a new course must complete a Payment Options fonn selecting one of the above three options. Deferred or to protect the University's physical environment and landscape. date the infringement notice shows the breach as havmg been 4. Indebted Students Up-front re-enrolling students will retain their elected payment Essentially the rules require that persons who seek to bring a m~tor committed. All debts outstanding to the University must be paid before enrolment option (excluding sbJdents falling into category (c) above). A new vehicle, including motorbikes, onto the campus apply for. a vehicle The Director Property Services, after considering an objection,shall can be completed- part payment of total amount due will not be Payment Options form must be completed if sbJdents transfer parking permit. In so doing, the applicant undertakes to abide by. the either reject it or waive the penalty. accepted. courses or wish to change their payment options. Students who wish traffic and parking rules and are automatically.subject to pre~bed Penalties must be paid: to change their Payment Option in any semester must do so before penalties for infringements. It is importMt the granttng of IDGHER EDUCA nON CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HE.C.s.) toreali~ ~at the census date forth81 semester. Changes to the Up-front option will a parking permit does not carry with it an autotnatlC fight to ~k on the (a) within 28 days of the date the infringement notice shows the breach The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) requires students not be permitted after the due date for payment of Up-front accounts campus. The University hasa seri~s under supplyof carpatkmg spaces as having been committed: or to contribute towards the cost of their higher eduction. Each semester a (check with HECS Office for cut-off dates). and frequently it will not be posSIble to park on the campus. (b) where applicable, within 28 days ofnotification,utat any objection student's HECS liability is calculated according to his or her Student FAILURE TO PAY UP-FRONT ACCOUNTS BY THE DUE DATE The issue of a parking permit only entitles a member of the University has been rejected by the Director Property Services. Load. The liability for an 80 credit point full-time load in 1993 is OR CHANGE TO THE DEFERRED OPTION BEFORE THE $2328.00. Student Loads are calculated as at the census date each to park in a properly designated and m.ar"ed ~t car park ~pace to the Any queries in relation to traffic and parking matlers may be referred to CENSUSDATEWlLLLEADTOAUTOMATICCANCELLATION extent that such a space is available. It IS essenllal that vehl~les W'e nOi. semester i.e. 31st March in Semester One and 31st Augustin Semester the Security patrol Office, located in the foyer of the Great Hall an~ ~mt OF ENROLMENT. parked on grassed W'eas, footpaths, roadways and the like for the Two. Withdrawn subjects effective on or after the census dateand failed the Property Services Office, located in the foyeroftheHunter BUI~dmg. protection of the University'S landscape and for the safety of students, subjects incur HEes liability. LATE PAYMENTS WILL NOT BE PERMItTED. Applicalion forms to bring a vehicle onto the campus are also available staff and visitors. from these offices. Some courses are exempt from HECS charges and some students are Please contact the HECS Office if further infonnation on HECS is Alternative parking to be utilised when on car parks.are full. is exempt. Exemption from payment ofthe Higher Education Contribution required. cam~us available on both sides of University Drive (subJCct tocompltance With (HEC) applies to: xi UNIVERSITY LmRAR1ES LOST PROPERTY

Condltloos orUse The traffic and partinS rules apply to all University campus locatio-ns. Newcastle Act, is one ofthe constituent parts of the Un iversity. By virtue Student plan can cover: The University accepts no responsibility for any damage to or loss of It ~ould be noted, however, that no University parking facilities are of the Act and the University By-Laws, Convocation has a voice in the i) Students who are members of the Sports Union (this does not data arising directly or indirectly from use of these facilities or for any available at the Conservatorium of Music campus in Auckl8lld Street. government of the University through its right to elect members of include students who have deferred study). Membership of the cotlStIqUeatiaJ loss or damage. The Univel'sity makes no warranty, Newcastle. Council and the Standing Committee's right to direct COOlmunication Spons Union is included in the General Service (barge; express (]I' implied regarding the computing services offered, or their BANKING with the Council and the Senate. Through its membership of the i i) Active life and active associate members ofthe Insured organisation; Australi. University Graduate Conference, Convocation also co­ fitness for.y particular purpolle. I) Commonwealth Bank operates with its counterpart& in other universities to give effective iii) Staff of the Sports Union and staff of the University who join the The University cannot guarantee the cooftdentiaJity of any information The University of Newcastle branch of the CommonweaUh Bank is eqll'e8sion of opinion on matters of concern to graduates. Sports Union. stored en any University computer or transmitted through its network. located on the pathway between the Chancellery and the Hunter The Coovocation Officer may be contacted on (049) 216464. For further information and claim forms, please contact the Sports and For the purpose of managing the resources, it may be necessary for the Gymnasium (south oflhe Hunter Union. An aulOmatic teller machine is Recreation office dwing business hours on (049) 215584. University to monitor ftles and usage. CO·OP BOOKSHOP located outside. Hours ofOpenjng: UNIVERSITY COMPUTING SERVICES The University's liability in the event of any loss or d.:nage shall be Monday to Friday 9.30am - 4.00pm The Co-op Bookshop is located within the Shortland Student Union. It limited to the fees and charges paid to the University for the use of the The University of Newcastle has made use of computers in research and Friday 9.30am - 5.00pm stocks textbooks, general publications, computer discs and Olher software computing facilities which resulted in the loss or damage. audio-visual cassettes. Discounts are available to Co-op members. ' teaching and for administrative purposes since the first computer was You may use only those facilities which have been authorised for yoot' JI) Credit Union installed in October 1963. Hours of Opening use. If access is protected by a password, you are not to make this The main branch afthe Universities Credit Union is located with Computers are widely used in teaching wherever this is appropriate. Monday, Wednesday and Friday 9.00... - 5.00pm password available to Olhers. You may not use any account set up for the Student Union on the fonner University side of the campus, Some of these are managed by the teacbing departments while others are another user, nor may you altetnpt to find out the password of .other Tuesday and Thursday 9.00"" - 6.00pm Hours of Opening maintained and supported by University Computing Services in puhlicly user. This applies both to facUities within the University and to any First two weeks of semester 8.30... - 7.00pm available locations. Monday to Friday 9.00am -4.00pm accessible using the University'S network. LOST PROPERTY The central computers and many others are connected to the University You may only use authorised facilities for authorised purposes. For An agency is located in the Hunter Union Building. Information Network (UIN) which in tum is connected totheAustralian Lost property may be collected from, or deposited at two locations on example, facilities made available for teaching may not be used for Academic and Research Network (AARNet) and to the worldwide CASHIER campus: private gain. The cashiers' office on-campus in located on First Floor Chancellery Internet. (a) Patrol Office, Great Hall between 9.00am - 4.00pm You must be aware of the law of copyright as it affects computer Building_ Credit card facoilities are Dot available. I UniversityComputingServicesprovidesandsupportscomputingservices softw.-e. Softwaremust not becopied except with the eqwess permission (b) Propeny Services, ClIO, between 9.00am - 4.00pm for most activities of the university: for academic departments, through HolUs of Opening of the copyright owner. (Hunter Building) the HelpDesk and Computer Laboratories Manager, for administrative (a) During Semester 1D.00am - 4.00pm You may not attempt to copy infonnation belonging to other users (Open during lunch break) It is suggested that you telephone in advance. divisions and for service units. Services are provided through central computers, through a campus network with extemallinks, and through (whether they be staff, students or other users) without their express (b) Vacation Period 1O.00am - 12.3Opm assistance to users ofboth the central computers and distributed desk-top pennission. 2.00pm - '.00pm NOTICEBOARDS computers. You may not attempt to interfere with the operation of the Universitys' CHAPLAINCY SERVICE Students wishing to post notices within the glass-fronted locked There are more than 800 terminal connections directly to the campus computers or any other facilities accessed by use of the Universitys' The Chaplaincy Centres are located in the temporary buildings adjacent noticeboards should contact Mr D. Heggan, Property Services in the network, allowing connection to various computers, both in University computers or network. totheCornputerTeaching Building and alsoin Room A187 in theHunter Hunter Building. Computing Services and in Universitydepartments. A number ofSchool You may not attempt to subvert the secwityofany of the Universitys' Building near the Huxley Library. POST OFFICE and Departmental computers and networks are also connected to the computing facilities or any others accessible by use of the Universitys' Pastoral and spiritual care is available from the following denominational Offers all normal postal services EXCEPT interviews for passpons. lJIN. facilities. chaplains:- Students are given access to central V AXNMS and UNlX computers You maynOl. use the Universitys' computing facilities to send obscene, HOUTS Ope1lillg of and centrally located microcomputers (Apple Macintosh and IBM PCs Anglican Catholic offensive, bogus, barassing or illegal messages. (a) During Semester Monday to Friday 9.00 ... - 5.00pm or 'clones') and to departmental and special CQlnputers as purpose You may grant access to your own files by other users by setting Baptist Presbyterian appropriate to their course of study. Many packages are available such (b) Vacation Period Monday to Friday 9.ooam -1 2.3c.pm appropriate protection. Uniting Church Assembly of God I.3Opm - 5.00pm as the NAG numerical libr8J}', statistical programs such as Minitab, SAS, SPSS-X and BMDP and word-processing. All students are free to You may access computing and communications facilities on other siles Russian Orthodolt Seventh Day Adventist PUBLIC TRANSPORT use the electronic News and Mail services for on-campus use. AARNet only with their pennission and in a manner consistent with these terms. Both centres are open Monday to Friday 8.30 am - 5.00 pm. The State TransitAuthorityprovides acomprehensive bus service to the access is only available to course work students when specifically You must, on request by an authorised member of staff, produce The Central Coast Campus and the Conservatorium of Music are both University front the following locations: requested by course lecturers. evidence ofidentity (for ell:ample by student card) when using University covered on a regular basis. Newcastle (Parnell Place), Newcasl1eRegional Museum, The]unction, Students enrolling in a subject for which acomputer connect-time quota computing facilities. COMMUNITY PROGRAMMES Tighes Hill, Broadmeadow, Adamstown, Larnbton Park, Mayfield, has been established are automatically given accounts on the cenlral You are required to infonn the University of any breach of these Tenns Waratah, ]esmond, Wallsend, Rankin Park, Cardiff, Charlestown, computers. Research students (Research Masters and PhD) are not (for example, if you become aware that someone else bas used your The Department of Community Programmes offcrs 8 wide range of Belmont. limited on connect-timeand are allocated disk quotas appropriate to their courses for .the. general public. Of parti cular interest to in lending students account). wOO<. are the ~ndgJng Courses conducted during February and the Open Bus Timetables are available from the Student enquiry counter in the You must abide by any relevant instructions given by the Director or the FoundatIOn Course for mature age entry PUflXlses which commences in ground floor of the Chancellery Building. The computers nonnaIly operate continuously, with terminal rooms Director's delegated officer. Such instructions may be issued by notice open from 08:00 to 21:00 on weekdays (and in the Computing and March. STUDENT INSURANCE COVER displayed in the vicinity of computing facilities, by letter, by electronic Information Sciences Building from 09:00 to 17:00 at weekends for communicalion, in pezSOl1 or otherwise. St~dents interested in Bridging or preparatory courses should telephone, Studentplan Insurance is an w:.cidentpolicy which is administered by the most of the academic year). wnte oreall at the Department's office in RoomLG49, Lower Ground Sports Union/Sport and Recreation Office on behalf of American UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES Floor, McMul.lin Building. The Department is also able to respond to University Computing Services aim to provide a high quality modem Insurance Underwriters (A.J.U.). This policy provides benefits for computing environment for students. Use of this together with their As a member of the University of Newcastle, you are entitled to use the requ~ts to tailor: make Co~s, Workshops, Seminars and Training death, disabilit~, hospitalization, loss of wages and medical expenses Auchmuty, Huxley, Conservatorium and Central Coast Libraries as well Sessions for particular clients in virtually any subject area. Telephone. experience in using School and Departmental computers, will ensure (these are reslncted to injuries sustained whilst engaged in campus graduates have acquired broad and valuable computing experience. as the libraries of the teaching hospitals. (049) 216017. activities). The injury must be the result of a 'fortuitous act' (i.e. due to Aucbmuty Library CONVOCATION chance). It does not cover disability arising from sickness or disease. Students are encouraged to seek guidance in computer use fr

and Commerce, Education, Engineering, Medicine, Science and Hospital Branch. The specific opening hours for these libraries will be 8.30am to 7.00pm !.00pm Ie 5.00pm Mathematics and Social Sciences. It holds an extensive range of published through NEWCAT and the appropriate library guides. Long Vacation: government publications, microforms, audiovisual media, archival FW1ber information can be obtained by ringing 21 3779. materials and a Rare Book Collection. Specialist services are provided Monday to Friday Borrowing/Identification Cards in Biomedicine, Law, and audiovisual media. 8.30am to 5.00pm Students need an ideotificatioo c.d to borrow. Please remember to Otberservicesinclude:Loans,ShortLoans,CD-ROMs,OnlineSearching, Library Closed: Reference Service, Inter Library Services, Archives. caTy your c.d with you at all times if you wish to borrow CI' use li brary facilities. If books are borrowed 00 your card by anyone else, you are Australia Day, Easter except Easter Monday, CbDstmas to New Year The Sbort Col lectJon contains materials in high demand: srudents Loan responsible for them. Report any lost card to the Loans Desk staff may borrow these for restricted periods. Library Open: immediatelytopreveot unautboriseduse. Replacementcards are available Easter Monday. Anzac Day, Queen' s Birthday, Show Day. Labour Day The Biomedical Reading Room houses books, serials, pamphlets and for $5.00 &om the Student Division Office in the Chancellery. reference mater"ial in Biological Sciences and Medicine; i.e. within the Borrowlq Rtgbts HUXLEY LIBRARY classification ranges 016.57-016.619 and 570-619. It also includes a Term Hours: special area, Ie Medical Reserve, which holds a variety of resources and For the details of loan conditions students should refer to the Library equipment supporting the Faculty of Medicine's innovative and highly Guide and the various handouts published at the beginning ofeach year. Monday to Thursday Friday Saturday & Sunday resource-dependent curriculum. Books must be returned to the Library from which they were borrowed. 8.30am to 9.00pm 8.30am to 5.00pm 1.00prn to 5.00pm Collections of resources are also maintained in seven country centre A fineofS2.00per item is levied when material istwodays overdue. The Semester Breaks: hospitals for the use of students in clinical learning stages: Taree, fine will increase by 50 cents per day per item until the material is Wednesday Other Days Weekends Tamworth, Gosford. Maitland, Orange, Usmore and Dubbo. There is a returned. Borrowingrighls are also withdrawn. Iflibrary material is lost formal agreement between the University and theArea Health Board on OI"damaged, thereplacernentcost, plus aprocessing fee, will becharged. 9.00am to 7.00pm 9.00am to 5.00pm Closed the operation of the Gardiner Library Service under which registered Access to Information Long Vacation: usersofthcAuchmutyandGardinerLibrariesenjoycompletereciprocity. Library facilities include the computerised catalogue NEWCA T, which Monday to Friday The Law Reading Room houses books, serials. and primary law provides direct access to infonnation about materials held in the 9.00am to 5,00pm materials including law reports, acts, bills and regulations. Auchmuty, Huxley, Conservatorium. Central Coast and Area Health The Audiovisual section includes computer-based multimedia. Libraries. The Aucmnuty and Huxley Libraries also hold databases on Library Closed: CD-ROM to enable students and staff to {rod journal articles in their A1I public holidays Furthec information and assistance can be obtained at the Auchmuty subject areas. The print versions of other indexes are available in the Library Reference Desk, 'phone 215851, Conservatorlum Library Reference Collection for manual searching. Some are on computerised Huxley Ubrary databases available via telecommunication networks. AARNet, the Please contact the Library on 294133 Located in the Hunter Building, this Library supports the teaching and Australian Academic Network, provides access to others. Central Coast Campus Ubrary research requirements of lhe Faculties of Health Sciences, Nursing, Photocopying Please contact the Library on (043) 622077. Education and Art, Design and Communication. The Library has an Photocopying facilities are available in aU University Libraries. The extensive collection of audiovisual media and curriculum material and machines ..e operated by magnetic-strip_cards which can be purchased receives all publications from the NSW DepanmentofSchool Education. in the Library. Credit for lhe photocopiers can be added to these cards Other services include: Loans, Reference Service, CD-ROMs, Online from a dispenser as many times as needed. Users must observe the searching, Inter-Library Services, Eltterna! SrudiesService, ShortLoans. relevant Copyright Act provisions which are on display near the Borrowers may have access to the Short Loan Collection for restricted photocopiers. periods. InterLibrary Services Furtherinformation and assistance can beobtained attheHuxley Library This service is available to academic staff, higher degree and hooours/ Reference Desk, 'phone 216453. final year students. Material not held in the University of Newcastle Newcastle Conservatorlum of Music Ubrary Libraries may be obtained from other libraries within Australia or The Library contains a collection of books, serials, scores, CDs, and overseas. Books and serials readily available within Australia should arrive within two weeks. A Fast Track Service is available, at exira cost, sound recordings, It is located at the Newcastle Conservatorium of Music, on the comer of Gibson and Auckland Streets, in the city. for urgent requests. Cturently only students and staff of the Conservatorium of Music can Disabled Persons borrow from its Library. This includes Music Education students enrolled All libraries provideaccess fOl"disabi ed srudents and staff. 80thAuchmuty on the Callaghan campus. and Huxley Libraries provide special services fOl" physically disabled Further information can be obtained by contacting the Librarian on and visually impaired library users. Contact librarians in each Library 294133. will help with infonnation about the library, parking, lift keys and other facilities such as the Braille Library, a Kurzweil machine which reads Central Coast Campus Ubrary aloud from English printed text and access tolarge-print NEWCAT, the The Library has a small but growing collection of books, serials and University Libraries' online catalogue. Please phone 215851. audiovisualmediawhichsupporlste&ehingprogrammesinArts,Business, Hours of Opening Social Sciences and Education. AUCHMU1Y LmRARY Further infonnation can be obtained by ringing (043) 622077. Term Hours: GardIner Ubrary Service Monday to Thursday Friday Sarurday & Sunday There are lhree separate libraries within the service: the John Hunter Hospital Branch, the Royal Newcastle Hospital Branch and tho.'! Mater 8.30arn to 10.00pm 8.30arn to 7.00pm 1.00prn to 5.00pm Semester Breaks: Monday to Friday Sarurday & Sunday

xiv SECfION FIVE CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRWflONS

CHEM323 BIOINORGANIC CHEM333 ORGANIC REACTION MECHANISM 5cp COORDINATION CHEMISTRY Scp Not available in 1993. Prerequisite CHEM221. Hours 2 Hours oflectures, 1 hour of tutorials/Workshops and 3 CHEM334 IDENTIFICATION OF Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a NATURAL COMPOUNDS Scp semester. Prerequisite CHEM231. Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/asSignment work Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in Ute Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the semester. subject. Exiuninalion One 1 hour paper. 1belaboratory/assignment work ConlenJ will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the Synthesis of complexes of multidentale and macrocyclic ligands; laboratory/assessment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the metal-directed reactions and stereoselectivity; metalloproteins subject. and meta11oenzymes; bioelectrochemistry and redox proteins. ConJenl Text The course explores several case studies from the chemical. No formal text; material to be advised. literature in which the isolation, purification and identification of bacterial, fungal, plant or marine secondary metabolites are CHEM331 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY lOcp reported. Topics such as chromato- graphic methods, spectroscopy, simple procedures and biosynthesis will be Prerequisile CHEM231. discussed in the context of the identification of small organic HOUTS 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 compounds such as terpenes, steroids and oligopeptides. Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. TeXl Examination One hour paper. The laboratory work will count 2 No formal text; material to be advised. for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. CHEM33S ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPY Scp Content Prerequisite CHEM231 The central theme of this course will be organic synthesis. A Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials and 3 Hours of survey of important synthetic reactions for functional group workshops/laboratory each week for half a semester. transformations and carbon-carbon bond formation with em phasis on the chemo- and stereo- selectivity and mechanisms of these Examinalion One I hour paper. The laboratory/workshop work reactions, Systematic approach to synthesis - the discotu1ection/ will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the synthon method. Examples of syntheses and discussion of some laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the SUbject. literature classics. Contenl Text The course will cover appli calions of ultraviolet/visible, infrared, As for CHEM231. IH and IlC nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectrometry in the structural elucidation of organic compounds. CHEM332 HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY Scp Text Prerequisite CHEM231. Williams, D.H. and Fleming,!. 1988,Spectroscopic Methods in. Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, McGraw-Hill. Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester. CHEM341 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/assignment work Prerequisiles CHEM241, MATHI02 (or MATHI12) will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the II ours 2 Hours of lectures, I hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester. subject. Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count Content for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work The synthesis, reactions and spectroscopic properties of five and is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. six membered heterocycles containing one or two N, 0 and S Content atoms and their benzo-analogs. Electrodics - the metal solution interface and structure of the Text double layer, rates of charge transfer reactions; determination of Davies, D.T. 1992, Aromatic Heterocyclic Chemistry, Oxford charge transferreaclion mechani sms; electrochemical teclmiques; University Press. introduction to corrosion. t: 75 \l SECfION FIVE CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Molecu~ar and Electronic Structure - the use of quantum Exami'~lio? One 2hourpaper. Thelaboralory/library/workshop/ mechanics and molecular group theory in chemistry; malter Environmental Science Subject Descriptions Content S1~ VISitS ~ count for 20% of the final assessment buta passin waves; free electron and particle in a box; atomic and molecular TItis course examines many of the major environmental issues thIS work IS a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. seEN subjects are available only to candidates enrolled in the Schr~ger equation and solutions thereof; symmetry elements associated with water resources development in Australia ContenJ Bachelor of Environmental Science degree. and ~Oln.t groups of molecules; symmetry adapted linear Following an introduction to hydrology and water qUality in the combmation of atomic orbitals; HUckel molecular orbital theory. Prin~ples laid down in CHEM261 will be expanded into a more SCENIOI ENVIRONMENTAL catchment ecosystem, issues covered include reservoir Text detailed treatment of the chemistry of the hydrosphere, the INVESTIGATIONS I IOcp management, eutrophication, dredging, channelization, wetland No fannal text; material to be advised. ~m~sptte:e •.and the geosphere. Specific topics include gas. and floodplain management, irrigation/salinisation and wastewater liqwd-solid mteractions in water chemistry; waler treatment Hours 3 hours per week for two semesters. disposal. Catchment management is introduced as the basis for CHEM342 ELECTROCHEMICAL SOLAR meth~; environmental chemis':r'Y of the geosphere; particulate Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the water resources planning and management. matter m the almos~here; orgaruc pollutants in the atmosphere end of semester 2- ENERGY CONVERSION Scp Text To be advised. and geosphere; envrronmental toxicology; the nature, sources, Content Prerequisites CHEM241, MATHI02 (or MATHI12) and chemistry of hazardous wastes. A case study approach. utilizing the basic sciences to solve SCEN301 ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT IOcp Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Text introductory environmental problems associated with human Prerequisite SCEN20t. Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester. Manahan, S.E. 1990, Environmental Chemistry, 4th edn, Lewis. activity. Content Text Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work An investigation and report of an environmental problem of will count for. 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the Kupchella.. C.E. and Hyland, M.C. 1989,EnvironmenJai Science interest to the student utilizing scientific methodology. la~ra1ory/asslgnment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the AUyn and Bacon, Sydney. subject. SCEN302 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT Content SCEN201 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES IOcp INVESTIGA TlONS II IOcp Prerequisite SCEN202. Electroni~ ~cture of solids; semioonductor/solution interfaces; Prerequisite SCENIOI. ~hotoexCUaIJon and charge transfer at semioonductor solution Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. mterfaces;electrochemicalphotogalvanicceUsandelectrochemical Hours 3 hours per week for two semesters. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hour paper al the photovoltaic cells. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour eXamination end of the semester. Text at the end of semester 2. Content No formal text; material to be advised, ConJent This course will examine the rationale and methodology of A field based study, utilizing analytical techniques from a range environmental impact assessment (EIA) and wi11look at anumber CHEM343 MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY Scp of scientific disciplines to investigate and provide solutions to of impact assessmem techniques in practice. The phenomenon of Prerequisite CHEM241. environmental problems associated with human activity. EIA will bediscussedand current developments inenvironmental management will be examined. Reference will also be made to Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Text To be advised. environmental documentation prepared for various developments. Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester. SCEN202 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING Texts AND POLLUTION CONTROL IOcp ~ination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/assignment work Wathem. P.(ed) 1988,Environmentallmpact Assessment, Unwin will count for. 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, field work. Hyman. Ja~ory/asslgnment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the Beder, S. (ed) 1990. Environmental Impact StatemenlS, Selected subject. end of the semester. Readings. Environmental Education Project. University of Content Contem Sydney. At~m~c and Laser Spectroscopy - spontaneous emission of This course examines the environmental planning and Other subjects undertaken in this degree are outlined in the radlauon; measurement of radiative lifetimes of atoms and development control system in N.S. W. Reference is also made to Approved Subjects - Schedule - Bachelor of Environmental molecules; population inversion mechanism in gas lasers. current pollution control legislation. The emphasis in this course Science Photoelectron Spectroscopy - resonant multi photon ionisation is to understand the system which controls development and the photoelectron spectroscopy; He! and Hell photoelectron various requirements forenvironmentai assessment for different spectroscopy of diatomic molecules. types of development. A number of local and regional case Text studies will be examined to illustrate the various legislative requirements. No formal text; material to be advised. Text

CHEM361 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY lOcp Farrier, 0.1988, Environmental Law Handbook: Planning and Prerequisite CHEM261. Landuse inN.S.W. Redfern LegaJ Centre, Redfern.

Hours 2 Hours of lectures. I hour of tutorials, and 3 Hours of SCEN203 WATER RESOURCES laboratorynibrary/workshop/site visits each week for one MANAGEMENT lOcp semester. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 3 days field work. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the 76 end of the semester. 77 SEcrION FIVE GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SEcrION FIVE GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Geography Subject Descriptions GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp GEOG207 POPULATION, CULTURE design, questionnaire construction, social analysis, computer Prerequisite GEOGI02. AND RESOURCES IOcp aided mapping and geographic information systems. GEOGlOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp HoW's 4 Hours perweekforonesemester, up to 2daysfield work. Prerequisite GEOGI02. "'NB The field trip is scheduled prior to the beginning of first semester. Please contact the Geography Department as soon as Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG101 and Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work. end of the semester. possible. GEOGI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the Science, and for Geography Honours GEQG401 and GEOG402. Content end of Ute semester. GEOG304 THE BIOSPHERE AND HoW's 2 Hours lectures and 2 Hours of practical work per week Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography Conten! CONSERVATION IOcp for one semester. A one day field excursion. descriptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there The course examines three themes: popUlation and migration; Prerequisite GEOG203. will bean introduction to computing, survey analysis and research. ExaminaJion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the culture and technology; resource use. These themes are illustrated design. HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 4 days fieldworL end of the semester. by historical and contemporary case studies at a variety of spatial Content sca1es. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hourpaper at the GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND end of the semester. Topicsinclude: world and regional population growth; migration, An introduction to physical geography including meteorology CLIMATOLOGY IOcp population growth and settlement; culture, plural societies and ConJen! and climate; the influence of geomotphic processes on landforms; Prerequisite GEOG101. weathering, rivers, ice, frost, wind and the sea; the physical, development; culture, technology and resource use; agricultural Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:. origins, diffusion and practices. of both the ecological and historical aspects of the subject. A development of soil profiles; environmental and historical factors Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the small herbarium coUection is required of each student. GEOG208 CITIES AND REGIONS IOcp that influence plant distribution. end of the semester. Biological Conservation: An introduction to the subject, in which Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic COnJent Prerequisite GEOG102. the importance of a genetically-based approach is emphasised. data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial An introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days field work. Soils: Processes of soil erosion, soil conservation issues and photographs for landform analysis. subject is examined and its interdisciplinary nature emphasised. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the methods. Tex' Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms in end of the semester. Tex.ts space and time are explored. Some emphasis is placed on Briggs, D. & Smithson, P. 1985, FundamenJals of Physical Content Morgan, R.P.C. 1986,SoilErosionandConservation Longman. Geography paperback Hutchinson. rainforest for the illustration of principles and for the gaining of field experience. The course examines the changing nature and distribution of Smith, David 1990, Con!inen! in crisis Penguin. fundamental aspects of human geography: urban settlement and Williams, J.B. and Harden, G.l. 1980, Rainforest Climbing GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale the mode of production. These themes are iUustrated by case Plants University of New England. HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp including radiation and heat budgets; precipitation processes; studies of cities, industries, regions and communities. general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology. Reference Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOGI01 and Topics include: regional growth and industrial development; Texts GEOOI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and processes of urban andregional change; urban hierarchies; internal Kellman, M.C. 1980, Plant Geography, 2nd edn, Methuen. Science, and for Geography Honours GE0G401 and GEOG402. Linacre, E. & Hobbs, 1. 1983, The Australian Climatic structure of the city; social impact of change; policy and planning. HoW's 2 Hours lectures and 2 Hours of practical work per week Environment, paperback Wiley. GEOG30S CLIMATIC PROBLEMS IOcp for one semester. A one day field excursion. Pears, N. 1985, Basic Biogeography, 2nd edn, Longman. GEOG301 ADVANCED METHODS IN PHYSICAL Prerequisite GEOG203 or permission of Head of Department. GEOGRAPHY IOcp Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the Williams, I.B. Harden, GJ. et al1984, Trees and shrubs in HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 1 day fieldwork. end of the semester. Prerequisites GEOG201 plus either GEOG203 or GEOG204. rainJorestsoJNSW andSoUlhernQueensland University of New Examination Progressive assessment and one2hourpaperatlhe Content England. This course consists of a 6-day field excursion (i.e. 48 Hours of end of the semester. the 56-hour course) together with 2 Hours per week for 4 weeks). An introduction to hUman geography including cultural, Reference ConJent Examination Progressive assessment. population, economic, development and urban geography. Attenborough, D. 1981, Life on Earth Fontana/Collins. Introduces palaeoclimates in the Pleistocene and Holocene, and Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical Con!ent the reasons behind climate changes overthose periods. Describes data and its presentation by thematic maps in human geography. GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF The course mainly involves a field excursion to demonstrate anthropogenic impacts on climate, through air pollution, on AUSTRALIA IOcp methods of undertaking research in biogeography and soils in a local, regional and global scales. Evaluates near-future possible GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL Prerequisite GEOGIOI. specific area. The remaining time will bedevoted to methodology climate variations over the next century. GEOGRAPHY IOcp /loW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:. and analysis related to the field trip. The field trip will take place Text Prerequisite GEOGI01. between first and second semesters. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the Bridgman, B.A. 1990, Global Air Pollution Problems Jar the HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester. end of the semester. 1990s paperback Belhaven Press. GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN HUMAN Examination Progressive assessment. Content GEOGRAPHY IOcp Recommended Reading Content Rocks and their weathering, structural landforms, soils, slope Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206. Bradley, R.S. 1985. Quaternary Paleaoclimatology Allen & Unwin. An introduction to statistics and computing for Physical development and mass movements, fluvial, aeolian and coastal This course mainly involves a major field excursion. Geography. StUdy of cartographic, photographic and aerial processes and landforms, glacial and periglacial processes and photographic methods in geography. landforms. Examination Progressive assessment. GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA Content AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE IOcp This course involves a major field excursion to investigate a Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOO206. contemporary human geography issue. Methods include survey Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:. 78 79 GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE GEOORAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE

Not to count for credit with GEOL202 Exmninalion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the ExaminaJion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the Geology Subject Descriptions Hours 6 Hours per week forone semester, including lectures and end of the semester. end of the semester. IOcp practicals Content Content GEOLIOI THE ENVIRONMENT Examinations One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures, The course examines contemporary changes in production, examinations patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied inc1ude exploratory distribution and consumption, by referring to agriculture, practicals and field excursions. The course is repeated in the images, image-makers and distorters, and visions of Australia manufacturing and seJVices. It focuses on the geography of evening in Semester I ConJem before 1900; migrationtotheNewWorld;populationof Austtalia employment and industrial change; and the evolution of food ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper, assignments 'and laboratory An introduction to the petrography and petrology of igneous and 1788-1981; wbanisalion in Australia; agricultumlland use 1788 supply systems. practicals sedimentary rocks, 101914. Topicsinclude: the territorial organisation of production, the role Contem Texi of large corporations, agribusiness, technological change, the GEOG309 SOCIETY & SPACE IOcp A lecture, field and practical course which examines in the widest Gribble, CD. & Hall. A.J. 1985, A practical introduction 10 farm problem, divisions of labour and the changing nature of context the evolution of our planet and man's environment. optical mimralogy, Allen & Unwin, Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206. work. and the changing role of the stale. Specific topics are the Earth in space; evolution and dynamics of Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork/ Case studies of impacts of economic change on people and the planet Earth; evolution of the atmosphere. hydrosphere, GEOL213 ANCIENT ENVIRONMENTS project work. communities are drawn from the Asia-Pacific basin, and from biosphere and life; the impact of climatic change; structures AND ORGANISMS IOcp Examination Progressive assessment and one 2haur paper at the site visits in the Hunter. produced as a result of plate collision. Prerequisite GEOLI02 end of the semester. Texts Texts Consult lecturers concerned Not to count for credit with GEOL203 Con/em Dicken, P. 1992, Global Shift. 2nd edn, Paul Chapman. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures, GEOLI02 EARTH MATERIALS lOcp This course examines the interaction of social groups with each Lawrence, G. 1988, Capitalism and the Countryside, Pluto practica1s and field excursions Prerequisite GEOL10t The Environment other and with the urban environment. A variety of social groups Press. Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical defined by ethnic and socia-economic status, family structure Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures, examinations and gender will be studied. The course will use a variety of GEOG316 DIRECTED STUDIES IN practicals and excursions Conlent methodological approaches to socio-spatial behaviour. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp Examination One 3 hour paper, assignments and practical A course integrating ancient sedimentary environments with the Not offered in 1993. examinations. GEOG310 DIRECTED STUDIES IN evolution and morphology of ancient life, stratigraphic HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 10cp Content relationships and time, The course will be supported by field Prerequisites GROO202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206. A course dealing with the features and internal structure of rock excursions in the local area. forming minerals, the characteristics of volcanoes and their Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork! Texts Consult lecturers concerned prodUcts, weathering processes and deposi~on~ environmcn~s project work. of sediments. The metamorphism of rocks m dIfferent tectornc GEOL214 GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURES Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hour paper at the settings. energy resources and ore deposits of different origins are AND RESOURCES IOcp end of the semester, also discussed, Prerequisite GEOLI02 Content Texts Not to count for credit with GEOL204 This course will nonnally be given by a visiting lecturer - the Press, F. & Siever, R. 1986. Earth, 4th edn, Freeman. /lours 6 Hours per week for one semester subject to be advised. Whitten, D.G.A, 1973,..4 Dictionary a/Geology. Penguin. Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments, practical. GEOG311 HYDROLOGY IOcp GEOL21l OPTICAL MINERALOGY Scp examination Prerequisites GEOG201 , GEOJ203, ConJent Prerequisite GEOLt02 Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days fieldwork. A course dealing with geological structures and economic Not to count for credit with GEOL201 resources, Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures, end of the semester. Texts practicals and class assignments ContenJ Park, R.G. 1988, Foundations of Structural Geology, 2nd edn, Examination One 2 hour paper and practical examinations The course examines the distribution of waterin the environment. Blackie. Content Most attention will be given to atmospheric moisture, the McClay, K. 1987, The Mapping ofGeological Structures Open hydrologic cycle, catchments, runoff, sediment and solute transport A basic course in crystallography, optical mineralogy and rock­ Univ. Press, and soil water. Water resources are also considered forming minerals. Ilkp Texl Texl GEOL21S GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE Ward, R.C.and Robinson, M. 1989,Principleso/Hydrology, 3rd Gribble, C.D. and Hall, A.J. 1985, A practical inJroduction to Prerequisite GEOLl02 edn, McGraw-Hill. optical mimraiogy, Allen & Unwin. Not to counl for credit with GEOL205, GEOL206 Hours 14 days field work in two 7 day sessions forane semester GEOL212 INTRODUCTORY PETROLOGY lOcp GEOG31S PRODUCTION, WORK AND (February, week before Semester I, Easter break) TERRITORY 10 cp Prerequisite GEOL211 Examination By report Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206. Advisory prerequisite CHEMt 02 Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days fieldwork. 81 80 SECfION FIVE GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Conlenl Conlenl Texts Consult lecturer concerned. Roberts, R.G. & Sheahan, P.A. 1988, Ore Deposit Models (i) Analysis of the southern margin of the Sydney Basin, Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks; interpretation oftexwres of Geol.Ass.Canada. igneous and metamorphic rocks of the Southern Lachlan rocks fanned during prograde metamorphism, ductile shearing GEOL3IS SEDIMENTOLOGY IOcp GEOL3IS GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 5cp Fold Bell. and mapping of a composite pluton. Preparation and accretion-subduction; processes involved in the production Prerequisites GEOL212, GEOL213 of reports and supporting tutorials. and lectures. of grain shapes. intergranular and intragranular features. Prerequisite GEOL213 Not to count for credit with GEOL305 (ii) Mapping of metamorphosed sheH and trench sequences of Hours 7 days fleldwork (February. week before Semester 1) Texts Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt; integration and presentation Yardley. B.W.D. 1989, An introduction to Metamorphic Examination By report in a report. Examination One three hour paper. class assignments Petrology, Longman. Content Text Content Yardley, B.W.D., W.S. MacKenzie et al 1990. Atlas 0/ A fleldcourse including core logging, section work, interpretation McQay. K. 1987. The Mapping a/Geological StructUTes Open Lithologic associations in relation to the depositional facies of metamorphic rocks and their texlUTes , Longman. of data and basin analysis. Univ.Press. their ancient and recent environments offonnation with emphasis Yardley, B.W.D., W.S. MacKenzie et all990, Inlroduction to on the genetic connection between the geological setting of a Metamorphic Textures and Microstructures, Edward Arnold GEOL319 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 5cp GEOL216 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 5cp depositional area and its sedimentary flll (basin analysis). Australia Prerequisites GEOL216, GEOL313 Prerequisite GEOL215 Texts HOUTS 10 days fieldwork (July break) Not to count for credit with GEOL207 GEOL313 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND Reading, H.G. 1986, Sedimenlary environments and/acies ,2nd GEOPHYSICS IOcp eOO, Blackwell Scientiflc Publications. Examination By report HOUTS 7 days field work for one semester (September break) Prerequisite GEOL214 Walker, R.G. 1984, Facies Models, Geoscience Canada Reprint Conlenl Examination By report Not to count forcredil with GEOL301, GEOL302. Series I, 2nd edn. Structural analysis 0 fa multiply -deformed structural/metamorphic Conlenl Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester terrain (Broken Hill Block). Evaluation of P-T -t histories in the Mapping of low grade metamorphic rocks of the Cobar area; GEOL316 GEOLOGY OF FUELS IOcp terrain and integration with tectonic models. structural and stratigraphic interpretation; relationship of suJ prude Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments Prerequisite GEOL213 Texts rocks to sUUcture and stratigraphy; presentation of results and Conlenl Not to count for credit with GEOL305 interpretation in a report. Consult lecturers concerned Structural Geology Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester Text GEOL320 GEOLOGY OF QUATERNARY IOcp Geometrical analysis of multiply -defonned terrains; ductile shear Examination One 3 hour paper, c1ass assignments McQay. K. 1987. The Mapping a/Geological Structures, Open zones, kinematic indicators and analysis, strike slip faulting, ENVIRONMENTS Univ. Press. Conlenl thrust and extensional tectonics. Prerequisites GEOL213 or GEOG204 Exploration Geophysics Coal Geology GEOL311 IGNEOUS PETROLOGY AND Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester Origin. distribution, clasSification and economic potential of CRUSTAL EVOLUTION IOcp Geophysical techniques - their interpretation and application. Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments coal. Prerequisite GE0L312 Text Conlent Petroleum Geology Not to count for credit with GE0L303, GE0L306 Park, R.G. 1988, Foundations o/Structural Geology, 2nd edn, This course will examine the historical basis for contemporary Origin, source, migration, entrapment and distribution of Blackie. environmental change. The relation of present day environmental Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester petroleum and gas; the exploration and exploitation techniques of processes and resultant changes to the longer, Quaternary record Examination One 3 hour paper and class assignments its detection, evaluation and recovery. GEOL314 STRATIGRAPHIC METHODS IOcp will be examined critically. Topics covered include an overview Conlenl Prerequisite GEOL213 Texts ConSUlt lecturers concerned of the general characteristics of the Pleistocene and Holocene, Igneous Petrology Not to count for credit with GEOL304, GEOL305 oceanic and terrestrial palaeoclimatic records, the fossil record GEOL317 RESOURCE AND EXPLORATION and Pleistocene faunal extinctions. Quaternary dating methods, Petrology of igneous rocks in relation to the tectonic environment. Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester GEOLOGY IOcp sea-level change and coastal evolution, glaciation, aridity, Malysis Changes in igneous petrogenesis throughout time. Examination One 3 hour paper, and class assignments Prerequisites GEOL212, GEOL214 of Quaternary sediments, stratigraphic nomenclature and the Crustal Evolution archaeological record. Content Not to count for credit with GE0L301, GEOL306 Geological evolution of selected Archaean and Proterozoic terrains Texts Consult lecturer concerned Stratigraphic Methods Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester in Australia: comparisons and contrasts with modem tectonic environments to assess the processes of continental growth SLTatigraphic nomenclature; biostratigraphic zones; factors in Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments throughout geological time. lithostratigraphy; sLratigraphic breaks; stratigraphic facies Contenl changes; catastrophic stratigraphy versus unifonnitarianism; Text correlation; sLTatigraphic paJaeontology. Types of stratigraphic This course presents fundamental criteria for the f<'nnation and Wilson, M. 1989, Igneous Petrogenesis, A global tectonic maps and sections; numerical anaJysis of data strings; numerical characteristics of metallic ore deposits. An emphasis is placed on approach., Unwin & Hyman. map analysis. an understanding of ore-forming processes in magmatic hydrothermal and metamorphic settings. Laboratory study of Micropalaeontology GEOL312 METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY IOcp material from world- class ore deposits complements the lecture Microfossils; their morphology, stratigraphiC dispersal and course. Prerequisite GEOL212 economic importance. Texts Not to count for credit with GE0L303, GE0L306 Geochronology and World Stratigraphy Evans. A.M. 1987, An Introduction to Ore Geology, 2nd edn, HOUTS 6 Hours per week for one semester Principles of age dating; regional geological patterns of selected Blackwell. Exmnination One 3 hour paper, c1ass assignments provinces of the world. 82 83 SECfION FIVE MA TIlEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE MA 1HEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Mathematics Subject Descriptions Texts geometry and linear algebra: vectorspaces,linear maps. Analysis paperback Wiley, earlier editions are acceptable. of the convergence of sequences and series. Power Series. LEVEL 100 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS University of Newcastle 1993, TUlorial Notes for MATH 112. Piskunov.N. 1981, Dif/erentialand Integral Calculus. Vol.Iand Elementary Theorems of Mathematical Analysis. n, 2nd edn, Mir. The usual route for study of Mathematics beyond first year - for Stewart. 1. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn, Brooks!Cole. Counting, probability, and an introduction to finite mathematical Spiegel,M.R.1974.Tlu!oryandProblemsofAdvancedCalcwlus example, to obtain a "Major in Mathematics" starts with (This book will also be a useful reference for MATH201 and structures. MATHI02 in first semester, followed by MATHI03 in second MATH203). , Schaum. Text semester. However, entry at this point requires an adequate level References Widder, D.V. 1989. AdvancedCalcubu, Dover. of knowledge and skill: The minimum level is a mark of at least University of Newcastle 1993, Tutorial notes/or MATH1D3. Ash, C. and Ash, RB. 1987, The Calculus TUloring Book ,IEEE 120 out of 150 in 3-unit Mathematics at the New South Wales Advisory TexJ MA TH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL H.S.C. examination. Press. EQUATIONS 1 Munro, G.P. 1991, Proofs & Problems in Calculus, 2nd edn, Any student with less than this level of knowledge or skill has Stein, S.K. 1982, Calculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, Carslaw. Prerequisite MA TH201. availableMATH111, followed by MATHI12. This combination McGraw-Hilt Corequisite MATH203. allows entry to seven of the seventeen level-200 subjects in References MATHl02 MATHEMATICS 102 IOcp Mathematics. Such a student could take MATHI03 in alater year Binmore, K.G.1985, Mathematical Analysis, CUP. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Prerequisites Either a performance of at least 120 out of 150 in to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects. Brisley, W. Notes for Linear Algebra Lecture notes in ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper. 3 U Mathematics at the NSW HSC or equivalent or MATHl11. Note that MATHl11 is not appropriate for a student who has Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.5. ConLenl Not to count for credit with MATH112. performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to or A Basis for Linear Algebra. Orthogonality. Sturm-Liouville systems and genemlisations, MATHI02/103. Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one Chapman, C.RJ. 1973,lntroduction to Mathematical Analysis, Series of Orthogonal functions, Fourier Series, Separation of semester. variables, The classical partial differential equations (heat/ MATH111 MATHEMATICS 111 IOcp Routledge & Kegan Paul. Examination One 3 hour paper. diffusion, wave, Laplace, Poisson). Prerequisite 2U mathematics at HSC level or equivalent. Giles, J .RReaIAnalysis: An Introductory Course. Lecture notes Content in Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6. Tal Not to count for credit with MATHI0l. Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Grimaldi, R.P. 1985, Discrete and Combinatorial Matiwmatics, University of Newcastle, 1993, MathemaJics 1/ Tutoruu Notes. Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Complex numbers. Addison-Wesley. References semester. The subject is repealed in each semester. Differential equalions. An introduC1ion to the calculus OffWlCtiOns LEVEL 200 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS Broman, A. 1989. An Introduction to Partial Differential Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment. of two variables. Vectors. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, Equations Dover. Content eigenvectors. MATH201 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS Scp Churchill, R V. &Brown,J .W. 1978,Fourier SeriesandBoundary TexiS Elementary algebra. trigonometry and geometry with applications. Prerequisite Both MATH111 and MATH112, or both Value Problems McGraw-Hill. University of Newcastle 1993, Tutorial Notesfor MATH1D2. Calculus with applications of differentiation and integration. MATHI02 and MATHI03, or MATHI02 and Permission of Greenberg, M.D. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics Newton's method. Trapezium and Simpson's Rules. Vector Edwards, c.H. & Penney. D.E. 1990. Calculus and Analytical Head of Department. Prentice-Hall. geometry, and its applications. Geometry 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Grossman, 5.1. & Derrick, W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Texts Advisory T exJ Examination One 2 hour paper. Mathemalics Harper & Row. University of Newcastle 1993, Maliwmalics 111 TutorialNotes. Munro, G.P. 1991, Proofs & Problems in Calculus, 2nd edn, Content Kreyszig, E. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 6th Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn. Brooks/Cole. Carslaw. Partial derivatives, Vector operators, Taylor's Theorem, Line edo. paperback Wiley, earlier editions are acceptable. (This book will also be a useful reference for MATH112, References integrals, MATH201 and MATH203). MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL Ayres, F. 1974. Calculus Schaum. Multipleandsurface integrals, Gauss, Green, Stokes' Theorems. EQUATIONS 1 5

References MATH20S ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES 5cp Grove.E.A.&Ladas,G.I974,lntroductiontoComplexVariables MATHlIO GEOMETRY 1 Scp , Houghton Mifflin. Boyce, W.E. & Di Prima. R.C. 1986, Elementary Differential PrerequisiJe MA TH204. Prerequisite (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHlll and Equations and Boundary Value Problems Wiley. HoUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester. Kreysig, E. 1979, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley. MATH112 and MATHl03). Burghes, D. & Barrie, M. 1981. Modelling into Differential Examinalion One 2 hour paper. Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. 1970, Complex Variables, Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Equations Ellis---Horwood. Holden-Day. Conlenl Examin4lion One 2 hour paper. Grossman, 5.1. & Derrick. W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering O'Neill, P.V. 1983, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Content Mathemalics Harper & Row. Studyinan axiomatic way of the analysis of more abstract spaces: Wadsworth. metric and normed linear spaces. Hochstadt, H, DijferenJial Equations Dover. Spiegel, M.R. 1964, Theoryand Problems ofComplex Variables An elementary approach, using models, touching Euclidean Convergence of sequences and series in Rn with Euclidean and , McGraw-Hill. plane geometry, Hyperbolic plane geometry, Projective geometry, Kreyszig, E. 1988,Advanced Enginuring MalhemaJics, 6th edn, other nanns. and their relationship to one another. paperback Wiley ,.earlier editions are acceptable. Tall, D.O. 1970, Functions of a Complex Variable I and fl. Convergence of sequences and series in function spaces with Text Martin, W. T. & Reissner, Elementary DijJerenJial Equations Routledge & Kegan Paul. uniform and integral norms, the three fundamental theorems on Notes for Geometry, Mathematics Department, 1993. Dover. uniform convergence involving continuity, integration and MATH207 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 2 Scp Sanchez, D.A., Allen, R.c. et a11988, DijferenJial Equations. differentiation and application to power series. References Prerequisite MATH206 and MATHI03. 2nd edn, Addison Wesley. Completeness, closed ness and density in metric spaces; Blumehtnal, L.M. 1970, Studies in Geometry, Freeman. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Banach Fixed Point Theorem and its application to functions on Eves, H. A. 1972, A Survey oj Geometry, Allyn & Bacon. MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS Scp Examination One 2 hour paper. the real line and to the solution of integral equations. Gamer, L.E. 1981, An Outline of Projective Geometry, North Prerequisite (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATH111 and Content Holland. MATHI 12 and MATHI03). Local and global continuity of mappings on metric spaces and topological characterisations. Taylor and Laurent series, analytic continuation. Residue theory, Greenberg, M.I. 1980, Euclidean and non-Euclidean Geometry, Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Sequential compactness and application in approximation theory. evaluation of some rea] integrals and series, the Argument North Holland. Examination One 2 hour paper. Principle and Rouche's Theorem, Conformal mapping and Text Content applications. Further examination of multivalued functions; branch MATH2I1 GROUP THEORY Scp Giles, J.R. 1989,Inlroduction to the Analysis of Metric Spaces cuts, Riemann surfaces. Study in an axiomatic way of the properties of the real number Prerequisite (MATH102 and MATH103) or (MATHlll and CUP. References system and functions defined on the real numbers and on the MATH1l2and MATHI03). Euclidean plane. References Churchill, R.V., Brown,J.W. etal. 1984.Complex Variables and HoUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester. Properties of the real number system: the Supremum Axiom, Bartle, R.G. 1976. The Elemenls ofReal Analysis Wiley. Applications, McGraw-Hill. Examination One 2 hour paper. completeness and compactness. Giles,J.R.ReaIAnalysis: An Introductory Course Lecture Notes Grove, E.A. & Ladas, G. 1974.1nlroductionto Complex Variables. Con!enl in Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6. Houghton Mifflin. Convergence of sequences and series in the Euclidean plane. Groups, subgroups, isomorphism. Permutation groups, groups of Limits of functions and algebra of limits, continuity and algebra Goldberg, R.R. 1964. Methods ofReal Analysis, Ginn Blaisdel. Kreysig, E. 1979, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley. linear transformations and matrices, isometries, sy mmetry groups of continuous functions. Simmons. G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. 1970, Complex Variables, of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosets, Lagrange's theorem, Holden-Day. Properties of continuous functions: connectedness, compactness Analysis, McGraw-HilI. normal subgroups, isomorphism theorems. and unifonn continuity. White, A.I. 1968, Real Analysis Addison-Wesley. O'Neill, P. V. 1983, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Text Wadsworth. Properties of differentiable functions: Mean Value Theorems Ledermann, W. 1976, Introduction to Group Theory Longman. MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 Scp and Taylor polynomial approximation for functions on the real Spiegel, M.R. 1%4, Theory and Problems ofComplex Variables References numbers and the Euclidean plane. Prerequisite Both MA THIll and MATH112orboth MATH1 02 , McGraw-Hili. Baumslag. B. & Chandler, B. 1968, Group Theory, Schaum. The theory of Riemann integration for functions on the real and MATH103, or MATH102 and Permission of the Head of Tall, D.O. 1970, Functions of a Complex Variable I and /[ , numbers, the study of class of integrable functions. Department. Routledge & Kegan Paul. Budden, F.J. 1972, The Fascination ofGroups CU. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus for functions on the real Corequisite MATH201. Gardiner, C.F. 1980, A First Course in Group TMory Springer. numbers relating differential and integral calculus. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. MATH209 ALGEBRA Scp Herstein, LN. 1975, Topics in Algebra, 2nd edn ,Wiley. Prerequisite MATH218. Text Examination One 2 hour paper. Weyl, H. 1952, Symmetry Princeton. Giles,J.R. RealAnalysis:an introductory course Lecture Notes Conlenl Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 5cp in Mathematics. Univ.Newcastle, No.6. Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar fonns, geometry of the Examination One 2 hour paper. References complex plane, solutions of polynomial equations. Complex Comen! Prerequisites MATH102 or MATH103 or (MATHll1 and MATf1112). Binmore, K. G. 1985, Mathematical Analysis CUP. functions, mapping theory, limits and continuity . Differentiation, An introduction to algebraic structures. Groups, rings, algebras, the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions, fields. Applications. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Clapham, C.R.J. 1973, Introduction to Mathematical Analysis exponential,logarithmic,trigonometricandhyperbolicfunctions. References Examination One 2 hour paper. Routledge & Kegan Paul. Integration, the Cauchy-Goursat Theorem. Cauchy's integral Content Clark, C.W. 1982, Elementary Mathematical Analysis formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Hillman, A.P. & Alexanderson,G.L. 1983,Ajirst uruiergraduate Wadsworth-Brooks. Algebra. course in abstract algebra, Wadsworth. An introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics: Spivak, M. 1967, Calculus Benjamin. References Jones, A., Morris, S.A. et al1991, Abstract algebra aruifamous Graphs, set theory, relations and functions,logic, counting and recurrence equations. Churchill, R.V., Brown, I.W. etal.1984,Complex Variables and impossibilities Springer-Verla. Applications McGraw-Hill.

86 87 MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE SECTION FIVE MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. Tal Tal Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalisation, Difference Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. Ross, K.A. & Wright, CR.B. 1988, Discrete MalMmalics, 2nd Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. 1989,NumericaiAnalysis, 4th edn, equations. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt process. edn, Prentice-Hall. Motion with variable mass. Prindle, Weber & Schmidt. Orthogonal, unitary, hermitian and normal matrices. References References References References Charlton, F. 1963, Textbook of Dynamics Van Nostrand. Alagor. V.S. 1989, Fundamentals a/Computing, Prentice-Hall. Atkinson, K.E. 1984, An Introduction 10 Numerical Analysis Anton, H. 1987, Elementary LinMU Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley. Goodman, L.E. 1963, Dynamics Blackie. Wiley. ' Grimaldi, R.P. 1985, Discrete and Combinatorial Malhi!masics Bloom, n.M. 1979, Linear Algebra and Geometry Cambridge. Addison~Wesley. Marion, J.B. 1970, Classical Dy1lQmics Academic. • Balfour, A. & Marwick, D.H. 1986, Programming in Standard Bristey, W. 1973, A Basis for Linear Algebra Wiley. Kalmanson, K. 1986, An Introduction to Discrete Malhema1ics Meirovitch,L.I970,MethodsofAnalyticaIDynamics, McGraw­ Fortran 77 Heinemann. Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. 1987, Ele1Mntary LinMU Alg~bra and its Applications Addison-Wesley. Hill. Cherney, W. & Kincaid, D. 1985, Numerical Matlumatics and Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. Dierker, P.P. & Voxman, W.L. 1986, Discrete Mathematics, (See also references for MATH 201, 202, 203). Computing, 2nd edn, Brooks-Cole. LipSChutz, S. 1974, Linear Algebra Schaum. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich,. Cooper, D. & Clancy, M. 1985, Oh! Pascal! Wiley. MATH2I5 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 5cp Roman, S. 1985, An Introduction 10 Linear Algebra Saunders. Etter, D.M. 1984 et. seq, Problem Solving with Structwed MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 5cp Prerequisites MATHI02 or MATH103 or (MATH1l1 and Fortran 77 Benjamin. Rorres, C. & Anton, H. 1979, Applications of Linear Algebra Prerequisites (MATH102 and MATHI03) or (MATHl11 and Wiley. MATH112). Etter, D.M. 1983, Structured Fortran 77 for Engineers and MATHl12). Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Scientists, Benjamin. MATH301 LOGIC AND SET THEORY IOcp Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Examinalion One 2 hour paper. Ge~d,C.F. & Wheatly, P.O. 1984,AppliedNumericalAnalysis, Not offered in 1993. Addison-Wesley. Examination One 2 hour paper. Content Content Operations research involves the application of quantitative University of Newcastle Computing Centre Handbookfor VAXI MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS AND This topic is designed to introduce students to the idea of a methods and tools to the analysis of problems involving the VMS. RELATIVITY lOcp mathematical model. Several realistic situations will be treated operation of systems and its aim is to evaluate the consequences University of Newcastle Computing Centre VAX·} J Fortran. Not offered in 1993. beginning with an analysis ofthenon-mathematical origin of the of certain decision choices and to improve the effectiveness ofthe problem, the formulation of the mathematical model. solution of system as a whole. MATH217 LINEAR ALGEBRA I Scp MATH303 VARIATIONAL METHODS the mathematical problem and interpretation of the theoretical This subject will cover a number of areas of operations research Prerequisite MATHI02 or (MATH111 and MATHI12). AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS lOcp results. The use of computers is an integral part of this subject. Not offered in 1993. which have proved successful in business, economics and defence. Not to count for credit with MATH218. References These include such topics as network analysis and linear Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Andrews, J.G. & McClone, R.R. 1976, Mathematical Modelling programming. MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL Butterworth,. References Examination One 2 hour paper. EQUATIONS 2 lOcp Bender, E.A. 1978,An Introduction to Mathematical Modelling Daellenbach, H.G. & George, J.A. 1978, Introduction to Content Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH2I8. , Wiley,. Operations Research Techniques, Allyn and Bacon. Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Clements, R.R. 1989, Matlumatical Modelling, CUP. Hillier, F.S. & Liebennan, G.J. 1980, Inlroduclion 10 Operations Diagonalizalion. Inner product spaces. Difference and duferential Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. equations. Cross, M. & Moscardini, A.O. 1985, Learning the Art of Research, 3rd edn, Holden-Day. Examination One 2 hour paper. References Matlumatical Modelling Ellis Horwood. Taha, H.A. 1987, Operations Research, 4th edn, MacMillan. Content Dym, C.L. & Ivey. E.S. 1980, Principles of Matlumatical Hastins, Kevin J. 1989, Inlroduction 10 tlu Matlumatics of Anton, H. 1987, Elementary Linear Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley. (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects). Modelling Academic. Operations Research Marcel Dekker. Bloom, D.M. 1979, Linear Algebra and Geometry ,Cambridge. Existence and Uniqueness of solutions of rust order equations, Edwards, D. & Hamson, M. 1989, Guide to Mathematical Brisley, W. A. 1973, Basisfor Linear Algebra Wiley. vector fields, integral curves. Lie groups, infinitesimal 5cp Modelling, Macmillan. MATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS transfonnations, invariant functions and path Invariance Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. 1987, Elemenlary Linear Algebra, curves. Habennan, R. 1977, Mathematical Models, Prentice·Hall. Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHl11 and Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. of equations under a given group and reduction to quadratures. MATHII2and MATHI03) or (MATHIII and MATHII2 and Construction of all equations which admit a given group. Se<:ond Lighthill, J. 1980, Newer Uses of Mathematics, Penguin. COMPIOI}. Lipschultz, S. 1974, Linear Algebra Schaum. and higher order equations, reduction of order and integration. Smith, J.M. 1971, Mathematical Ideas in Biology Cambridge. Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Roman, S. 1985, An Inlroduction 10 Linear Algebra Saunders. References Smith, J.M. 1974, Models in Ecology, Cambridge,. Examination One 2 hour paper. Rorres, C. & Anton, H. 1979, Applications of Linear Algebra Bluman, GW. & Cole, J.D. 1974, Similarity Methods for Wiley. Differential Equations Springer. MATH214 MECHANICS 5cp Conlent Hill, J.M. 1982, Solutions of Differential equations by Means of Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHll1 and Sources of error in computation. Solution of a single nonlinear MATH2I8 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2 Scp equation. Interpolation and the Lagrange interpolating polynomial. One·parameter Groups Pitman. MATH1l2and MATHI03). Prerequisite (MATH102 and MATH103) or (MATH111 and Finite differences and applications to interpolation. Numerical MATH1l2and MATHI03). Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. differentiation and integration including the trapezoidal rule, MATH30S PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL Examination One 2 hour paper. Simpson's rule and Gaussian integration fonnulae. Numerical Not to count for credit with MATH217. EQUATIONS 2 lOcp solution of ordinary differential equations· Runge-Kutta and Content Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester. Prerequisites MATH20l, MATH202, MATH203 and MATH204. predictor-corrector methods. Numerical solution oflinearsystems Examination One 2 hour paper. Summary of vector algebra. Velocity and accelerations. of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to Content Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and applied mathematics, engineering and the sciences will be made forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square Examination One 2 hour paper. throughout the course. Veclorspaces and subs paces, Linear Maps, Matrix representations.

88 89 SECTION FIVE MA lHEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Content Goldstein, S. (ed) 1965,ModernDevelopments inFluidDynamics Reference Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects). Vou I & II Dover. Thorpe, J.A. 1979. Elementary Topics in Differential Geometry ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper. Milne-Thompson, L.M. 1968, Theoretical Hydrodynamics Springer. Fim order equatioos: linear equations, Cauchy problems; general Content solutions; nonlinear equations; Cauchy' s method of characteristics; Macmillan. MATH309 COMBINATORICS (An essay: see note at the end ofthelisting for300 level subjects). compatible systems of equatioos; complete integrals; the methods Panton, R. 1984,Incompressible Flow, Wiley. lOcp In this topic the solution of polynomial equations and their of Charpitand Jacobi. Higherorderequalions: linear equations with Paterson, A.R. 1983, First Course in Fluid Dynamics Not offered in 1993. A relationships with classical geometrical problems such as constant coefficients; reducible and irreducible equations; second Cambridge. order equations with variable coefficients; characteristics; MATlDIO FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS lOcp duplication of the cube and trisection of angles will be studied. It Robertson,J.H.I965,HydrodynamicsinTheoryandApplicalion. will further examine the relations between the roots and hypeIbolic, parnholic and elliptic equations. Special meIhods: Prerequisite MATH205. separation of variables; integral transforms; Green's function. Prentice-Hall. coefficients of equations, relations which gave rise to Galois Hours 1 1/2 hours per week for full year Applications in mathematical physics where appropriate. theory and the theory of extension fields. Why equations of MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL Examination One 2 hour paper. degree 5 and higher cannot be solved by radicals will be References MECHANICS lOcp investigated. Content COlton,D.1988,ParliaIDifferentiaIEquations-anlntroduction Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH206. References Random House. (An essay: seenote at the end of the listing for300 level subjects.) HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester. Birkhoff, G.D. & MacLane, S. A Survey of Modern Algebra Courant, R. & Hilbert, D. 1966. Methods of Mathematical Nonned linear spaces, finite dimenSional spaces, iJUler product Macmillan, 1953. Physics Vol.1I Partial Differential Equations Interscience. Examination One 2 hour paper. spaces. Linear mappings, continuity, topological and isometric Edwards, H.M. Galois Theory Springer, 1984. Epstein, B. 1962, Partial Differen/ial Equations-an inJroduction Content isomorphisms. Dual spaces, the Hahn-Banach Theorem and reflexivity. Conjugate mappings, operators on Hilbert space, McGraw-Hill•. (An essay: seenoteat the end of the listing for300 level subjects). Herstein, LN. Topics in Algebra Wiley, 1975. adjoint operators and projection operators. Haack. W. & Wendland, W. 1972, Lectures on Partial and Classical Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics, Liouville Kaplansky,I. Fields and Rings Chicago,I969. Texis Phaffian DiJJerenlial Equations Pergamon,. theorem. Statistical Mechanics: basic postulate; microcanonical Stewart, I. Galois Theory Chapman & Hall, 1973. Smith, M.G. 1967, InJroduction to the Theory of Partial ensemble; equipartition; classical ideal gas; canonical ensemble; Giles.J.R. 1987 ,Introduction to Analysis ofMetric Spaces CUP. Differential Equations Van Nostrand. energy fluctuations; grand canonical ensemble; density Giles, J.R. 1988. Introduction to Analysis of Normed Linear MATH3I3 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (THEORY) lOcp fluctuations; quantum statistical mechanics; density matrix, ideal Spaces Univ. Newcastle Lecture Notes. Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and Sneddon, I.N. 1986, Elements ofPartial Differential Equations, Bose gas; ideal Fermi gas; white dwarf stars; Bose-Einstein McGraw-Hill. References MATH218. Programming ability (high-level language) is condensation; superconductivity. assumed. Bachman, G. & Narici, L 1966. Functional Analysis Academic. Quantum mechanics: the wave-particle duality, concept of MATH306 FLUID MECHANICS lOcp HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester. probability; development, solution and interpretation of Banach, S. 1988, Tlu!orie des Operations Lineaires, 2nd edn. Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and Schrodinger's equations in one. two and three dimensions; Chelsea. Examination One 2 hour paper. MATH206. degeneracy; Heisenberg uncertainty; molecular structure. Brown, A.L & Page, A 1970. Elements of Functional Analysis Conlent Advisory PrelCorequisite MATH207. References VanNostrand. (An essay: seenote at the end of the listing for300 level subjects). HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester. Croxton, C.A. 1975, Introductory Eigenphysics Wiley. Jameson, G.J.O. 1974. T opologyandNormed Spaces, Chapman­ Solution of linear systems of algebraic equations by direct and Hall. Examination One 2 hour paper. Fong. P. 1968, Elementary Quantum Mechanics Addison­ linear iterative methods; particular attention will be given to the Content Wesley. Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S. V. 1957, Elements ofthe Theory influence of various types of errors on the numerical result, to the general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects) Huang, K. 1963, Statistical Mechanics, Wiley. of Functions and Functional Analysis VoU Grayloch. to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one Kreysig, E. 1978, Introductory Functional Analysis with Basicconcepts: continuum, pressure, viscosity. Derivation of the Landau, L.D.& Lifshitz, H.M. 1968, Statistical Physics step and multistep methods of initial value problems involving Applications, Wiley. equations of motion for a real incompressible fluid; Poiseuille Pergamon,. ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stability of linear and Stokes' boundary layer flow. Dynamical similarity and the Liustemik, LA. & Sobolev, UJ. 1961. Elements ofFunctt'onal marching schemes. Boundary value problems. Finite-difference Reynolds number. Flow at high Reynolds number, ideal (non­ MATH308 GEOMETRY 2 lOcp Analysis Frederick Unger. (and finite-element methods) of solution of partial differential viscous) fluid; simplification of the equations of motion; Bernoulli Prerequisites 20 credit points from 200 level Mathematics, Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern equations. If time pennits, other numerical analysis problems equations; the case of irrotational flow; Kelvin's circulation including at least one of MATH209, 211, 218. Analysis, McGraw-Hill. such as integration, solution of non-linear equations etc. will be theorem. Investigation of simpleirrotationalinviscid flows; two­ treated. Taylor, A.E. and Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to Functional dimensional flows; circulation; axisymmetric flow around a Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley •. Text sphere; virtual mass. Generation of vorticity at solid boundaries; Examination One 2 hour paper. Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell. Burden, R.L. & Faires. J.D. 1989, NumericalAnalysis, 4th edn, boundary layers and their growth in flows which are initially Content mutational. Prindle,Weber & Schmidt. (An essay: see note at the end of the listingfor300 level subjects). Young, N. 1988, An inlroduction to Hilbert space CUP. References References Calculus on Rn: directional derivatives, curves tangent vectors, Batchelor, G.K. 1967, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics MATH311 MEASURE THEORY & AtJdnson. K.E. 1978, An Introduction to Numerical Analysis, mappings, vector fields and integral curves. INTEGRA nON Cambridge. lOcp Wiley. Affine spaces: calculus on affme spaces, the geometry of curves Not offered in 1993. Ames, W.F. 1969, Numerical Methodsfor Partial Differential Chirgwin, B.H. & Plumpton, C. 1967, Elementary Classical and surfaces. Parallelism and covariant derivatives. Shape Hydrodynamics Pergamon. Equations Nelson. operators, Gaussian curvature. MATH3I2 ALGEBRA lOcp Curle, N. & Davies, H.I. 1968, 1971, Modern Fluid Dynamics Cohen, A.M. et aI. 1973, Numerical Analysis, McGraw-Hill. Introduction to Riemannian manifolds. Prerequisites MATH218 and at least one of MATH209, Vols I & II VanNostrand. Conte.S.D. &deBoor,C.1980,ElementaryNumericaIAnalysis. MATH21D or MATH211.

90 91 SECfION FIVE MA lHEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE BEd (MA lHEMATICS EDUCATION) SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

3rd edn, McGraw.Hill. MATH315 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY IOcp The essay is arequirement forthe satisfactory completion of one B.Ed (Mathematics Education) Forsythe, G.E., Malcolm, M.A. et alI977, CompUler Metlwdsfor Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH213. ofthe level 300 mathematics subjects taken by a student normally in the Irrst semester of the student's 300 level program. Mathematical Computations. Prentice-Hall. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester. MAQMI35 MATHEMATICS lA 20cp Isaacson, E. & Keller, H.M.I966,AnalysisofNumerical Metlwds Two copies of the essay are to be submitted by the 10th week of (MAI35Q) Examination One 2 hour paper. the semester of which one will be returned to the student after , Wiley. Hours 4 Hours per week for a year. Content assessment. Lambert, J.D. & Wait, R. 1973, Computational Methods in COnUnJ Ordinary Differential Equations. Wiley. (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects). Subject provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods Differential and integral calculus offunctions of a single variable; This subject will show theuse of mathematical models to advance Mitchell, A.R. & Wait, R. 1977, The FiniJe Element Method in MAQM214 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IOcp Applications of Calculus including mechanics, Partial Differential Equations, Wiley. the understanding of certain biological phenomena. A number of biological situations will be investigated and students will be Prerequisite INFOI0l and STATI 01. Pizer, S.M. & Wallace, V.L 1983, To Compute Numerically: MAQMI36 MATHEMATICS IB 20cp expected to use both analytical and computational techniques to Not to count for credit with MATH215. (MAI36Q) Concepts and Strategies Little, Brown. obtain results which can be compared with experimental findings. Hours 4 Hours per week: for one semester. Hours 4 Hours per week for a year. Smith. G.D. 1978. Numerical SolUlion of Partial Differemial References: Equations: Finite Difference Methods, Oxford. Examination Progressive assessment based on tutorials and Conten/ Edelstein-Keshet, L. 1987, Mathematical Models in Biology, assignments plus a 2 hour final examination. Algebra: binomial theorem, mathematical induction, complex MATH314 OPTIMIZATION IOcp Random-House. Content numbers, matrix algebra Geometry: Euclidean and Analytic. Jones, D.S, & Sleeman, B.D. 1983, Differential Equations and Prerequisites MATH201 and MATH218. The subject addresses the application of elementary quantitative Computing: an introduction to microcomputers. Mathematical Biology Allen & Unwin. Hours 1 1{2 Hours per week for full year techniques to decision making and optimisation in a business Murray, J.D. 1989, Mathematical Biology, Springer. MAQM235 MATHEMATICS IIA 20cp Examination One 2 hour paper. setting. Topicsiocludeaspectsofforecasting, machine scheduling, Segel, L.A. 1984, Modeling Dynamic Phenomena in Molecular linear programming, decision theory, networks, critical path (MA235Q) Content and Cellular Biology Cambridge. method and inventory control. Use will be made of appropriate Prerequisite MAQM135. (An essay: see noleat the end of the listing for300 level subjects). computer packages. Hours 4 Hours per week for a year. MATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING IOcp Many situations in Economics, Engineering. Experimental and Reference Content Pure Science are reducible to questions of Optimization. The Not offered in 1993. Levin, Richard I. et al 1989, Quantitative ApproacMs to Calculus ofseveral variables, vector calculus. Taylor and Fourier course is introduced by considering some simple examples of Managemenl ,7th edn, N. Y. McGraw·l-hll. this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex MATH317 NUMBER THEORY IOcp series. An analysis of real numbers, sequences, series and A list of subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative functions. functions underlying optimization are then developed. The Not offered in 1993. theory of linear programming, including Bland's anticycling rule Methods to B.Ed courses in the Faculty of Education in 1993 MAQM236 MATHEMATICS lIB IOcp and duality, is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimization in MATH318 TOPOLOGY IOcp The proposed new subject codes have MAQM as prefix. The both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a previous code is given in parentheses. (MA236Q) Prerequisites MATH2040rMATH205. common separation argument. Ekeland's variational principle, These subjects are available only to Bachelor of Education Hours 2 Hours per week for a year. Hours 3 Hours per week in one semester. descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for students. Content unconstrained problems fonn the final section of the course. Examination One 2 hour paper. Vector spaces, linear dependence and independence. linear Text Content mappings, kernel and image, matrices. Linear programming, the University of Newcastle 1990, Lecture Notes, "Optimization". (An essay: see note at theendofthelistingfor300level subjects). Simplex Algorithm, Duality. Applications to transportation, assignment, flow and game theory. References General topology: continuous functions and open sets; topologies Greig, DM. 1980, Optimization Longman, and topological spaces; compactness, connectedness and MAQM237 MATHEMATICSIIC IOcp Hestenes, M.R. 1975. Optimization Theory: The Finite separation properties~ product spaces. Introduction to algebraic (MA237Q) Dimensional Case Wiley. topology: homotopies, covering spaces and the fundamental group. Hours 2 Hours per week for a year. Holmes, R.B. 1972, A Course on Optimization and Best COnlent Approximation Springer. References A study of spherical trigonometry andits application to navigation, Luenberger, D.G. 1969, Optimization by Vector Space Methods Brown, R.L. 1988, Topology. Ellis Horwood. together with the celestial sphere, sideraltimeand solar time. The , Wiley. Christie, D.E. 1976,Basic Topology, Macmillan. development of problem solving skills and structured Luenberger, D.G. 1973, Introduction to Linear and Nonlinear Mendelson, B. 1975,lntroductiontoTopology , 3rd edition Allyn programming concepts associated with the implementation of Programming Addison-Wesley. & Bacon. computer based solutions to mathematical problems. Ponstein, J. 1980, Approaches to the Theory of Optimization, Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Cambridge Univ.Press. Analysis, McGraw-Hill. MAQM335 MATHEMATICS IlIA 20cp (MA335Q) Roberts, R.W. & Vanberg, D.E. 1973, Convex Functions , Notes on Mathematics Level 300 Essay Assignment Prerequisite MAQM235. Academic Press. Students enrolled in Level 300 Mathematics semester subjects Werner, J. 1984, Optimization Theory and Application, Friedr. will be required to complete an essay in an approved topic chosen Hours 4 Hours per week for a year. Vi.Sohn. from the history or philosophy of Mathematics. Con/em Real variables, differentiability, the mean value theorem, Riemann integration and U1e Fundamental theorem of theCalculus. Complex

92 93 L SECTION FIVE BEd (pRlMAR Y EDUCATION AND EARLY CHILDHOOD) SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE PHYSICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS variables, Cauchy's theorem, power and Laurent series, B.Ed(Primary Education) Physics Subject Descriptions Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. singularities, residues and poles, confonnal mappings. Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and Linear Algebra, imler product spaces, eigenspaces, diagonalisation MAQMI46 FOUNDATION STUDIES IN PHYSIOI PHYSICS 101 lOcp one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester. (pRI36Q) ELEMENTARY MATHEMATICS IScp of a quadratic form and a variety of applications. Ordinary Assumed Knowledge HSC 2 unit Mathematics with aresu]t in the Content differential equations of the first degree. Solution by series. The Available only to Bachelor of Education students top 30% of the candidature or equivalent. methods of Frobenius, Bessell and Legendre. Advanced mechanics, electromagnetism, atomic physics, waves, HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year HOUTS 6 Hours per week: for one semester optics and thennal physics will be treated in a rigorous way, MAQM336 MATHEMATICS II1B 15cp Content Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and utilising calculus and stressing the unifying principles in the development of the physical concepts. There will also be a total (MA336Q) This subject provides a background of mathematical content and one three hour paper at the end of the semester of 3 Hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorials. HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year. skills needed by teachers of elementary mathematics. The content Conlem covers sets, elementary number theory, geometry, measurement Texts Con/em This is an introductory course in physics concentrating primarily and probability. As for PHYSI02. Sets and classes of sets, sigma rings and sigma algebras on the core topiCS of classical physics. The lecture course consists of three main strands: construction of the rationals and reals. An introduction to PHYS201 QUANTUM MECHANICS AND mathematical logic. Elementary group theory. Transformation B.Ed (Early Childhood) (I) Mechanics ELECTROMAGNETISM IOcp geometry and non-euclidean geometry. (2) Electromagnetism Prerequisites Recommended entry is from PHYS 103 and MAQM337 MATHEMATICSIIIC 15cp MAQMI47 MATHEMATICSIEC IOcp (3) Waves, optics and thermal physics. MATH 103, but perfonnance to acceptable standard in PHYS 101 (MA337Q) (ECI38Q) There will also be 3 hrs/week of laboratory and tutorial work. and PHYSI02 may substitute for PHYS103, and/or MATH1!1 and MATH112 may substitute for MATH103, with approval of Available only to Bachelor of Education students HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year. Text the Head of Department. HOUTS 4 Hours per week for one semester. Con/em Serway & Faugtm 1989, College Physics, 2nd International eOO, Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester. Content ISBN 0-03-029798-2 Saunders College. Probability distributions, sampling distributions, hypothesis Examination Progressive assessment during semester, and one 2 testing. Topics in operations research including project scheduling, Reference This subject provides a background of mathematical content and hour paper at end of semester. job sequencing, queueing theory, dynamic programming and skills needed by teachers in the Early Childhood field. Topics Gordon & Serway I989,Study Guide with Computer Exercises to Content decision theory. Computer applications to the above topics and to include astudy of elementary set theory ,natural numbers integers Accompany College Physics, 2nd edn ISBN 0-03-023474-3 development in computer aided leaming. and rational numbers, non decimal systems, number patterns. Saunders College. Basic principles of modem quantum mechanics, and elementary geometry, measurement and probability. electromagnetic theory. Laboratory, computational and tutorial MAQM435 MATHEMATICS IV A IOcp PHYSI02 PHYSICS 102 10cp work in these areas. (MA435Q) Prerequisites PHYSIOl or Assumed knowledge of HSC 2 unit TeXIS Available only to Bachelor of Education students. Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the See the Physics 200 Notice Board. HOUTS 2 Hours per week for a year. candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with a mark of at least References 110/150) or MATHIOI. Con/ent To be advised. HOUTS 6 Hours per week for one semester. Combinatorics, block designs, finite geometries, latin squares, magic squares and Hadamard matrices. Groups, rings, ideals, Examination Progressive assessment during the semester, and I'HYS202 MECHANICS AND THERMAL integral domains and fields. one 3 hOUT paper at the end of the semester. PHYSICS 10cp Contenl Prerequisites MATHI02 and PHYSI03 or PHYS101 and MAQM436 MATHEMATICS IVB 10cp PHYSI02 with credits or better and the approval of the Head of (MA436Q) A unifying theme of the lecture course will be 'The Earth in the Universe'. Department. Available only to Bachelor of Education students. The following topics will be studied Hours Up 10 6 Hours per week for one semester. HOUTS 2 Hours per week for a year. Gravity and satellite motion; cosmology; nuclear physics and its Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 Content applications; heat and heat engines; the Earth as a heat engine; hour paper at end of semester. Number theory, prime numbers, congruences, Diophentine atomic physics, optical instruments, electronic devices, radiation Content equations, Gaussian integers. The historical development of detection and safety. Thermal physics, advanced classical mechanics and an mathematics - selected topics. There will also be 3 Hours per week associated with laboratory introduction to relativity theory. and tutorial work. MAQM437 MATHEMATICS IVC 10cp Texts Text (MA437Q) See the Physics 200 Notice Board. Available only to Bachelor of Education students. R.A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers, with modern References physics,3rd Edn.Saunders College, 1990, ISBN 0-03-032409-2. HOUTS 2 Hours per week for a year. To be advised. References Content Study guide to accompany above text. PHYS203 SOLID STATE AND ATOMIC Numerical Analysis, solution of systems of equations, numerical PHYSICS IOcp differentiation and integration, application to ordinary differential PHYSI03 PHYSICS 103 10cp equations. Microcomputing using package software and Prerequisite PHYS201. programming to solve course- related problems. Prerequisite PHYSI02. 94 95 SECI'ION FIVE PHYSICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECI'ION FIVE PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Hours Up to 6 Hours per week for one semester. Conlenl Psychology Subject Descriptions (b) a laboratory component which will mainly deal with neuroanatomy. Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 Electromagnetism. Electronics. PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION I IOcp Texts to be advised. hour paper at end of semester Texis and References Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week References To be advised. Content Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board. lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory) Solid stale physics and applications, atomic physics and Students should retain their Physics 200 texts. PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES IOcp specttoscopy, optics and laser physics. Examination One 2 hour paper. Prerequisite PSYC102 Texts PHYS303 ATOMIC, MOLECULAR AND Content SOLID STATE PHYSICS IOcp Corequisite PSYC20t See the Physics 200 Notice Board. Three written reports. Laboratory work. Introductory Prerequisites PHYS203 and PHYS301. Methodology and Statistics, Biological Foundations; Perception HOUTS 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with References and Learning. laboratory work. Hours 2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone To be advised. semester. Texts Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises. PHYS20S SCIENTIFIC MEASUREMENT Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 General. ConlenJ PRINCIPLES, PROCESSES AND Hours examination. Bootzin, R.R. et al. 1991, Psychology today. An introduction., This subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as APPLICATIONS IOcp Content 7thedn, McGraw-Hill. perception, cognition, and learning. Both animal and human models may be considered. Prerequisite PHYSI02. Atomic and molecular physics. Solid state physics. For Methodology and Statistics The Cognition topiC will examine the experimental evidence Hours Up to 6 Hours per week for one semester. TexJs and References Howell, D.C. 1985, Fundamental statistics for the behavioural supporting various models for human memory. Emphasis will be Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 sciences., Duxbury Press. Refer 10 the Physics 300 notice board. placed on applied aspects of cognition and memory especially in hour paper at end of semester. Martin, D.W. 1991, Doing psychology experiments., 3rd edn,. Students should retain their Physics 200 texts. psychological dysfunction. Brooks/Cole. Content The Perception section will deal primarily with audition. The Introductory course in analog and digital instrumentation, signal PHYS304 STATISTICAL PHYSICS Other texts to be advised. following topics will be covered; structure of the auditory system, processing principles and computer applications. Emphasis will AND RELATIVITY IOcp SUbjective dimensions of sound, sound localisation, elementary PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION II IOcp be on laboratory and environmental applications. Prerequisites PHYS202 and MATH201. aspects of speech perception. Prerequisite PSYCIOI This subject is recommended for students in all areas of science HOUTS 2 lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone The learning topic will explore ideas about the nature and wishing to gain an understanding of the principles and applications semester. Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week mechanism of associative learning. The conditions under which of basic electronic instrumentation and computer techniques lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory) learning occurs, the nature of the representations underlying Examinalion Examinations(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 learning will be described. The implications of these ideas forthe Texts Hours examination. Examination One 2 hour paper. application ofleaming theory to issues such as drug tolerance and See the Physics 200 Notice Board. Con/em ContenJ addiction will be considered. References Statistical physics. Relativity. Three written reports. Laboratory work. Development, Cognition, Texts Social Psychology. To be advised. Texts and References Goldstein, H.B. 1984, Sensation & perception,. Belmont Cal. Texts Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board. Wadsworth. (or other general perception text dealing with PHYS301 MATHEMATICAL METHODS AND General QUANTUM MECHANICS IOcp Students should retain their Physics 200 texts. audition). Bootzin, R.R. et aI. 1991, Psychology today. An introduction., Prerequisites PHYS201, MATH201 and MATH203. References PHYS30S NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND 7th eOO, McGraw-Hill. Hours21ectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial per week forone Baddeley, A. 1983, Your memory: A user's guide., Penguin ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM IOcp Other texts to be advised. semester. Books. Prerequisite PHYS302. Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 PSYC201 FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY IOcp Baddeley, A. 1990,Humanmemory: Theory and practise. Hove, Hours2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one Hours examination. UK: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. semester. Prerequisite PSYCI02 ConJent S1. James,J. & Schneider, W. 1991, MEL LAB: Experiments in Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with perception, cognition, social psychology and human factors. Mathematical methods. Quantum mechanics. Hours examination. laboratory work. Pittsburg, PA: Psychology Software Tools. Texts and References Content Examination Students will be assessed by continuous assessment Schwartz, B. 1990. Psychology of learning and behaviour, 3rd throughout the semester. Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board. Nuclear physics. Advanced Electromagnetism. cdn, New York, W.W. Norton. Conlenl Students should retain their Physics 200 texts. Texts and References (i) a selection of topiCS in experimental design, parametric tests, PSYC203 DEVELOPMENTAL AND SOCIAL Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board. PHYS302 ELECTROMAGNETISM AND introduction to analysis variance and related topics, and PROCESSES IOcp ELECTRONICS IOcp Students should retain their Physics 200 texts. ii) arangeoftopics aimedat elucidating the anatomy ,physiology Prerequisite PSYCI02 Prerequisites PHYS201 and MATH201. and biochemistry of the brain. The unit will be accompanied Corequisile PSYC201 Hours2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone by Hours 2hours per weekforone semester together with laboratory semester. (a) a tutorial series in which practical experience will be work. Examination Exarnination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 given in the application of statistical methods using Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises. Hours examination. computer-assisted statistical packages and 96 97 L SECfION FIVE PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Content Students are encouraged to read widely in any chapters on References PSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp This subject will cover such topics as Social Cognition, abnormal behaviour in post 1987 texts. Students are expected to read a wide ranee of cunent literature in Prerequisite PSYC201 Interpersonal Relationships and Developmental Themes. the area chosen for the research project. PSYC301 ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS FOR Corequisite PSYC301 The Social Cognition topic will continue from the study of social PSYCHOLOGY IOcp Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. behaviours in PSYCl 02 and will examine the cognitive processes PSYC303 BASIC PROCESSES I IOcp Examination By a combination of fonnal examination and underlying these behaviours, fOCUSsing on attributions f orevents Prerequisites PSYC201 , PSYC202 and PSYC203 Prerequisite PSYC201 and understanding of social situations, and attitude structures and practical workshop assignments. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. Corequisile PSYC301 change. Examination One 3 hour exam paper. Content Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. The Interpersonal Relationships topic win introduce basic Content This unit uses the topic of motivation to provide an integration of processes in group dynamics. Examination One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory report. a wide variety of explanatory models andresearchin psychology, TIris course consists of the following topics: The Cognitive Development topic will introduce students to the Content and to put the subject into acontext of philosophical and theoretical experimental study of developmental change in perception, (a) Experimental design principles in psychologyrangingfrom TIris subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as development generally. A number of motivational models are memory, categorisation and problem solving. natura1istic observation to experimental and quasi­ perception, cognition, memory and learning and the effects of studied (biolOgical, learned behaviour, cognition and social experimental designs. including single-case studies. ecology) and applied to work and clinical problems. Problem TexI early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt (b) Practical computation techniques for the analysis of with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be based workshops will be integrated with the lectures and regular Small, M. Y. 1990,. Cognitivedevelopment. San Diego, Harcourt, experimental designs in psychological research, using considered. The subject will be supplemented with a laboratory assignments will be based on these workshops. Brace & Jovanovich. MlNIT AB, BMDP and SPSSJX. program which will run over 4-5 weeks. References Readings and references will be available during the References To be advised. (c) Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques such as References lecture series. Multiple Linear Regression, Discriminant Analysis and Baddeley, A. (1990). Human memory theory and practice. PSYC204 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES Ukp Cluster Analysis. PSYC307 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS Erlbaum. Prerequisite PSYC102 IN PSYCHOLOGY I IOcp (d) The MEL laboratory programs will be used to collect data Frisby, J. (1979). Seeing. Oxford Univ. Press. Corequisite PSYC201 in the tutorial periods. Prerequisite PSYC201 Semler, R & Blake, R. (1985), Perception. Knopf. HoUTS 2hours perweekforone semester together with laboratory References Corequisite PSYC301 work. Christensen, L.B. 1988, Experimenl(ll methodology. Boston: PSYC304 BASIC PROCESSES 2 IOcp Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. Examination One 2 hour exam plus laboratory exercises. Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus hurdle requirements. paper All yn & Bacon. Prerequisite PSYC201 Content Keppel, G. & Zedeck, S. 1989. Data analysis for research Corequisite PSYC301 Content designs. New York: W.H. Freeman & Co. This subject examines the ways in which individuals differ Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. This unit will examine the theory underlying psychological test through a study of such topics as models of personality. patterns Howell, D.C. 1987, Statistical methods for psychology. construction, and will introduce a range of psychological tests of abnormal behaviour, methods of assessing these differences. Boston:Duxburg Press. Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report. through practicum sessions in which training will be given intest Abnormal Behaviour: !tis intended that this topic should introduce Winer, B.J.• Brown, D.R. & Michels, K.M. 1991,.Slatistical Conlent administration and interpretation. The underlying basis of intetviewing as an assessment technique will also be studied and the student to some of the main approaches to the understanding principles in experimenl(li design .• New York.: McGraw-Hill, This subject will extend the examination of basic processes of abnormal behaviour. Inc. covered in PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by training will be given in inteIViewing techniques. The student should be able to demonstrate understanding of (a) St. James, J. & Schneider, W. 1991, MEL LAB: Experiments in either a laboratory or workshop progrnm run over about 4-5 References the historical background of mental illness (b) the basic diagnostic perception, cognition, social psychology and human factors. weeks. Anastasi. Psychological testing. MacMillan. categories of psychiatric disorder (c) approaches to mental health Pittsburgh,PA: Psychology Software Tools. References Keats. Skilled interviewing. ACER. care. A series ofreadings will be recommended as the course progresses. Personality: The topic will examine a number of prominent PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT IOcp PSYC308 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS approaches to personality theory, research, and assessment. Prerequisite PSYC201 PSYC30S INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES lOcp IN PSYCHOLOGY 2 IOcp Students will be expected to read assigned sections of the Corequisite PSYC301 Prerequisite PSYC201 Prerequisite PSYC201 recommended text, and to complete simple exercises and present material in seminar sessions from time to time. Hours 2 hours per week for the full year. Corequisite PSYC301 Corequisile PSYC301 Text Examination Submission of a written report containing Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. introduction, methods, results and discussion not more than unrty Examination Assessment will be by a combination of formal Hall, C.S., & Lindzey, G. 1985, Imroduction to theories of Examination One 2 hour exam paper, and a laboratory report. pages in length due early October. examination, essays and written reports on the practical experience. personality. Wiley. Content Comem or This subject will include cognitive development and two themes Comem The project consists of an experiment or series of experiments, This course will examine a number of different areas in which Potkay, C.R. & Allen, B.P. 1986, Personality lheory, research in social development. The subject will be complemented by a surveys or tests designed to explore a hypothesis. Each student Psychology is applied. It will examine behavioural health care and application. Brooks/Cole. laboratory run over about 4-5 weeks. will be supervised by an academic staff member of the Department with particular emphasis on community-based interventions in References References of Psychology. The list of research areas will be available at the establishing behavioural change. In addition, topics in Diagnoslic and statislical manual ofmental disorders (DSM-III­ beginning of the academic year. Students are advised that this Small, M.J. (1990). Cognitive development. San Diego: Harcourt, psychological pathology, psychotherapy and abnormal R). subject is a prerequisite for entry into an Honours year in Brace and Jovanovich. psychology will be covered. The unit will be complemented with Psychology. some practical experience in applied settings. (Available on short loan in the Library). A series of readings will also be recommended as the course progresses.

98 99 , r

SECTION FIVE PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

References compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral vary from year to year depending on staff availability. There is Computer Science Subject Descriptions presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars King,N. & Remenyi, A. (eds.) (1986).HealthcaJ'e: A beha-v;oural some overlap with PSYC401. vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One approach. Grone & Slratton. Texis and References To be advised. COMPI0l COMPUTER SCIENCE 1 seminar may bereplaced witha practical placement andassociated Additional references will be made available throughout the essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403. Entry to this subject by sludenls olMr than Ilwse enrolled in the course. PSYC404 PSYCHOLOGY 404 50cp BCompSc, BE(Computer Engineering) and BlnfSc degree Texts and References To be advised. PrerequisiJe Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or progrtJm3 is limited by quota. See 1M Faculty Secretary lor PSYC309 TOPICS IN NEURAL SCIENCE IOcp BSe (psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full delails. PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects PrerequisiJe PSYC201 (THESIS) 40cp Introduction to the following aspects of computer science: 1be PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. alleas! 40 credit points of Psychology design of algorithms. The theory of algorithms. How algorithms Corequisite PSYC301 PrerequisiJe A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years at the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points are executed as programs by acomputer. The functions of system Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. of a BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) including the subjects PSYCI 01 of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301. software (compilers and operating systems). Applications of and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 Examination One 2 - 3 hour examination and laboratory Corequisite PSYC403 computers. Social issues raised by computers. An extensive level including PSYC201 , and at least 60 credit points of introduction to programming in procedural and functional assessment. Hours 16 hours per week for the full year Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. programming languages. Conlenl Candidates must have obtained at least a Credit grade or better in Examinalion Reports will be assessed by two or more members A seriesoftopics at the cellular and molecular level will examine each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 of the Department. Placement will be assessed on the basis of COMP201 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES 5cp the structural and functional mechanisms responsible for neural and PSYC302. supeIVisor's report and a student essay. Basic data structures afl(hd~orithms are investigated. Topics processing, synaptic communication, the physiology of neuronal Corequisite PSYC401 Content covered will include elementary data structures, abstract data networks and examine how neurons and networks develop and Hours 12 hours per week for the full year types, hashing. search trees, heaps, and sorting. If time permits, function in the brain. PSYC404 comprises two-thirds of the fmal year of the BA Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by two (Psych) orBSc (psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol more advanced topics in analysis of algorithms will also be References members of the Department oththan the SupeIVisor. in PSYC403 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in covered. Thg following texts are available on short loan (and in the the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists of medical reading room) and in the Auchmuty Library. They can Conlenl two equally-weighted sections a piece of original empirical COMP202 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 5cp PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. also be ordered from the bookshop. Additional readings will be research,andaplacement. Theresearch project will besupervised This SUbject covers the fundamental principles of computer Full-time students enrol in PSYC401 as well. Part-time students made known throughout the course. by a member of the Psychology Department and must be in an system organisation and architecture. Topicscovered will include complete PSYC40t in the first year and PSYC402in the second. Kandel, E.R. 1985, Principles of neural science (2nd edn), applied area. A report in APA fonnat, of approximately twenty instruction-set design, CPU components, microprogramming, PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and Elsevier. five pages, is required. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss memory hierarchy, memory management, lID, concurrency and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. pipelining and an introduction to parallel architectures. A selection Alberts, B., Bray, D., et aI. 1989, Molecular biology of the cell afonnal presentation of this research and must be in APA fonnat. The placement component involves introductory seminars on of architecture case studies will also be discussed. (2nd edn). Garland. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supeIVised by ethical and professional issues~ supervised experience in a Siegel, G., Agranoff, B., Albers, R., & Molinoff, P. 1989, Basic a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly community facility in the Newcastle area; and the submission of COMP203 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE Neurochemistry, 4th edn, Raven Press. advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff an essay relating the practical activities to psychological theory members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies The course isdivided into two sections. The first section provides Kuffler, S.W., Nicholls, J.G., & Martin, A.R., 1984, From and technique. must be through official departmental channels. an introduction to computer organisation and assembly language Neuron to Brain, 2nd edn,Sinauer Ass. Pub. Texts and References To be advised. programming. Topics covered include data representation, Texts and References To be advised. computer structures, registers, addressing modes, instruction PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 sets, subroutines and the use of stacks. The second section of the (SEMINARS) 40cp PSYC403 PSYCHOLOGY 403 30cp course is an introduction to operating system principles. Topics Prerequisile A completed BA or BSc or three complete years of Prerequisite Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or covered include process management synchronisation and aBA(Psych) or BSc(psych) including the subjects PSYCI 01 and BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full resource allocation. PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects including PSYC201 , and at least 60 credit points of Psychology PSYCIOI and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology COMP204 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 5cp at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates at the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points SEMANTICS must have obtained alleast a Credit grade or beuerin each offour of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301. Examination of the major concepts which underlie modem 300level Psychology subject'including PSYC301 andPSYC302. Hours 8 hours per week for the full year programming languages. A variety of programming styles will Hours 12 hours per week for the full year Examinalion To be advised be compared, including imperative, object-oriented, functional, and logic programming. Representative languages will be Examination To be advised ConJenJ introduced to iIlustrate the concepts behind each style. Content PSYC403 comprises one third of the final year of the BA (Psych) Programming design issues such as data encapsulation, PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. or BSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in inConnation hiding, and inheritance will also be studied. Languages Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students PSYC404 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the studied chosen from C, C++. Lisp, Modula-2, Pascal, Prolog, complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC403 consists of three Scheme, Smalltalk:, Ada. PSYC40t consists of five seminar series, including one seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical compulsory unit on theoretical issues in Psychology, a choice of issues in psychology, and a choice of two optional units. Each COMP205 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING Scp two units in mathematical or physiological Psychology, and a unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation Systems programming for those already proficient in Pascal. choice of two units in applied or social Psychology. Each unit will is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral Elementary Unix system calls and interfaces to other languages include seminars at which altendance and participation is presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars such as Pascal and Assembly Language. Use of UNIX software system tools such as "make", "lint" and "indent". 100 10)

L SECTION FIVE COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FIVE PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

COMPl06 THEORY OF COMPUTATION Scp programming and greedy algorithms. The analysis of the Information Science Subject Description Philosophy Subject Description Anintroductioototheoreticalcomputerscience,coveringmaterial perfonnance and the correctness of algorithms is emphasised.. in the areas of formal languages, automata theory and Fundamental graph algorithms are also studied, including INFOIOI INTRODUCTION TO minimum spanning trees, and shortest paths. A selection oftopics PHlL207 SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE AND computability. INFORMATION SYSTEMS IOcp from algorithms for parallel computers. computational geometry. SCIENTIFIC METHOD IOcp Hours 3 Lecture hours and two tutorial hours COMPl12 INTRODUCTION TO Scp string matching and sorting networks are also covered, as time Prerequisiles For PHIL207 either PHiLIOI or 40 cp in any PROGRAMMING permits. Examination To be advised subjects already passed. For PfDL307, 30 cp at PIDL200 level. Content This subject is not available to candidates for 1M Bachelor of COMPJ06 COMPUTER GRAPHICS IOcp Hours 3 hours per week for one semester and 1 tutorial hour. Computer Science degree, or 10 students who have passed or Of all the innovations over the last 10-15 years in the public and Examin4lion Assessment by assignments to be submiUedduring This subject will cover advanced computer graphics topics with been exemptedjromCOMPlOl. private sectors, the computerisalion of infonnation systems has semester and essay to be submitted at the end of semester relevant mathematical and programming techniques and an arguably had the greatest impact on the organisation and An introduction to structured programming and the design of overview of graphics hardware design. Topics include: algorithms using a procedural language. penonnance of work. The computerisalion of such systems Content geometrical transformations; 3 D modelling and object hierarchy; began on large and expensive mainframe computers and then standards - OKS, PHIOS; raster algorithms; antialiasing; region COMPl41 COGNITIVE SCIENCE IOcp moved to smaller and less powerful mini-computers. Today, What is the logical structure of scientific method? Is it justified? filling; CUIVes and patches, hidden surface removal algorithms; many comprehensive infonnation systems are available on desktop How do theory and method interact in laboralory practice? How An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of models and shading and texture mapping; diffuse and specular reflection; personal computers. These so-called microcomputers can be is scientific knowledge justified? Is science a unique form of metaphors of mind, language, knowledge and perception used by colour modelling; growth models; fractals and particle systems; found in all organisations irrespective of size, and in large knowledge? What roles, if any, do values play in the construction various disciplines and the potential applications of those models animation techniques; graphics hardware architectures. organisations co-exist within the mainframe environment via of scientific knowledge? and metaphors by artificial intelligence researchers, computer data communication networks. scientists and engineers. COMPJ07 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING IOcp An important part of a scientific education is gaining a critical PRINCIPLES Microcomputers are used very differently to the more powerful understanding of the nature of scientific method and scientific COMPl99 PROJECT Scp mainframe and mini-computers. Although in large corporations reasoning. Tltiscourse will introduce studentstoscientificmethod The subject comprises lectures in first semester plus a major transaction processing and day-to-day operations are still the and reasoning by examining several key episodes in the A project in computer science for students enrolled in the Diploma assignment in second semester. After a brief explanation of the domain of the larger computers, micros are becoming increasingl y development of science from both a historical and a critical of Computer Science program nature and life-cycle of large software systems, the software used in such corporations as aids to decision-making for the perspective. Case studies typically include the Copernican crisis which they have created, and the desirable properties of tactical and strategic needs of lower, middle and upper Revolution in astronomy, the transition from Aristotelean to COMPJOI COMPILER DESIGN IOcp well-designed systems, the lectures explore the nature of stable management. Small organisations often rely totally on Galilean-Newtonian science and the Mendelian-Darwinian Introduction tothe theory of grammars. Lexicalanalysers, parsing systems in the natural world and in engineering and consider how microcomputers for all aspects of their operations. The power of Revolution. Students will be critically introduced to deductive. humans think about, remember and create complex systems. This techniques, object code generation. Global and peephole microcomputers is increasing exponentiaU y while their purchase inductive and probabilistic reasoning, to the use of models and leads to the re-evaluation ofthe principles and techniques used in optimisation. Routine support, error management. Scanner and price is decreasing in real tenns. Areas such as retailing, idealisalions in science and to the complex relations between the construction of major software systems, offering new insights parser generators. manufacturing, engineering and financial services have theory and experiment. (Note: The basic presentation of material into the concepts of modularity and hierarchical structure. experienced enonnous change underthe impact of microcomputer will be in elementary theoretical terms and a background in COMPJ02 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IOcp technology. mathematics or physics will not be required. Subsequently. COMPJ08 OPERATING SYSTEMS IOcp individual students may follow the case studies al amathematical An introductory oveIView to Artificial Intelligence, covering Computers have made it possible to store and retrieve massive An introduction to operating system structure and design. Topics and theoretical depth appropriate to their training. Students with some or all of the following topics: history of AI; game playing; amounts of data, the 'information age' is now a reality. This include: advanced synchronisation techniques, deadlock detection, a non-science background will be encouraged to pursue more knowledge representation; search techniques; natural language course introduces the skills and concepts needed to fully exploit philosophical issues.) processing; expert systems; automatic deduction; theorem memory management including virtual storage techniques, the power of computers. proving; computer vision; computer learning; philosophical, multiprocessing and file systems. The emphasis will be on Texts practical operating systems, and where possible reference will be After completion of the subject, students will understand how psychological, and social issues. Chalmers, A.F. What is this Thing Called Science? Uni of Qld made to existing systems currently in use. and why organisations build and use infonnation systems, will be able to document information flow through particular systems, Press, 1976 COMPJOJ COMPUTER NETWORKS IOcp COMPJ91 SPECIAL TOPIC I IOcp and will be able to use the microcomputer as a personal support Clendirmen, F.J. Perspectives of Scientific Explanation An introduction to data communication networks. Topics include tool. References data transmission, transmission media, network protocols, ISOI A topic of contemporary relevance in computer science. The course provides a solid grounding in computers and their use, OSI, public data networks, local area networks and distributed Feyerabend, P.K. Against Method Verso, London, 1978 which today is important for aU students, irrespective of the systems. discipline which they are studying. Giere, R.N. Understanding Scienlific Reasoning Holt, Reinhart and Winston, New York, 1984 COMPJ04 DATABASE DESIGN IOcp Course Components Toulmin, S., Goodfield, J. The Fabric of lhe Heavens Pelican INFOlOl comprises four major components A basic introduction to database systems, with particularemphasis Books, 1%3 on relational database systems. Topics covered will include: 1 Microcomputers as Personal Support Tools (MPST) Toulmin, S. and Goodfield, J. The Architecture ofMalter Pelican basic concepts and terminology, types of systems (hierarchic, 2 Information Systems (IS) Books, 1965 relational, network, inverted list), data design, relational theory, relational algebra, relational calculus, data integrity/recovery, 3 Computers and the Law (CTL) security, concurrency, distributed systems. 4 Behavioural Aspects of Wonnation Systems (BAIS) Text To be advised COMPJOS ALGORITHM DESIGN AND IOcp ANALYSIS Important methods of algorithm design are covered in this subject, including the divide-and-conquer paradigm, dynamic 102 103 STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SEctIoN FIVE SAS Institute Inc. 1985. SAS Introductory Guide, 3rd edn, SAS STAT301 STATISTICAL INFERENCE IOcp Text Inst, Cary NC. Statistics Subject Descriptions Freund,J.E. &Simon,G.A. 1992.ModernElemenlaryStatistics, PrerequisiJes MalhemaJicalStaJistics (STA T201 )andMA TH201 Weisberg, S. 1985, Applied Linear Regression, 2nd edn, Wiley. (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATH201, i.e. IOcp (8th edn), Prentice-Hall. STATIOI INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS multivariable calculus). References STAT203 QUEUES & SIMULATION 5cp Not to count for credit with STATI03. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester Bhattachanya, A.K. & Johnson, R.1977 ,Statistics,Principles& Prerequisites 'This course does not assume knowledge of calculus Prerequisite MATH112 or equiValent Content Methods. Wiley. or matrix algebra For the BSc degree STAT204 would also have to be taken. This Freedman,D., Pisani, R. et al, 1991 Statistics 2nd edn, Norton. Statistical inference is the drawing of conclusions from data. The course covers topiCS specifically required for Computer Science HOUTS 3 lecture Hours, I laboratory hour and I tutorial hour per course covers likelihood-based estimation, other methods of Meyer, P.L. 1977 Introductory Probability and Statistical but is also relevant for Statistics and other disciplines. week. The course is offered in Semester I and Semester 2 point and interval estimation,hypothesis testing and introductory Applications, 2nd edn, Addison-Wesley. PW'pose To introduce students to Ute principles of study design, HoW's 2lecture/tutorial Hours per week for one semester Bayesian inference. data analysis and interpretation; Ute statistical computing program IOcp Content References STATlOI MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS MINITAB will be used extensively Prerequisites Either MATH103 or STAT1 01 and MATHI12 (or Queues, random number generation, Poisson processes, simulation Larson, H.I. 1982, Introduction 10 Probability Theory and Content a level of mathematics equivalent to MATHI12) using MINITAB. Statislicallnference, 3rd edn, Wiley. Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. HoW's3 lecture Hours and 1 laboratory!tutorial hourperweek for Text Hogg, R.V. and Craig, A. T. 1989,Inlroduction to Matmmatical Sampling and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive one semester Ross, S.M. 1991,A course in simulation MacMillan. Statistics, 4th edn, MacMillan. and exploratory data analysis. Probability. Statistical inference: Silvey, S.D. 1978, Statistical Inference, Otapman and Hall. sampling distributions, confidence intervals and hypo~esiS t~sts Content References for means and proportions. Correlation and regresSlon. Time Random variables, probability, density and distribution functions, Morgan, B.I.T. 1984, Elements of Simulation, Chapman and Press, S.I. 1989, Bayesian Statistics. Wiley Interscience. series analysis. Chi·square tests for frequency tables. expectation. Likelihood, point and interval estimation. Tests of Hall. STAT302 STUDY DESIGN IOcp Text significance. Stochastic Processes, Wiley. Prerequisites Mathematical Statistics (STA T20 I) and Regression Moore, 0.5. & McCabe, G.P. TexJ STAT204 NON-PARAMETRIC STATISTICS 5cp Analysis (STATI02). Introduction to the Practice of Statistics Freeman, 1989 Hogg. R.V. & Tams, EA. 1988, Probability and Statistical Inferences, Macmillan. For theB.Sc. degree STATI03 would also have to be taken. Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester References Prerequisites STAT201 or STATI01 and MATH112 (or Contenl Freedman, D., Pisani, R., et al. Statistics 2nd Edn Norton, 1991 Reference Kalbfleisch, J.G. 1985, Probability and Statistical Inference equivalent) This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing Staudte, R. Seeing, Through Statistics Prentice-Hall, 1990 Volumes I and II, 2nd edn Springer. HoW's 2lecture/1aboratory Hours per week for one semester data: experimental studies and non-experimental studies including surveys. The principles of experimental design are illustrated by Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. et al MINrrAB Handbook 2nd edn Larsen, R.I. and Marx, M.L. 1986, An Introduction to Content studying completely randomised designs, randomised block Duxbury. 1985 Mathematical Statistics and its Applications, 2nd edn, Prentice Methods foranal ysing categorical and ranked data Randomization designs and factorial designs. For surveys the topics include: Miller, R.B. MINrrAB Handbookfor Businl!ssand Economics. Hall. J tests. simple random sampling, stratified and cluster sampling, ratio PWS-Kent, Boston, 1988) and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS IOcp References Wonnacott, T.H, & Wonnacott, R.J. Introductory Statistics for practical problems and the statistical packages BMDP and SAS Sprent, P. 1989. AppJied nonparametric statistical methods, Business and Economics 4th edn Wiley. 1990 Prerequisites STATIOl or STATIO 1 and MATH112 (or , are used to carry out analyses. Chapman and Hall. equivalent) References STATI03 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICAL HoW's 2 lecture Hours. 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week STATISTICS IOcp STATl05 ENGINEERING STATISTICS 5cp Barnett, V. 1986, EJemenlS of sampling theory, Hodder and for one semester Stoughton. Not to count for credit with STAnot. Credit cannot be obtained for both STATZOI and STATZ05. Conlent PrerequisiLe MATH112 or MATHI02. This subject is mainly Cochran, W.G. 1977, Sampling Techniques, 3rd edn, Wiley. Adllisory Prerequisite or corequisites MATHI 02 or MATHI 03 This course covers the practical and Uteoretical aspects of multiple taken by students in Mechanical or Industrial Engineering but is Neter,I .• Wassennan, W. etal. 1990, Applied Linear Statistical HoW's 3 lecture hours, 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per regression analysis, including the assumptions underlying ~ormal also available to other students Models, 3rd edn, Irwin. week for one semester. linear models, use of matrix notation, prediction and confidence HoW's 21ecture/laboralory Hours per week for one semester Cochran. W.G. and Cox. G.M. 1964, Experimenlal Designs, PW'pose To introduce more mathematically interested students intervals, stepwise methods,and examination of the adequacy of Wiley. to probability and statistical inference, including th~ P?nciples of models. The statistical computer packages MINIT AB and SAS Content study design, data anal ysis and interpretation of stabsbcal results. are used. Basic probability theory and principles of statistical inference. Box, G.E.P.• Hunter, W.G. et al. 1978.Statisticsfor Experimenters: an introduction to design, data analysis and model building , Text Distributions. Error propagation. Quality controL Contenl Wiley. Neter, I. , Wasserman W, and Kutner. M.H. 1990,AppliedLinear References Scales of measurement; summarising data Statistical Models, 3rd edn, Irwin. Probability laws; condiLional probability Chatfield, C. 1983, Statistics/or Technology, 3rd edn, Chapman STATJ03 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS IOcp References and Hall. Probability distributions and sample statistics Prerequisite MathematicalStatistics (STA T201) and Regression Bowerman, B.L.. O'Connell, R.T. et al1986, Linear statistical Guttman, I.. Wilks, S.S. and Hunter 1.5. 1982, Introductory Analysis (ST A T202). In addition itis strongly recommended that The centra11imit theorem and applications models. an applied approach, Duxbury. Engineering Statistics, 3rd edn, Wiley. students have passed Statistical Inference (STA n01). Study design; surveys and randomised experiments Draper, N.R. and Smith, H. 1981, Applied Regression Analysis, Hogg, R.V. and Ledolter, I. 1987, Engineering Statistics, Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester Confidence intervals and hypothesis tests Wiley. MaCmillan. Content Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan. T.A. 1985, MINlTAB Correlation and regression; least squares The course covers the theory of generalized linear models and Interences from contingency tables. Handbook, 2nd edn, Duxbury. illustrates the ways in which methods for analysing continuous. !O5 104 SECTION FIVE STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION SIX

binary. and categorical data fit into this framework. Topics Specific topics covered include the Deming philosophy, include the exponential family of distributions, maximum understanding variability through statistical thinking, qUality likelihood estimation, sampling distributions for goodness-of-fit implementation matrices, qUality function deployment, the seven statistics, linear models for continuous data (regression and tools of quality control, quality improvement teams, the POCA analysis of variance), logistic regression. and log-linear models. cycle, standards, the role of management, basic statistical methods Students will implement these methods using various computer and control charts. packages, including GUM. Texts To be advised. Texl Dobson, A.J. 1990, An Introduction to Generalized Linear Modelling, Chapman & HaIl References McCullagh. P. and Neider J.A. 1989, Generalized Linear Models, 2nd edn, Chapman & Hall. Aitkin, M. et al. 1989, Statistical Modelling in GUM, Oxford Science Publications. Healy. M.J.R. 1988, GUM: an introduction, Clarendon.

STAT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS IOcp Prerequisite Malhemalical Statistics (STA T201 land Regression Analysis (STA T202). In addition it is strongly recommended that students have passed Statistical Inference (STA1'301). SOME RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester Content Advisory Information Only BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES This course is about the theory and practice of time series analysis The choice of subjects now offered by Ute Faculty of Science and Students wishing to study Biological Sciences are advised to - the analysis of data collected at regular intervals in time (or Mathematics has expanded morethan two-fold with the advent of develop capacities in a broad range of the basic sciences, as well space). Topics covered include: stationary processes, ARMA semesterisation. In order to provide some guidance to students, as in the Biological Sciences. Additionally, students' interests models, models for periodic phenomena, analysis using each Department has provided one or more possible degree can change during their University training, and it is advisable to MINITAB, SAS and other time series packages. patterns which would lead to a suitable professional qualification undertake a first-year program which could lead in many in their discipline. The patterns are not prescriptive. except in so directions, depending upon individual experiences and interests Tex' far as they meet the requirements of the various degree rules. developed during the first year at University. Students intending Cryer, J.D. 1986, Time Series Analysis, Duxbury Press. Students may vary their selection in confonnity with degree to major in Biology should consider Program A. Those wishing rules, and prerequisite and corequisite requirements as detailed in References to majorin Biology and another discipline might elect to complete the semester subject tables. All degree courses must aggregate to Programs B or C. Box, G.E.P. and Jenkins, G.M. 1970, Time Series Analysis: 240 credit points or 320 points for the four year Bachelor of Biological Sciences - Program A Forecasting and Control, Holden Day. Science (psychology) degree. Year 1 Fuller, W.A. 1976,/ntroductionloSlalislicalTimeSeries, Wiley. All semester subjects are identified by a code which includes up Newton, H.I. 1988, T1MESLAB, A Time Series Analysis to four leUers representing the department offering the subject, BIOLIOI, BIOLI02, CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 and either Laboratory, Wadsworth & Brooks/Cole. followed by three numbers, the first of which signifies the level MATHSl11/112 or MATHSI02/103, plus 2 other subjects from (100, 200, 300, 4(0) at which the subject is being presented. Level 100. (For Environmental Biology select GE£XJ101 and GEOGI02). STAT310 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT lOcp The following programs have been set out as recommendations Prerequisites MNGT111 and subjects at Level 200 totalling 40 for inclusion in the first, second and third calendar years of a pass Years 2 &: 3 credit points chosen from subjects offered by the Departments of degree. Some programs include a separate postgraduate fourth The table below indicates the Biological Science subjects which Economics, Management and/or Statistics. year for the Honours degree. should be studied to enable students to develop expertise in Hours 2 lecture hours per week. AVIATION particular specialised areas. The indicated subjects are the minimum which should be studied. Additional subjects in Content Students with Commercial Pilot and Airline Transport Licence Biological Sciences or other disciplines must be taken to satisfy Total Quality Management (TQM) is an all embracing will berequired to enrol in all SUbjects, but will be exempted from subject requirements for the degree. It should benoted that not all management and employee involvement philosophy directed any sections which they may have completed to the University 300 level Biological Science subjects will be offered in the one towards continuous improvement in the production of goods and standard. These exemptions will be decided in consultation with year. Students wishing to do specific subjects should check when services. Students who complete this course will learn to Utelecturer concerned, who may request afonn of assessment on they are scheduled before enrolling in their second year. interview. The course is available only by attendance on campus. understand the fundamental principles of Total Quality Year 4 Management (TQM), choose appropriate statistical techniques Students are advised to consult the Departmental Noticeboard BIOlAOI and BIOL402 for improving processes and write reports to management and liaise with the Head of the Department concerning complicated describing processes and recommending ways to improve them. COurse program enquiries.

106 107

b SECTION SIX RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS SECfION SIX RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS

Area of Biology Biological Sciences SUbjects The study of Chemistry is open to all students who havequalified Year 2 Science and Mathematics. TIlis program can be taken to Major Animal Physiology BIOL201, 202, 204, 205, 301, for admission into the University. However, those who have not CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM23 I , CHEM241, plus four other level without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201 302,305,312. studied sufficient sciences at school are advised to do some self­ subjects from Level 200. GEOG202,GEOO301andGEOG302,butforHonoursaMeth~ preparation before beginning Level 100 Chemistry subjects. Animal Science BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 207, stream (GEOG201 plusGEOG301 orGEOG202 plusOEOG302 Details on expected backgrounds and suggested remedial reading Year 3 301,302,305,312. is necessary). Employment opportunities are good but diverse. are provided under the appropriate Levell 00 subject descriptions. Choose at least four equivalent full subjects from the Level 300 Major in Human Geography Biochemistry BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 301, The Chemistry Department offers courses over the whole range chemistry list and up to four other subjects from Level 300. The 302,305,307,309,310. Year 1 of the subject. A basic chemical education is available in the inclusion of at least two of CHEM311, CHEM321, CHEM331, Cell & Molecular Biology BIOL20I, 204, 205, 301, 305, traditional areas of analytical, inorganic, organic and physical CHEM341 is recommended. GEOG\OJ and GEOG102 307,309,310. chemistry together with some more diverse applied subjects. Year 4 Choose six other subjects recommended from Level 100 to Developmental Biology BIOL202, 204, 205, 206, 301, Thus students interested in Environmental Science will find CHEM401 and CHEM402. comply with Bachelor of Science degree requirements. relevant Chemistry subjects (e.g. CHEM261, CHEM361) to 302,304,307,312. Year 2 include in their program. Chemistry - Program B Environmental Biology BIOL202, 206, 207, 302, 303, Year 1 GEOG202, GEOG207 and GEOG20S. 304,310,311. The flexible system of subjects offered by the Department allows a student to major in Chemistry on a broad level or to specialise CHEMIOl andCHEMI02; eitherMATIl111/1120r MATHI02! Choose five other subjects from Level 200. Genetics BIOL20l, 204, 205, 207, 301, in certain areas of the subject and to combine these with relevant 103; and four other subjects from Level 100. Year 3 305,307,309,310,311. subjects offered by other Departments. Thus a student interested Year 2 GEOG302, GE0G306, GEOG309, and GEOG315 Immunology BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 301, primarily in Physical Chemistry may elect to choose Physics and CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM231, CHEM241, CHEM261 and 305,309,310,312. Mathematics subjects as complements. Conversely, students Choose four other subjects from Level 300. three other subjects from Level 200. Molecular Biology BIOL20I, 204, 205, 301, 305, majoring in other Departments may choose companion Olemistry Year 4 subjects relevant to thcirinterests. Thus some courses in Analytical Year 3 307,309,310. GEOG401 and GOOG402. and Inorganic Chemistry would be useful to Geology majors; Plant Physiology BIOL204. 205, 206, 303, 304, Choose eight equivalent full subjects from the L.eveI300chemislry Organic Chemistry subjects would be relevant for Biology majors; Major in Physical Geography 307. list. The inclusion of CHEM311, CHEM321, CHEM331, Physics majors would benefit from study of some courses in CHEM341 is recommended. Year 1 Plant Molecular Biology BIOL204, 205, 206, 303, 304, Physical Chemistry, etc. At Level 300 specialist topics in active Year 4 GEOG101 and GEOGI02. 307,309. research areas of Chemistry are offered to provide a modem Environmental Biology and Geography - Program B picture of the subject. CHEM401 and CHEM402. Choose six other subjects from Level 100. BIOLlOl, BIOLl02. GEOLl 01, GEOLl 02, PHYSI 01 and PHYS 1 02 recommended. Year I Students intending to do a major in Chemistry would have to GEOGRAPHY complete Program A which isregardedas aminimumrequirement Year 2 BIOLl 01, BIOLl 02, GEOGI 01, GEOGI02 pJus4 othersemester for a thorough grounding in the subject. Students wishing to Geography is the study of the Earth and its people, giving emphasis GEOG20l,GEOG203 andGEOG204. subjects. devote themselves fully to Chemistry will undertake a double to theinteractions among the physical, economic and social elements Choose five other subjects from Level 200. Year 2 major as in Program B where they can complete up to two thirds oftheenvironment.ModernGeographymaybedividedintostudies Year 3 BIOL202, BIOL206, BIOL207, GEOG20l, GEOG203, of their degree program in this one discipline. Many subject in Human Geography (Program A) and Physical Geography GEOO204 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, combinations in between these two programs are possible. Thus (Progmm B). but students may advantageously combine units from OEOG30l, GE0G304, OEOG305 and GE0G311 for example, a student may choose six Level 300 subjects in Human and Physical Geography (Program C). Chemistry, Geography, Mathematics or Geology. Choose four other subjects from Level 300. Chemistry and two from another Department, etc. HumanGeography(ProgramA)analysesthefactorsandprocesses Year 3 Year 4 Chemistry is a recognised profession which is served by a that govern the distribution of people and their economic, social BI0L303, BIOL311 plus 2 other Biology and 4 Physical professional body, the Royal Australian Chemical Institute and cultural activities. Changes in distribution patterns and GEOG401 and GEOG402. Geography semester subjects. (RAC!). Many employment opportunities for chemists require activities through time require study of past processes and Major in Geography Biology and Chemistry - Program C prediction for the future from analysis of present trends and membership of this organisation. Graduates seeking membership Year 1 Year 1 must have completed at least the subjects listed in Program A. patterns. A wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business and public service departments especially in GEOG101 and OEOGI02. BIOLI 01 ,BIOLl02, CHEMI O1,CHEMI 02 plus 40therscmester Following either of these programs or combinations thereof may areas that involve planning, social and economic analysis. Choose six other subjects from Level 100. subjects. lead to postgraduate sLUdy at the Honours standard (Level 400), for which entry requirements are a credit average in at least four Physical Geography (Program B) analyses the factors and Year 2 Year 2 Level 300 semester subjects. The Department strongly processes that influence the distributions of phenomena in the Choose THREEsubjectsfrom GECXJ20I, GECXJ202, GEOG203, BIOL20I, BIOL204, BIOL205, CHEM221 plus 20thersemester recommends the Honours Degree to students both forthe additional physical environment. Emphasisis placedon study ofthe processes GEOG204, GEOG207, GEOG20S. subjects experience it provides and for its enhancement of employment that develop landfonnsand soils, on the meteorological processes Year 3 opportunities and professional standing. Honours studentsdevote that cause variations in climate, and on the factors that influence Choose five other subjects from Level 200. most of their time to an independent research project together Variations in vegetation communities and animal distributions. Year 3· BIOL301, BIOL305, BI0L307, BI0L309 plus 2 other semester with some fonnal course work. The project is selected in an area Employment opportunities are good both in the private and subjects from Biology, Chemistry or one other discipline. Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG301, GEOG302, GEOG304, of interest from lists provided by members of the academic staff. public sector which is currently demanding graduates with agood understanding of environmental issues and their management. GEOG305, GE00306, GEOG309, GEOG31O, GEOG311 and CHEMISTRY This degree is also the normal entry requirement to the research GEOG315. higher degrees (MSc and PhD) offered by the Department. BIOLIOI, BIOLl02, GEOLlOI, GEOLl02, PHYSIOI and Chemistry is a science concerned primarily with matter and the PHYSI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects. Choose four other subjects from Level 300. Chemistry - Program A changes that it undergoes. The study of Chemistry is important Geography (Program C) combines units from Human Geography Year 4 not only in itself but also as a background to many otherscienccs. Year 1 and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other GEOG401 and GEOG402. CHEMIOI andCHEMI02;eilherMATHll1/1120rMATH1021 SUbjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics, Education and 1m, and four other subjects from Level 100. lOS 109 SECfIONSIX RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS SECfION SIX RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS

"'NOTE Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Year Mathematics - Bachelor of Mathematics Degree Year 2 It is recommended that a student include at least a first year­ second year combination from another discipline. TItis 2 subjects chosen. The Bachelorof Mathematics degree enables a student to complete All available MATH200 level subjects (except perhaps one provides afurther opportunity to see how mathematics can be a full course in Mathematics, ortocombinea Mathematics major ortwoofMATH213, 214, 215, 216) together with some 200 GEOLOGY applied. In the past students have chosen Physics orChemistry . with Computer Science, Statistics, Physics or another appropriate level subjects to continue a subsidiary interest from Year 1. However there are now career opportunities applying Geology provides the ultimate understanding of our planet, its discipline as set out in the Rules. Note that for the Bachelor of Year 3 mathematics in economics, psychology, medicine, banking, environment and its evolution. As a natural science, much of the Mathematics degree, certain specific subjects are required at the MATH30!, MATH302, MATII304, MATH395, MATH308, biology, geology and the design of industria1 processes. course is outdoors on field excursions and mapping occurs in a 200 level, thus providing a base for a double majorin Mathematics, MATH310, MATH311, MATH313 orMATH314, is a "Pure diversity of environments. The course is presented as an integrated or a majorin Statistics, with options also for majors in Physics or In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable Mathematics" selection of subjects - but there are variations. study of the major processes, hence field,laboratory and lecture Computer Science. program is: work are intertwined. Subjects should be chosen according to the requirements of the Year 4 Year 1 Students are strongly advised to choose companion courses, Bachelor Degree Rules in this handbook. In total, at least 160 The BMath (Hans) program consists of:Year 4 MATII401 MATHI02 and MATHI03 and COMPIOI together with especially if interests are in palaeontology and evolution credit points must include the subjects in the following list. The and MATH402. "other" subjects worth 40 credit points, taking note of the (biological sciences), surficial processes (geo graph y), geophysics remaining credit points for the ordinary degree may include 2 BMath with Mathematical Physics as a major interest remarks above. (physics and mathematics), geochemistry, tectonics, mineralogy subjects offered elsewhere in the University. and petrology (chemistry). Nowadays a student who wishes to understand current theories Year 2 The prescribed components of the degree include of Nature, ranging from the quantum world of elementary MATH20l,MATH202,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206, Employment for geologists is available in the minerals, petroleum, Year 1 particles to the large scale structure of the Universe it~f, coal, environmental and engineering industries. A Bachelor's MATH218,MATH213,MATH214,MATH215,MATH216, must be familiar with a formidable amount of mathematics. COMP201, STAT201 are a1l recommended, together with degree (80 credit points at 300 Level in Geology) is required for MATHI02and MATHl03 (20 credit points)orMATHIII, 102, Areas of mathematics previously the preserve of the pure continuation of one of the "other" subjects from Year 1 and, membership to the professional body. Employers and the 103 (30 credit points) or MATHill, 112, 103 (30 credit points) mathematician have found fruitful application in modem if room, one of MATH209, MATH21 I , or MATH212. Department very strongly recommend the Honours degree Year 2 physics. Now the standard tools include functional ana1ysis, (GEOL401/GEOIA02) which allows professional research Year 3 MATH20I,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH218andooe group theory, a1gebra, differentia1 geometry and topology, through some independent investigation. of (MATH213, MATH214,MATH215) (30 credit points); and a and the list is continually changing. A student wishing to MATH303,MATH304,MATH305,MATH313togetherwith MATHEMATICS further 30 credit points from MA TH200,STAT2OO,COMP200 study the exciting developments in modem mathematical most of MATH306, MATH307, MATH315, MATH316 (or and/or PHYS200. physics needs a strong grounding in these subjects, and the subjects in Physics or Statistics or Computer Science). The Department of Mathematics offers semester subjects at all Year 3 ability to quickly assimilate new mathematics as required, Year 4 levels for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, the Bachelor of which can only come from a firm grounding in basic 'pure' The BMath (lIons) program consists of:Year 4 MATI:l401 Science degree, the Bachelor of Arts degree and the Bachelor of MATH300 and/or STAT300 (40 credit points); plus a further 40 mathematics. Engineering degree. However, students wishing to obtain credit points from MATH3OD, STAT300, COMP300 and/or and MATH402. In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable professional qualifications in mathematics should enrol in the PHYS300. 4 BMath with Statistics as a major interest program could be: Bachelor of Mathematics degree program, where it is possible (TheBMath (Hons) program consists of: MATH4000r STA T400 (Although STATI01 is shown as desirable, it is not a (although not compulsory) to fill completely their second and Year 1 subjects) prercquisile for STA T201 for students in BMath). third years with mathematics. MATH102 and MATH103 together with other subjects It has been found that certain combinations of subjects have been In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable Some Faculties use the word "major" to describe a complete (Physics and Computer Science should be included). popular, and some, in the judgement of the Department, are program is: strand of study which is considered to be appropriate and particularly worthwhile combinations in terms of education or Year 2 sufficiently educative that they may quote the name of the Year 1 career training. Five such programs are shown below. They are MATH20I, MATH202, MATH203, MATH204, MA TH205, discipline as acomponent oftheirdegree. The program suggested Either STATI0l, MATHlll and MATH112 or STATI03. neither exhaustive nor prescriptive, but are for your guidance. A MATH206,MATH207,MATH218,MATH209,MATH2IO, for the Bachelor of Science degree would fulfil the requirements MATH102 and MATHI03. INFO} 01 is recommended. furthernote is added regarding the choice of subjects in Year 1 for MATH211, MATH214 together with other MATH200 for a major in mathematics. Choose other subjects worth 50 credit points from Levell 00. the BMath degree. subjects, and/or other subjects to continue an interest from Bachelor of Science Degree - with Mathematics as a major I BMath with "Pure" Mathematics as the major interest Year 1. Year 2 This is a course of study which includes at least the following To follow the progress of Mathematics is to be well ahead of Year 3 MATH201,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH218. semester subjects. at least one of {MATH213, MATH214,MATH215] ,together applications, a1though Mathematics itself is eruiched by MATH302, MATH303, MAT1!304, MATH305, MA TH306, with STAT2O!, STAT202, STAT203, STAT204 together Year 1 those applications. To be able to follow such progress, the MATH307, MATH31 0, MATH312. student needs to have as wide an experience in Mathematics with other Mathematics or Computer Science 200 level MATHI02, 103 orMATHI I I, 102, 103 orMATHIII, 112, 103, Year 4 as possible, and a thorough grounding in the basic truths. subjects for the remaining 20 credit points. together with other level 100 subjects to meet the B.Sc. degree The BMath (Hons) program consists of:Year 4 MATH401 requirements. Since the Year 3 program can accommodate no more than 8 Year 3 and MATH402. Year 2 different topics, some selection must be made. Although the STATIO I , STATI02, STATI03, STATI04 with four program does not appcarvery "applied", nonetheless graduates 3 BMath with "Applied" Mathematics as a major interest mathematics and/or computer science 300 level subjects for MATH201, MATH203, MATI1204, MATH206,MATH218and with such backgrounds have adapted quickly to careers in "Applied" Mathematics uses mathematics as a tool for the remaining 40 credit points. one chosen from {MATH213, MATH214, MATH215} plus 5 industry and commerce as well as in research. investigating problems which come from other disciplines. other subjects from Level 200. Year 4 In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable This interdisciplinary approach to problem-solving has been The BMath (I-Ions) program consists of:Year 4 STAT400 Year 3 program is: remarkably successful,but practitioners need both a strong Subjects grounding in the technica1 aspects of Mathematics as well as Four semester subjects from Mathematics Level 3OD, chosen Year 1 with advice from the Department, and four further subjects to knowledge of subjects which concentrate on Applied 5 llMath with Computer Science as a major interest MA THI 02and MATH I 03 together with other subjects worth meet the BSc degree requirements. Mathematics. It a1so includes subjects from the Departments In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable 60 credit points: (Computer Science and/or Physics and/or of Statistics and Computer Science which provide additional program would be: Statistics and/or Philosophy are popular but the choice is skills for the professiona1 Applied Mathematician. wide. Sec No.6 below). 110 III

b I

SECfIONSIX RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS SECfION SIX RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS

Year 1 It is advisable for intending physicists to include ample BSc with a Psychology Major Statistics has been described as the science of turning data into MATH102 and MATHI03, COMP101, and other subjects mathematics in their course and pursue a related science such as Year] infonnation.TItis involves collecting. presenting and analysing worth 40 credit points. Chemistry or Geology to Level 200 subjects if at all possible. data, interpreting the results and using them to draw conclusions PSYCI01, PSYCI02 plus 6 other semester subjects at level 100. or make decisions. The principles of Statistics are based on ideas Year 2 For a Physics majorin the Bachelorof Science degree a1least the following semester subject structure is necessary Year 2 from the philosophy of science and mathematics and, more MATH20I.MATH203.MATH204.MATH206.MATH218. recently, from developments in computing. Computers play an Year 1 PSYC20I, PSYC202, PSYC203 plus other subjects at the 200 MATH212.MATH2IS. MATH216.COMP20I. C0MP202. level, some of which may also be taken in Ps)!chology. essential role in Statistics for data management and analysis. COMP203. COMP204. C0MP20S. COMP206. PHYSI02. PHYSJ03. MATHJ02 and MATHl03. Statistics is a practical subject.ltinvolves designing experimental Year 3 STAT203, PmL242(lhatisadesirable program, but timetable Choose four other subjects from Levell 00, preferably leading to plans and sampling procedures, calculating how many subjects constraints may modify it}. Level 200 in at least one other science discipline. PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304 plus at least one other chosen or objects should be studied and determining how the from PSYC302. PSYC305. PSYC306. PSYC307 or PSYC308. measurements should be made in order to obtain data which is YearJ Year 2 and four other subjects chosen at the 300 level. reliable, accurate and relevant. Methods of statistical analysis, Four MATH300subjects and fourCOMP300 subjects. ([here PHYS201 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS202·, BSc Honours Degree in Psychology based on mathematics including probability theory, are used to is wide choice for specialisation). PHYS203 or PHYS20S; and MATH201 (advisory). decide what conclusions can validly be drawn from the data. Year] Year 4 ("'Students achieving a credit level or better in PHYSI0l and The Stalistics Department offers subjects from the 100 level PSYCI01, PSYCI02, plus 6 other subjects from level 100. The BMath (Hons) program consists of:Year 4 MATH401 PHYS I 02 may be admitted to Level 200 in Physics with the through to the Honours level. Research degrees may be pursued andMATH402,or seeOte Rulesfor BCompSci(Hons) Faculty approval of the Head of Department). Year 2 in the area of Statistics. of Engineering. Year 3 Eight 200 level subjects including PSYC201, PSYC202, For a major in Statistics a student should talee the following 6 First year subjects in the BMath Degree PHYS301, PHYS302 and at least two subjects chosen from PSYC203 and PSYC204 plus other 200 level subjects chosen subjects: from the scheduled list. The rules demand MATH102 and MATH103 (20 credit PHYS303. PHYS304 or PHYS30S. Note that the Level 300 Year J subjects should be passed with a credit or better for admission to Year 3 points) or MATH111, 102. 103 (30 credit points) or STATJOI andMATHI120r MATHI02and MATHJ03. Choose the Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree (in Year 4). MATHll1. 112, 103 (30 credit points) but the remaining PSYC301, PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects other subjects worth 60 credit points from Level 100. credit points can be taken in almost any other discipline. PSYCHOLOGY a1 the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the Year 2 Popular choices include Computer Science (COMP101). scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Physics (PHYSI01/l02 or 1021103), Information Science As a discipline, Psychology is open to all students who gain ,'.: Department. STATIOI. STATI02. STAT203. STATI04 and MATH20l. Choose other subjects worth 45 credit points from Level 200. and Statistics (INF0101/STAT101). However, BMath admission to the University. Psychology is a broad discipline and .'. Year 4 students choose widely, and the following areas have been it is difficult to state preparatory subjects that should be studied Year 3 approved for them in the past: together with Psychology. ~ PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level including STATIDI. STATI02. STA1103. STATI04. Choose other Recently legislation was passed through the State Parliament Accounting, Biology, Chemistry, Classical Civilisation, PSYC201 as well as completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 subjects worth 40 credit points from Level 300. which will require anyone wishing to practise as a Psychologist Drama,Engineering, Economics, English, French, Geogmphy, obtaining at least a Credit grade average in each offour 300 Level Year 4 to have a minimum of four years training. In the Science and Geology, Gennan, Greek, History, Japanese, Latin, Legal 4 Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PSYC301 and Mathematics Faculty, Psychology can be taken either as a BSc or 80 credit points selected from STAT401 to STAT41I. Studies, Linguistics, Philosophy, Psychology, Sanskrit, PSYC302. Sociology. aBSc (Psychology) degree. The BScdegree is a three year course which can be followed by a fourth or Honours year. The BSc BSc (psychology) awarded at Honours Level There is room in the BMath course to include Level 200 (Psychology) degree is a four year degree. The programs within subjects to continue with one of the choices made during the Years] and 2 As for Psychology Honours above. these two degrees are set out below. first year course. Year 3 PSYC301, PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology The Department's aim is to produce "psychologists who should subjects at the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen PHYSICS by virtue of their training be able to playa unique role such as from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Foremployment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of critically examining research and scholarly literature in the field Department. of psychology. contributing to empirical research in psychology, an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. Year 4 PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree administering and interpreting psychological tests and AnHonoursdegreeinPhysicsorcombinedPhysics/Mathematics requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level measurement procedures and prescribing, implementing and would be preferred. inclUding PSYC201, as well as completion of 60 credit points at evaluating fonns of psychological intervention and remediation". Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute PSYC3000btaining at least a Credit grade average in each offour of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum Entry to Psychology 40 1 and 402 requires completion of 60 credit 300 Level Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PS YC301 of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit Grade in each of and PSYC302. four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and number of grades of membership which are related to experience BSc (Psychology) Degree as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students PSYC302. Entry to PSYC403 and PSYC404 requires Pass grades Years 1 and 2 As for Psychology Honours above. currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors in at least six 300 level subjects. courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in tenns The Department offers two Applied Masters Degrees. The Master Year 3 of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian of Psychology (Clinical) degree has an Honours entry requirement PSYC301, and at least five other Psychology subjects at the 300 Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of while the Master of Psychology (Educational) has an level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There undergraduate degree with a major in Psychology as an entry including those offered by the Psychology Department. are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist, but a requirement, a teaching qualification and in addition, two years Year 4 degree is usually necessary for government and industry teaching (or other relevant) experience. The Honours degree is recognition and status as a professional physicist. the normal entry into the research degrees of Master of Science PSYC403 and PSYC404. and Doctor of Philosophy. STATISTICS

112 113 SECTION SEVEN SECfrON SEVEN POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE RULES

APPROVED SUBJECTS The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite BIOL401 Biology Honours 401 40 40 cp 300 BIOL or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department, obtaining at least a Credit grade average BIOL402 Biology Honours 402 40 BIOL401 CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 CHEM obtaining at least a Credit grade average CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 40 CHEM401 GEOO401 Geography Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOG obtaining at least a Credit grade average GEOO4D2 Geography Honours 402 40 GEOG401 GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOL obtaining at least a Credit POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES grade average GEOL4D2 Geology Honours 402 40 GEOL401 MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR Classes of Honours obtaining at least a Credit SCIENCE 5. There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, aass II and grade average Admission to Candidature Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 40 MATH401 1 and Division 2. 1. A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 Any three PHYS300 or two disciplines. Time Requirements subjects and PHYS301 2. In orderto be admiued to candidature forthe degree in a single 6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate obtaining at least a Credit discipline an applicant shall: shall complete the course in not more than two years of study. grade averaae (a) have completed the requirements for admission to the PHYS402 Physics Honours 402 40 PHYS40r Ordinary DegreeofBachelorofScienceofthe University PSYC40l Psychology Honours 401 (Seminars) 40 Four PSYC200 subjects or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; incl. PSYC201 and 60 cp and at PSYC300 obtaining at (b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance least a Credit grade in each of with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the four PSYC300 including recommendation of the Head of the Department PSYC301 and PSYC302 responsible for the discipline. PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402(Thesis) 40 PSYC401 3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two Acandidatemay pursueacombined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments with the approval of the Heads disciplines, an applicant shall: of both Departments. (a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary DegreeofBachelorofScienceofthe University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and (b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments responsible for the disciplines. Qualification for Admission to the Degree 4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

114 liS POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE RULES SECTION SEVEN

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR APPROVED SUBJECTS OF SCIENCE (A VIAnON) The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Admission to Candidature Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite 1. In order to be admiued to candidature for the degree an A candidate may emol in 80 credit points including AVIA405 to be chosen from: applicant shall: A VIA401 Aviation Honours 401 20 B.Sc.(Avialion) with (a) have completed the requirements for admission to the a Credit grade average Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science (Aviation) of in A VIA308, A V1A3IO, the University or to any other degree approved by the A V1A311 and A VlA314 Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that AVlA40l AVlA402 Aviation Research 10 AVlA314 degree; and & Methodology (b) have completed any additional work prescribed in AVlA403 Technology in Aviation 10 AVlA310, AVIA312 accordance with the policy detennined by the Faculty and AVlA313 Board on the recommendation of the Head of the The Human Variable 10 AVlA221 and AVIA311 Department of A vialion. AVlM04 AVlA401 and AVlM05 Aviation Honours -Thesis 40 B.Sc.(Aviation) with Qualification for Admission to the Degree an average obtaining either 2. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass Credit grades in AVlA403 or subjects at the 400 level totalling 80credit points chosen from A V1A308, A VIA3lO, AVlA404 the list of Approved Subjects. AVlA311 and AVIA314 Classes of Honours 3, There shall be three classes of honours: Class It Class II and Class III. OassII shall have twodivisions,namely Division 1 and Division 2. Time Requirements 4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate I shall complete the course in not more than two years of study. t I,· l

116 111 r If

SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR APPROVED SUBJECTS OF APPLIED SCIENCE The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite Admission to Candidature EAMS401 Environmental Management 20 EAMS301. EAMS311 1. In orderto be admitted to candidature forthe degree in a single Forty credit points discipline an applicant shall: level 300 EAMS obtaining alleast a (a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Credit average Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science grade EAMS402 (Fnvironmental Assessment and Management) of the Seminar Series 20 EAMS401 University or to any other degree approved by the EAMS404 Research Project 40 EAMS401 Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree; and (b) have completed any additional work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty BoardontherecommendationoftheHeadofDepartment of Applied Science and Technology. Qualification for Admission to the Degree 2. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects. Classes or Honours 3. There shall be three elasses of Honours: Class I, Class II and Class m. Class II shall have two divisions namely Division 1 and Division 2. Time Requirements 4. Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

118 119 SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES SECfrON SEVEN POSTGRADUA TIl DEGREE RULES

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR APPROVED SUBJECTS OF MATHEMATICS The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Admission to Candidature Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite 1. A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one Mathematics or two disciplines. MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH subjects 2. In orderto be admitted to candidature forthe degree in a single obtaining at least a Credit grade discipline an applicant shall: average (a) have completed the requirements for admission to the MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 40 MATH401 Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the Statistics University or to any other degree approved by the A candidate may enrol in 80 credit points, to be chosen from: Faculty Board; and STAT401 Probability Theory \0 40 cp from level 300 STAT subjects (b) havecompletedsuchotherworkprescribedinaccordance obtaining at least a Credit grade average with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the STAT402 Analysis of Categorical Data recommendation of the Head of the Department \0 As for STAT401 responsible for the discipline. STAT403 Demography and Survival Analysis 10 As forSTAT401 STAT404 Robust Regression and Smoothing 10 As for STAT401 3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two STAT405 Statistical Consulting 10 As forSTAT401 disciplines, an applicant shall: STAT406 Methods for Quality Improvement \0 AsforSTAT401 (a) have completed the requirements for admission to the STAT407 Advanced Topics in Statistics 10 As forSTAT401 Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the STAT408 Project \0 As for STAT401 University or to any other degree approved by the STAT409 Project 20 AsforSTAT401 Faculty Board; and STAT410 Project 30 As for STAT401 (b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance STAT411 Project 40 AsforSTAT401 with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments A candidate may pursue a combined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments in one of the following responsible for the disciplines. combinations: Qualification for Admission to the Degree MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH subjects 4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass obtaining at least a Credit grade average subjects at the400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 Any three PHYS 300 subjects and the list of Approved Subjects. PHYS301 obtaining at least a Credit average Classes of Honours or 5. There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, Class II and MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated Class lll. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division ECON401 Economics IV 40 Consult Department 1 and Division 2. or Time Requirements MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated 6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOL subjects shall complete the course in not more than two years of study. obtaining at least a Credit grade average or MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated PSCY401 Psychology Honours 401 40 Four PSYC 200 subjects incl. PSYC201 and 60 cp at PSYC 300 obtaining at least a Credit grade in each of four PSYC300 including PSYC301 and PSYC302.

120 121 ,

POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN PQSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECTION SEVEN

APPROVED SUBJECTS SCHEDULE- GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES The Subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are: Admission to Candidature Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequlslte 1. In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology 10 TwoBIOL200 applicant shall: BlOLJlt Environmental Biology 10 BIOL207 or BIOL203. (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a Students who have completed degree of the University orto any other degree approved BI0L306 are not eligible to by the Faculty Board or have achieved atanothertertiary do this subject institution a standard of performance deemed by the CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 Faculty Board to be equivalent; and CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 (b) havecompletedsuchotherwOI'kprescribedinaccordance CHEE342 Safety and Environment 10 Consult Head of Department with the policy determined by the Faculty Board; or CNL242 Environmental Engineering 2 5 CNL141 (c) in exceptional cases, produce evidence of possessing EDUC612 The Scope of Environmental Education 10 Consult Education Department such other qualifications as may be approved by the EDUC613 Issues and Research in Environmental Education to Consult Education Department Faculty Board. GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203 Qualification for Admission to the Diploma GEOG306 Geography of Australia: 10 GEOG202 plus either an Historic Perspective GEOG205 or GEOG206 2. To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GEOG20l, GEOG203 complete subjects totalling 80 credit points from the list of GE0G491 Environmental Studies Approved Subjects. including 40 credit points in subjects at Seminar 1 the 400 level or higher. 20 GE0G492 Environmental Studies Minor Project 10 Grading of the Diploma GEOG595 Directed Environmental Study 1 10 3. The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma GEOG596 Directed Environmental Study 2 10 except that, where the perfonnance of a candidate has reached MECH407 Environmental Engineering 5 Consult Department of Mechanical a standard detennined by the Faculty Board to be sufficient, Engineering the diploma may be conferred with Merit. PHlL391 Technology and Human Values I 10 Time Requirements PHllA91 Technology. Human Values and 4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate The Environment 10 shall complete the course in not more than two years of study. SOC304 Medicine in Industrial Society 20 20 c.p. at 200 level including S0C201 SURV473 Town Planning 10 Consult Department Footnote Leave ofAbsence- For the purposes ofRule 10 ofthe Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate shalJ be deemed to be in good standing if. at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol withoUi restrictions. *Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.

123 122 SECTION SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECTION SEVEN POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES

SCHEDULE - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN Qualification for Admission to the Diploma APPROVED SUBJECTS MATHEMATICAL STUDIES 2. To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall pass The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: subjects at the 400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from Admission to Candidature Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite the list of Approved Subjects. 1. An applicant for admission to candidature for the Diploma BI0L405 Biology Diploma 405 40 40 c.p.leveI300 BIOL Grading of the Diploma shall: or other subjects approved (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a 3. The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma by the Department degree of the University or to a degree of any other except that, where the perfonnanceof acandida1e has reached BIOIA06 Biology Diploma 406 40 BIOlA05 tertiary institution approved for this purpose by the a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be sufficient, CHEM405 Chemistry Diploma 405 40 40 c.p. level 300 CHEM Faculty Board; or the diploma may be confened with Merit. CHEM4Q6 Chemistry Diploma 406 40 CHEM405 (b) in exceptional circumstances have other qualifications Time Requirements GEOG405 Geography Diploma 405 40 40 c.p.level 300 GEOO approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board. 4. Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate GEOG406 Geography Diploma 406 40 GEOG405 Qualincation for Admission to the Diploma shall complete the course in not more than two years of study. GEOIA05 Geology Diploma 405 40 40 c.p. level 300 GEOL GEOIA06 Geology Diploma 406 40 2. (1) To qualify for the diploma a candidate shall pass a GEOIA05 PHYS405 Physics Diploma 405 program of study approved by the Facull y Board, totalling 40 40 c.p. level 300 PHYS not less than 80 credit points. PHYS406 Physics Diploma 406 40 PHYS405 PSYC405 Psychology Diploma 405 40 40 c.p.leveI300 PSYC (2) The program shall consist of subjects from levels above PSYC406 Psychology Diploma 406 100 level offered by the Department of Mathematics and 40 PSYC405 the Department of Statistics or other subjects with Footnote considerable mathematical content, as determined by Leave ofAbsence -For th£ purposes ofRule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shaU be deemed to be in good the Dean,offered by olherdepartments of the University. standing if. at the cOl1Clusion ofth£ year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions. (3) Not more than 20 credit points from 200 level SUbjects may be counted by a candidate towards the diploma Grading 3. In cases where a candidate's performance in the program has reached alevel determined by the Faculty Board, the diploma may be awarded with Merit. Time Requirements 4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study. Footnote Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of lh£ Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion ofthe year oflast enrolmenl in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol witlwuJ restrictions.

SCHEDULE- GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SCIENCE Admission to Candidature 1. In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an. applicant shall: (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved at anothertertiary institution a standard of performance deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent; and (b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board; or (c) in exceptional cases, produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

124 125 SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE RULES

RULES GOVERNING MASTERS DEGREES APPROVED SUBJECTS The subjects approved by Ute Faculty Board for the award are: SCHEDULE- MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology 10 Two BIOL200 Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of BIOLJl1 Environmental Biology 10 BIOL207 or BI0L203. Science and Mathematics. Students who have completed BI0L306 are not eligible to do this subject CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEMI01, CHEMI02 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 CHEE342 Safety and Environment 10 Consult Head of Department CIVL242 Environmental Engineering 2 5 CIVL141 ECON311 Environmental Economics 10 ECON201 EDUC612 The Scope of Environmental Education 10 Consult Education Department EDUC613 Issues and Research in Environmental 10 Consult Education Department Education GEOG304 The Biosphere and Conservation 10 GEOG203 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203 GEOG306 A Geography of Australia, 10 GEOG202 plus Historical Perspective either GEOO205 or GE(XJ206 GEOG309 Society and Space 10 GEOO202 plus either GEOO205 or GEOG206 GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GEOG20I, GEOG203 GEOG491 Environmental Studies 20 Seminar 1 GEOG492 Environmental Studies Minor Project 10 GEOG591 Environmental Studies Major 30 Project I GEOG592 Environmental Studies Major 20 Project II 30 GEOG594 Environmental Studies 20 Seminar 2 GEOG595 Directed Environmental Study 1 10 GEOG596 Directed Environmental Study 2 10 GEOLJ20 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 GEOL213 or GEOG204 MECH309 Noise Pollution 5 MECH407 Environmental Engineering 5 Consult Department of Mechanical Engineering OHS502 Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology 10 PHIL391 Technology and Human Values 10 PHIL592 Technology, Human Values and 10 The Environment SOO04 Medicine in Industrial Society 20 20 c.p. at 200 level including SOC201 SURV473 Town Planning 10 Consult Department *Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.

126 127 SECTION SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE RULES

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF MATHEMATICS SCHEDULE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY APPROVED SUBJECTS (EDUCATIONAL) 1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the Award are: for the course leading to the degree of Master of Mathematics. These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Code Name Credit Points When Offered Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of 2. To beeligiblefor admission to candidalUre an applicant shall: PSYC521 Counselling and Psychotherapy I 20 Full Year Science and Mathematics. (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a PSYC522 Counselling and Psychotherapy II 20 Full Year degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle with PSYC523 The Client: Diagnosis an~ Treatment I 20 Full Year honours in the area of study in which the applicant PSYC524 The Client: Diagnosis and Treatment II 20 Full Year proposes to carry out research orto an Honours degree, PSYC525 Professional Practice and Consultancy Skills I 20 Full Year approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of PSYC526 Professional Practice and Consultancy Skills II 20 Full Year another University; or PSYC527 Research Methodology and Thesis I 20 Full Year (b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a PSYC528 Research Methodology and Thesis II 20 Full Year degree of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another tertiary institution and have completed such work and sat for such examinations as the Faculty Board may have determined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class honours in an appropriate subject; or (c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such academic or professional qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board. 3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program consisting of: (a) such examinations and other such work as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and (b) a thesis emlxx:lying the results of an original investigation or design. 4. The program shall be completed in not less than two years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or for a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period by up to one year. 5. A part-time candidate shall, except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances: (a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and (b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the the program is being canied out. 6. Any third examiner shall be an external examiner.

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (CLINICAL) These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

128 129 r SEerlON SEVEN PQSTGRADUA TE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENCE deemed by the Faculty Boardto beequivalentorwhohas I Code Name Credit Points When OITered Prerequisite Corequisite 1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science may be had previous research experience, the Faculty Board ASTK695 Foundations of Applied 40 S1,S2,FY Appropriate enrolled in either the F&CUlty of Engineering orthe Faculty of may reduce this period to not less than one academic Science & Technology undergraduate Science and Mathematics. TheFacultyinwhichthecandidate year; and subjects is eruolled shall be responsible for the program. (b) except with the permission of the Faculty Board, in not ASTK696 Topics in Applied Science 40 SI,S2,FY ASTK695 2. (1) To be eligible for admission tocandidaturein the Faculty more than five years. & Technology ASTK697 Advanced Topics in Applied 40 Not in ASTK696 of Science and Mathemalics an applicant shall: 5. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which Science & Teclmology 1993 (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to shall be given only in special circumstances, apart-time ASTK698 Project 40 Not in ASTK696 candidate enrolled in the FacuIt y of Science and the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours 1993 Mathematics shall: Class I or Class IT oCthe University of Newcastle or EAMS695 Foundations of Environmental 40 SI,S2,FY Appropriate by to a degree, approved for this purpose the (a) conduct the major proportion of the research or Asessment & Management undergraduate Faculty Board of this or any other university; or design work in the University; and subjects (b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to (b) take part in research seminars within the Department EAMS696 Topics in Environmental 40 SI,S2,FY EAMS695 the degree of Bachelor of Science of the University in which the program is being carried out. Assessment & Management of Newcastle or other approved uni versit y and have EAMS697 Advanced Topics in 40 Not in EAMS696 (2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a completed such work and passed such examinations Environmental 1993 candidate enrolled in the Faculty of Engineering shall as the Faculty Board may have detennined and Assessment & Management take part in the research seminars within the Department have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that EAMS698 Project 40 Not in in which the program is being carried out. EAMS696 required for admission to adegree of Bachelor with 1993 second class Honours in an appropriate subject; or B[0L695 Foundations of Biological 40 SI,S2,FY SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENTIFIC STUDIES Appropriate (c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing Sciences undergraduate These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised such other qualifications as maybe approved by the subjects Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Faculty Board on the recommendation ofthe Head BI0L696 Topics in Biological Sciences 40 S1,S2,FY BI0L695 Science and Mathematics. of the Department in which the applicant proposes B[0L697 Advanced Topics in 40 Not in BI0L696 to carry out the program. Biological Sciences 1993 BI0L698 Project 40 Nolin Bl0L696 (2) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty 1993 of Engineering an applicant shall: CHEM695 Foundations of Chemistry 40 SI,S2,FY Appropriate (a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a undergraduate degree with Honours in the University ofNewcastle subjects or other university approved for this purpose by the CHEM696 Topics in Chemistry 40 SI,S2,FY CHEM695 Faculty Board in the area in which the applicant CHEM697 Advanced Topics in Chemistry40 Not in CHEM696 proposes to carry out research; or 1993 (b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a CHEM698 Project 40 Not in CHEM696 degree in the University of Newcastle or other 1993 university approved for this purpose by the Faculty GE0G695 Foundations of Geography 40 Not in Appropriate Board and have completed to the satisfaction of the 1993 undergraduate Faculty Board such work and examinations as subjects determined by the Faculty Board; or GE0G696 Topics in Geography 40 Not in GEOG695 1993 (c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing GE0G697 Advanced Topics in 40 Not in GEOG696 such other qualifications as maybe approved by the Geography 1993 Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head GEOG698 Project 40 Not in GE0G696 of the Department in which the candidate proposes 1993 to out the program. carry GE0L695 Foundations of Geology 40 S1,S2,FY Appropriate 3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall undergraduate complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program subjects consisting of: GE0L696 Topics in Geology 40 Sl,S2,FY GEOL695 (a) such work and examinations as may be prescribed by the GEOL697 Advanced Topics in Geology 40 Not in GE0L696 Faculty Board; and 1993 GE0L698 Project 40 Not in GE0L696 (b) athesisembodying theresults of an original investigation 1993 or design. MATH695 Foundations of Mathematics 40 SI,S2, FY Appropriate 4. The program shall be completed: undergraduate (a) in not less than two academic years except that, in the subjects case of a candidate who has completed the requirements MATH696 Topics in Mathematics 40 SI,S2, FY MATH695 for adegree of Bachelor with Honours or a qUalification

130 131 SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA IE DEGREE RULES SECTION EIGHT

Code Name Credit Points When Offered Prerequisite Corequisite MATH697 Advanced Topics in 40 Nolin MATH696 Mathematics 1993 MATH698 Project 40 Not in MATH696 1993 PHY5695 Foundations of Physics 40 51,52, FY Appropriate undergraduate subjects PHY5696 Topics in Physics 40 51,52,FY PHYS69$ PHY5697 Advanced Topics in Physics 40 Not in PHY5696 1993 PHY5698 Projecl 40 Nolin PHY5696 1993 P5YC695 Foundations of Psychology 40 Nolin Appropriate 1993 undergraduate subjects P5YC696 Topics in Psychology 40 Not in PSYC695 1993 PSYC697 Advanced Topics in 40 Not in P5YC696 Psychology 1993 PSYC698 Project 40 Not in P5YC696 1993 POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS 5TAT695 Foundations of Statistics 40 51,52, FY Appropriate undergraduate subjects Notes on Subject and Topic Descriptions APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL 5TAT695 5TAT696 Topics in Statistics 40 51,52,FY The subject and topic outlines and reading liSIS which follow are ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT 5TAT696 5TAT697 Advanced Topics in Statistics 40 Not in set out in a standard fannat to facilitate easy reference. An 1993 explanation is given below of some of the technical tenns used in EAMS401 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT Wcp 5TAT696 5TAT698 Project 40 Not in this Handbook. 1993 Prerequisile EAMS301, EAMS311. Forty credit points level Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed at a Pass grade 300 EAMS obtaining at least a Credit grade average A candidate may pursue subjects in two disciplines with the approval of the Heads of both Departments and the Dean of the Faculty or better before a candidate enrols in a particular subject. The onI y AssesSfMnt (a) Two major essays of Science and Mathematics. prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or subjects which (b) Presentation by each student of two seminar must be taken before enrolling in the particular topic. To enrol in topics any subject which the topic may be part of, the prerequiSites for that subject must still be satisfied. (c) Satisfactory standard reached in a two hour Where a prerequisite is marked as advisory ,lectures will be given written examination at the end of the year on the assumption that the subject ortopic has been completed as Content indicated. Policy making in environmental assessment and management, Corequisites for subjects or topics are those which the candidate administration in environmental management, must pass before enrolment or be taking concurrently. federal and state environmental legislation, role of relevant Examination Under examination rules "examination" includes government agenci es and commissions, government policies and mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by reports, national and international conventions, the roles of the which thefinalgradeof acandidate in a subject is assessed. Some UnitedNationsEnvironmentProgramandtheWoridCommission attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment on Environment and Development, the professional practice of is determined. environmental management, procedures for consultancy. policy making in private industry, codes of ethics, the environmental Texts are essential books recommended for purchase. audit, environmental risk analysis, trends in environmental References are books relevant to the subject or topic which, management, the public consultation process, conflict resolution however, need not be purchased. in environmental decision-ma1cing. LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN Text To be advised HONOURS DEGREES IN THE FACULTY OF SCIENCE References AND MATHEMATICS Australian Government 1991, DiscussionPapersonEcologically Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better average in Sustainable Development. Australian Government Printer, appropriate 300 level subjects: see prerequisite requirements for Canberra. relevant subjects. Carter, R. et at 1984, Systems Management and Change: A Graphic Guide. Milton Keynes. Open University Press. 132 133 POSTGRADUArn SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION EIGHT POSTGRADUA rn SUBJECf DESCRlPTIONS SECfION EIGHT

enable students to make a study of an approved area in which the ii) a reading list in the main area of interest (30%) Checkland, P.B. 1981, Systems Thinking, Systems Practice. AVIATION human variable in aviation is the focus. Such a focus includes iii) a supervised research project, the results of which are Wiley. Chichester. ergonomics, aviation psychology. aviation medicine, instruction A VIATION HONOURS 401 20cp embodied in a thesis and presented as a seminar (40%) Dorney, L.C. 1987, The Professional Practice ofEnvironmental AVIA401 and learning. Prerequisites B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or Examination Half each of the lecture course and the reading list Management. SpringerNerlag. Texts and References To be advised. better in AVIA308. A VIA31 O. A VIA311 and A VIA314. will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at Folke. C. and Kaberger, T (008.) 1991. Linking ihe Natural the end of the second semester. The thesis will be assessed by a Hours 8 hours per week for the full year. Environment and the Economy: Essaysfrom the Eco-Eco Group. AVIA40S AVIATION HONOURS - THESIS 40cp committee of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) Kluwer Academic Publishers.Dordrecht. Examination Progres si ve assessment based upon written reports, Prerequisites B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or appointed by the Department. Part-time students will have their World Commission on EnvironmentalandDevelopment (WCED) seminar presentations and examination, better in A VIA308. A VIA3! O. A VIA31! and A VIA3!4. assessment spread accordingly over two academic years. 1987, Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report). OUP. Content Corequisites A VIA401 and either AVIA403 or A VIA404. Oxford. GEOGRAPHY Students will present seminars which relate to their project work Hours 12 hours per week for the full year. Journals Journal of Environmental Management in tenns of a review of literature and methodology. Attendance Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better grade Examination The thesis will be assessed by two Examiners one average in appropriate 300 level subjects. Journal of Environmental Planning and participation is compulsory. of whom may be external. The Environmentalist GEOG401) HONOURS IN GEOGRAPHY 40+4Ocp AVIA402 AVIATION RESEARCH & Content GEOG402) METHODOLOGY IOcp It EAMS402 SEMINAR SERIES 20cp A VIA405 is half the Honours in Aviation. consists of the Prerequisites GEOGI01 and GEOGI02 plus eitherGEOG201 Prerequisite A VIA314. development, conduct, analysis and reporting of a piece of Corequisite EAMS401 original empirical research. The thesis (of about 75 pages) and GEOG301 orGEOO202andGEQG302 including 30cp from Assessment (a) Presentation of a written paper based on each Corequisite AVIA401. formally presents this research in conventional fonnat. 200 level and 40 cp from 300 GEOG level obtaining at least a Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1. Credit grade average. seminar topic 80% Students are supervised by members of the Department of Aviation (b) Satisfactory presentation of seminartopic 20% Examination Progressive assessment based on seminar and are advised to discuss possible projects well in advance with To qualify for admission to Geography Honours, a student must presentations, assignments and examination. normally have completed sufficient training in geographical Content potential supeIVisors. Nominated topics are submitted to a meeting of the staff of the Department of Aviation, chaired by the Head of methods (i.e.GEOG20! and GEOG30! for Physical Geography; Attendance and participation at seminars with a written paper to Content Department. for approval. GEOG202 and GEOG302 for Human Geography), have be presented. Additionally. the student will prepare and present Simple statistical procedures such as frequency distributions, completed a Major in Geography that includes GEOGI01, a seminar on an approved topic cross-tabulations, correlations.t-tests. chi-sqUared tests andsimple BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES GEOO I 02,30 credit points from level 200 courses and 40 credit ANOV As and regression will be introduced. References To be provided points from level 300 courses. To proceed to Geography Honours Reviews and reports of research will be discussed. BI0L401) HONOURS IN BIOLOGICAL a candidate must have obtained at least a Credit grade average in List ofSeminar Topics Also covered will be qualitative approaches such as self-reports, BIOL402) SCIENCES 40+40cp the 300 level Geography subjects taken for the major plus at least Water Resources Management in Austra1ia observational and action research and historical research. Case­ 20 other points at credit level in their university courses. The Principles and Practices of Wastewater Treatment and Disposal studies, questionnaire construction and interview skills will be student must also satisfy the Head of the Department of her/his Prerequisites 40 cpo Level 300 BIOL(orother300level subjects ability in the area of study within which the proposed research Procedures covered. approved by Department), obtaining at least a Credit grade topic lies. Radiation in the Environment average. AVIA403 TECHNOLOGY IN AVIATION IOcp Hours 48 hours per week for two semesters. Exotic Plants and Associated Environmental Problems Content Prerequisites AVIA310, A VIA312 and AVIA313. Examination External and internal examination of a research Endangered Animals in Australia Carry out aresearch project and complete a thesis, essay, vivaand thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework. Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1. Ethics in Environmental Decision-Making two seminars. Examination Progressive examination based on seminars, COnlenl Current Agricultural Practices in Australia and Land Degradation. CHEMISTRY assignments and tests. A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department and coursework as EAMS404 RESEARCH PROJECT 40 cp Conlenl CHEM40I) HONOURS IN CHEMISTRY 40+40cp preSCribed. Corequisite EAMS401. The subject is designed to permit wide interpretation and CHEM402) Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should application to the range of related topics covered in the BSc Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements and AssessmentAn internal supervisor and an external examiner will notify the Head of the Department by I October in the final year (Aviation). These topics include aeronautical engineering, design, assess the research project permission of the Head of Department. An average credit grade of the undergraduate degree and must confirm this as soon as final systems and flight operations such as flight planning, navigation in at least four Level 300 chemistry subjects is the normal results for the year are known. Candidates are expected to Content and meteorology. minimum entry requirement. It will be expected that a student commence work on their thesis after completion of their The project will describe research and findings on an original undertaking project workin a particular area will have completed Texts and References To be advised. undergraduate degree. investigation approved by the supeIVisor the corresponding Level 300 core subject at a minimum of credit General A VIA404 THE HUMAN VARIABLE IN grade. Students intending to undertake the Honours program GEOLOGY AVIATION IOcp should notify the Head of Department of their intention by I The project is worth 50% of the year's mark for Honours. It must November in their final undergraduate year and confinn this as be prepared in standard thesis fonnat, and include raw data, Prerequisites AVIA221 and AVIA311. GEOL40!) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY 4O+4Ocp soon as final examination results are known. GEOL402) questionnaires, diagrams of experimental apparatus, computer Hours 6 hours per week for Semester I. programs, in appendices. Three unbound copies are to be submitted Content Prerequisites 40cp Level 300 GEOL obtaining at least a Credit Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, to the Department of Applied Science and Technology by 30 The Honours program extends overtwo semesters orits part-time grade average. For GE0L402, prerequisite of GE0L401, assignments and examinations. October. These copies will later be bound; one is retained by the equivalent and consists of completion of ordinary degree requirements. student's supervisor, one is placed in the departmental library for Content i) a course of advanced lectures (approximately 50 hours) Hours To be advised. future reference, and the third is returned to the student after fmal This subJect is intended to pennit a range of interpretations to (30%) assessment has been made. \35 134 SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUA1E SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUATE SUBJEIT DESCRIPTIONS

Examination PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 MATHEMATICS Credit PoinJs (SEMINARS) 40cp (i) a viva voce examination STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING 10 MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS 40+4Ocp (ii) research work carried out and its presentalion in a thesis Prerequisite A completed BA or BSc or three complete years of STAT406 METHODS FOR QUAUTY aBA(Psych) or BSc(Psych)including the subjects PSYC1 01 and MATH402) (iii) seminars, assignments IMPROVEMENT 10 PSYCI 02, alleast 40 credit points of Psychology al the 200 level Prerequisites Excellent results in amajor sequenceofMa1hematics STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS Content including PSYC201. and alleast 60 credit points of Psychology subjects, including alleast 40 credit points al the 300 level, and 10 Part A al the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates favourable assessment by the Head of Department. STAT40S·11 PROJECf 10,20. 30 or 40 must have obtained alleast a Credit gradein each offour 300 level Hours At least 8 lecture hours per week over one full-time year Lecture·tutorial work. with directed reading in the following Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302. fields of geology: mineralogy and crystallography; geochemistry; or 4 lecture hours per week over two part-time years. LEVEL 400 STATISTICS SUBJECTS Hours 12 hours per week for the full year igneous petrology; metamorphic petrology; coal petrology; Examination At least eight 2 hour final papers, and a study under sedimentology; stratigraphy, palaeontology; structural geology; ExaminaJion To be advised direction of a special topic using relevant published malerial and STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY IOcp economic geology~ engineering geology. Presentation of a Can/en! presented in written fonn. Work on this thesis normally starts Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STAT subjects obtaining seminar. early in February. PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. alleast a Credit grade average. Not all fields will be available every year. Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students ContenJ This is a rigorous course on the mathemalical theory of probability, Part B complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. A selection of al least eight Malhematics topics. The topics presenting techniques and theory needed to establish limit A research project, the results of which are to be embodied in a PSYC401 consists of five seminar series, including one offered may be from any branch of Malhematics including Pure theorems. The applications of such techniques are spread compulsory unit on theoretical issues in Psychology, a choice of thesis, presentation of a seminar on the results of the research Mathemalics, Applied Mathematics ,Statistics, Com puter Science throughout the discipline of Stalistics. two units in mathemalical or physiological Psychology, and a project. and Operations Research as exemplified in the pUblication Topics covered include: elementary measure theory, random choiceoftwounitsinappliedorsocial Psychology. Each unit will Mathematical Reviews. Summaries of some topics are given variables. expectalion. the characteristic function, modes of include seminars al which altendance and participation is PHYSICS later in this section of the Handbook, listed as "500 level subjects convergence, laws of large numbers. central limit theorems,law compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examinalion, oral ". but the Department should be consulted for further details, of the iterated logarithm. PHYS401) HONOURS IN PHYSICS 40+40cp presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars including the current list of other topics which are not available References PHYS402) vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One as"500 level subjects". seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated Billingsley. P. 1979, Probability and Measure, Wiley. Prerequisites PHYS3D1 plus any otherthree PHYS300 subjects Students desiring admission to this subject should apply in essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403. obtaining alleast a Credit grade average. writing to the Head of the Department before 20 December of the Breiman, L. 1968. Probability Addison-Wesley. Texts and References To be advised. preceding year. A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday ofthe Hours PHYS401 and PHYS402 together comprise 115 hours of Chung, K.L. 1974, A course in Probability Theory. 2nd edn, first semester in room V107 al 1.00p.m. to detennine both the lectures plus a project. Academic Press. PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 timetable for topics, and which topics will be covered. Examination As required. (IHESIS) 40cp Dudley, R.M. 1989,Real Analysis & Probability, Wadsworth & Brook. Con/ent Prerequisite A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years HONOURS COURSE IN STATISTICS 80cp Moran,P.A.P.I968,1984,Anln/roductiontoProbabilityTheory, PHYS401 andPHYS402areintendedtogivestudentsanadvanced of a BA(Psych) or BSc(Psych) including the subjects PSYCIOI This is a level 400 course consisting of several course work Oxford University Press. understanding of the fundamentals of modem physics appropriale and PSYC102, at least 40 credit points of Psychology al the 200 subjects and a project. level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of for an Honours graduate in the discipline as well as exposure to Prerequisite 40 credit points from Level 300 subjects offered by Psychology al the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL the current interests of the Department viz. solid state physics, the Department of Statistics obtaining al least a Credit grade Candidales must have obtained alleast a Credit grade in each of DATA IOcp radar meteor physics, electromagnetic signal propagation and average. aspects of applied physics. four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and Prerequisite Forty credit points level 300STAT subjects obtaining PSYeJ02. Content at least a Credit grade average. These aims will be achieved by offering 3 compulsory core topics, Quantum Mechanics. Theoretical Solid State Physics and Corequisite PSYC401 Students are required to take subjects worth 40·60 credit points The course will discuss the analysis of categorical data. It will of which al least 3 subjects must be chosen from Level 400 Plasma Physics. and a number of optional topics. These lalter Hours 12 hours per week for the full year begin with a thorough coverage of 2 x 2 tables before moving on subjects offered by the Department of Statistics. shall include Relativity. Applied Nuclear Physics. Surface Physics. to larger (r x c) contingency tables. Topics to be covered include Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the Space Physics, Atomic collisions in Solids. Laser Physics, Fourier Students are also required to complete project work which can be probability models for categorical data, measures of association, supervisor and by another member, or members of the Department. Transfonns, Ionospheric Physics and Particle Detection. While worth 20, 30 or 40 credit points. to be detennined by consultation measures of agreement, the Mantel·Haenszel method for all of these topics may not be offered in any year, further topics Content with the Head of the Department. The results of the project are to combining tables, applications oflogistic regression and loglinear may be available depending on visitors to the department. PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. be presented in a thesis. The project may be a practical one models. involving the analysis of dala, or a theoretical one. Work on the T ex.ts As required. Full·time students enrol in PSYC401 as welL Part·time students References project normall y starts early in February. Leve! 400 units which complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. Agresti, A. 1990, Categorical data analysis Wiley. PSYCHOLOGY PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and may be offered are: Bishop. Y .M.M., Feinberg, S.E. etal.1975 ,Discrete MuitivariaJe reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is Credit Points Analysis: Theory and Practice, MIT Press. PSYC401) PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 afonnal presentalion of this research and must bein APA fonnal. STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY 10 (SEMINARS) 40+40cp There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by Reiss. J.L. 1982. Statistical Methods for Rates and Proportions. a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA 10 2nd edn. Wiley. PSYC402) PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (fHESIS) advised to discuss potential projects with appropriale staff STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies ANALYSIS 10 STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL must be through official departmental channels. AJliALYSIS IOcp STAT404 ROBUST REGRF.sSION AND Texts and References To be advised. SMOOTHING 10 Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST ATsubjectsobtaining alleast a Credit grade average. 136 137 SECI'ION EIGHT POSTGRADUA1E SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

This course presents a malhemalical treatment of the techniques commonly-used statistical procedures, problem formulation and points at 400 Level offered by the Department of Geology. GEOG594 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES used in population projections, manpower studies, and the survival solving, analysis of data sets, report writing and oral presentation, Geology 401 will also include a major thesis which embodies the SEMINAR 2 (F.Y.) 20cp models used in demography and biostatistics. role-playing and consulting with actual clients. results of a field research project involving the application of Continuation of the evaluation of environmental assessment. Text mathematical studies to a particular geological problem. Other management and decision making from GEOG491 , using specific STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALITY work eg seminars and assignments may be required by either Lawless, J. 1982,statistical Models and Methods for Lifetime examples from the Hunter Region. This course is required for IMPROVEMENT lOcp Department. Data. Wiley. Master of Environmental Studies students. The second semester PrerequisiJe Fortycreditpointslevel300STATsubjectsobtaining is devoted to group development and application of a conflict References at least a Credit grade average. MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS resolution model. with a formal presentation of the results to the Cox, D.R and Oakes, D. 1984,AnalysisofSurvival DataChapman ECON401) AND ECONOMICS 40+40cp The course will cover the concepts of total quality management, Board of Environmental Studies. & Hall. the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of Elandt-Johnson, R.C. and Johnson, N.L. 1980, Survival Models methods such as flow charts and Pareto diagrams will becovered, both Departments. GEOG595 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL and Data Analysis Wiley. in addition to the various types of control charts and process STUDY 1 (F.Y.) lOcp Kalbfleisch,J.D. and Prentice, R.L. 1980, TIw Statistical Analysis capability analysis. Modem experimental design techniques for MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS of Failure Time Data ,Wiley. optimizing process performance will be included. The course is PHYS401) AND PHYSICS 40+40cp GEOG596 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL a practical one, and the issues involved in actually implementing Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of STUDY 2 (F.Y.) lOcp Keyfitz, N.1977,Applied Matlwmatical Demography, Wiley. aquality and productivity improvement program in an organization both Departments. Directed research and readings courses under individual Keyfitz, N. 1%8,lntroduction to tlw Matlwmatics ofPopulation will be addressed. supervision for students with specific interests or needs in the Addison-Wesley. Course readings provided. MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS area of Environmental Studies. Pollard, J.H. 1975. Matlwmatical Models for tlw Growth of PSYC401) AND PSYCHOLOGY 40+40cp Human Populations Cambridge U.P. STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICS IN Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of MATHEMATICS STATISTICS lOcp both Departments. POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS STAT404 ROBUST REGRESSION AND Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STATsubjects obtaining IN MATHEMATICS SMOOTHING lOcp at least a Credit grade average. Nole: A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday of the first Prerequisite Fan y credit points level300 STAT subjects obtaining POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS This course consists of four modules that are selected from the IN GEOGRAPHY semester in Room VIO? at 1.00 pm to detennine both the at least a Credit grade average. following topics: ti metable for these subjects and which of them are to be offered MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES The main theme is the use of the computer to fit models to data Multivariate methods; randomization, bootstrapping and other for the year. when the assumptions of traditional models may not be satisfied com puterintensive methods; analysis of repeated measurements; Other subjects than those listed here will be offered from time to or when it is not known in advance what form of model is GEOG491 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES sample size estimation, analysing large data sets; meta-analyses. time, and even at short notice by visitors to the Department. appropriate. Topics to be covered include: concepts of robustness, SEMINAR 1 (F.Y.) 20cp Intending students should consult the Department early in the L,-, M- and high breakdown estimation in linear regression, STAT408 Project (10 credit points) Introduction to environmental assessment, management and year regarding these su bjects. scatterplot smoothers (e.g. ACE, LOESS and splines), kernel Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STAT subjects obtaining decision making using specific examples from the Hunter Region, regression and methods for choosing the amount of smoothing, at least a Credit grade average. such as waste management, total catchment management and MATH501 ASTROPHYSICAL APPLICATIONS and radically different approaches (e.g. CART and projection STAT409 Project (20 credit points) recreational management. The second semester is devoted to the OF MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS lOcp pursuit). rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STA Tsubjectsobtaining and a study of the environmental planning system. Prerequisites Background in Calculus and Partial Differential Text at least a Credit grade average. Equations. Staudte, R.G.and Sheather, S.J. 1990, Robust Estinultion and STAT410 Project (30 credit points) GEOG492 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES /lours About 27 Lecture hours - Full year. TeSling , Wiley. Prerequisite Forty credit pointsleve1300STAT subjects obtaining MINOR PROJECT (FY) lOcp Examination One 2 hour paper. References at least a Credit grade average. Project under individual supervision required forthe Diplomain COnlenl Eubank, R.L. 1988, Spline Smoothing and Nonparametric STAT411 Project (40 credit points) Environmental Studies. The topic is determined by the student's Regression M. Dekker. interest and background. The normal state of matter in the universe is that of a plasma, or Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STAT subjectsobtaining ioni7..ed gas, penneated by magnetiC fields. Moreover, these Hampel, F.R. Ronchetti, E.M. et al. 1986, Robust Statistics: tlw at least a Credit grade average. fields (unlike that of the earth) may be dominant. or at least Approach Based on Influence Functions, Wiley, GEOG591 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDlF..5 MAJOR PROJECT I (F.Y.) 30cp significant, in controlling the structure of the region. The aim of Hlirdle, W. 1990,AppiiedNonparametricRegression Cambridge this course is to investigate the effects of astrophysical magnetic University Press. 1991, Smoothing Techniques: with COMBINED HONOURS SUBJECTS One-half of the project under individual supervision required for fields. the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment impiemenJation in S Springer. References MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS with GEOG592 required to full time students. Part-time students Rousseeuw, P.I. and Leroy, A.M. 1987 ,Robust Regression and GEOL401) AND GEOLOGY 4O+4Ocp may take GEOG591 and GEOO592 in separate years. The topic Chandrasekhar, S. 1961, Hydrodynamic and /lydromagnetic OUliier Detection . Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements is determined by the student's interest and background. Stability, Oxford. STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING lOcp obtaining at least a Credit grade average in 40 credit points level Cowling, T.G. 1957, Magnetohydrodynamics, Interscience. 300 MATH/GEOL subjects and permiSSion of the Heads of the GEOG592 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES MAJOR Dejong, T. & Maeder, A.(eds.) 1977 ,Star Formation, D. Reidel. Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STA T subjects obtaining Departments of Geology and Mathematics PROJECT" (F.Y.) 30cp at least a Credit grade average. One-half of the project under individual supervision required for Mestel, L. 1975. Effects of Magnetic Fields Mem.Sc.Roy.Sci. Conlenl Liege (6) 8 79. The aim of this course is to develop both the statistical and the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment nonstatistical skills required for a successful consultant. The At least 40 credit points chosen from those available to Honours withGEOO591 required for full time students. Part-time students Moffatt, H.K. 1978, Magnetic Field Generation in Electrically course includes a study of the consulting literature, a review of students in Mathematics together with work equal to 40 credit may take GEOG591 and GEOO592 in separate years. The topic Conducting Fluids CUP. is determined by the student's interest and background. 138 139 SECfION EIGHT POSTGRADUA1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION EIGHT POSTGRADUA1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Spiegel, B.A. & Zahn, J.P.(eds)1976, Problems of Stellar separation properties. We then study topology on linear spaces MATH505 FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN normed linear space theory, the algebra of continuous linear Convection, Springer. generated by convex sets: metrisability, nonnability and finite DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY 10cp operators on a nonned linear space, the spectrum and numerical dimensional cases. We examine continuity and separation for Prerequisite MATH201, MATH202 and MATH203. range of a continuous linear operator, and conjugate operators. MATH502 BANACH ALGEBRA 10cp locally convex spaces, continuity for convexity properties and We discuss the theory of compact linear operators and the Riesz­ Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2. Corequisite MATH310. Banach-Alaoglu Theorem. We study extreme points of convex SchauderTheory for such operators. The course concentrates on sets, the Krein-Milman theorem. We give particular attention to Examination One 2 hour paper. spectral theory for different types of operator on Hilbert space: Hours About Z7 lecture hours - Semester 2. the study of differentiation of convex functions on nonned linear Content compact normal, self-adjoint and normal operators. Examination One 2 hour paper. spaces: Gateaux and Frechet derivative, Mazur's and Asplund's This topic will introduce basic concepts of the local theory of References Content theorems. differentiable manifolds. Vector fields, differential fonns, and Bachman, G.& Narici, L. 1966, FunctioflLll Analysis paperback, A Banach Algebra is a mathematical structure where the two Text their mapping. Frobenius' theorem. Fundamental properties of Academic. main strands of pure mathematical study -the topological and Giles, }.R. 1982, Convex Analysis with Application in the Lie groups and Lie algebras. General linear group. Principle and Brown, A. & Page, A. 1970, Elements of Functional Analysis, the algebraic - are united in fruitful contact. The course will Differenliation of Convex Functions, Pitman. associated fibre bundles. Connections. Bundle of linear frames, VanNostrand. cover the following subject matter. Nonned algebras; regular and affine connections. Curvature and torsion. Metric, geodesics. References Dunford,N. &SchWarlS,J. 1958/....inearOperators ,Interscience. singular elements; the spectrum of an element and its properties; Riemannian manifolds. the Gelfand-Mazur theorem; topological divisors of zero; the Barbu, V. & Precupanu, T. 1978, Convexity and OptimiZalion in Halmos, H. A 1967, Ililbert space Problem Book, VanNostrand. References spectral radius and spectral mapping theorem for polynomials; Banach Spaces, Sijthoff & Noordhoff. Kreysig, E. 1978, Introduction to Functional Analysis with ideals and maximal ideals. Commutative Banach algebras; the Auslander, L. 1967, Differenlial Geometry, Harper & Row. Clarke, F.H.1983,Optimizationandnon-smcothanalysis, Wiley. Applications, Wiley. Gelfand theory and the Gelfand representation theorem. Weak: Day, M.M. 1973, Normed Linear Spaces ,Springer. Chevalley, C. 1946, Theory of Lie Groups, VoU, Princeton. topologies, the Banach-Alaoglu theorem, the Gelfand topology. Rudin, W. 1973, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill. Kobayashi, S. & Nomizu, K. 1963, Foundations of Differential Involutions in Banach algebras; hermitian involutions; the Diestel, J. 1975, Geometry ojBanachSpaces-SelectedTopics Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, inlroduction to Functional Geometry, Vol.l, Interscience. Gelfand-Naimark representation theorem for commutive B* • Springer. Analysis, Wiley. algebras. Numerical range of an element in a nonned algebra; Ekeland, I. & Ternan, R. 1976, Convex Analysis and Variational MATH506 HISTORY OF ANALYSIS TO relation of the numerical range to the spectrum; B* algebras are MATH50S MATHEMATICAL PHYSIOLOGY IOcp Problems North Holland. AROUND 1900 10cp symmetric, discussion of the Gelfand-Naimark representation Giles, J.R. 1978, AfILllysis ofNormed Linear Spaces, Univ. of Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year. theorem for B* algebras. Applications of Banach algebra theory. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year. Newcastle. Examination One 2 hour paper. Text ExamiflLltion One 2 hour paper. Holmes, R.B. 1975, Geometric Functional Analysis and its Content Zelazko, W. 1973, Banach Algebras, Elsevier. Applications, Springer. Content Physiology - Lbe study of how the body works based on the References A course of lectures on the history of mathematics with emphasis Roberts, A.W. & Varberg, D.E. 1970, Convex Functions • knowledge of how it i:) constructed - essentially dates from early on analysis. Other branches of mathematics will be referred to for Bachman,G. & Narici, L. 1966,FunctionaiAnalysis Academic. Academic. in the seventeenlh century when the English physician Harvey putting the analysis into context. Where feasible, use will be showed that blood circulates constantly through the body. The Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. 1973, Complete Normed Algebras, Rockafeller, R.T. 1970, Convex Analysis ,Princeton. made of original material, in translation. The course will be intrusion of engineering into this field is well known through the Springer. Rudin, W. 1973, Functional AfILllysis , McGraw-Hill. assessed by essays and a final 2-hour examination. wide publicity given to (for example) heart by-pass and kidney Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan,J. 1970,NumericaiRangesofOperators Valentine, F.A. 1964, Convex Sets, McGraw-Hill. Topics to be covered include: pre-Greek concepts of exactness dialysis machines, cardiac assist pace-makers, and prosthetic onNormedSpacesandElementsojNormedAlgebras, Cambridge. Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell. and approximation; Greek concepts of continuity, irrationality, devices such as hip and knee joints; the obviously beneficial Naimark, M.A. 1959, Normed Rings, Noordhoff. infinity, infinitesimal, magnitude, ratio, proportion and their union has led to the establishment of Bioengineering Departments treatment in Elements V, XII and the works of Archimedes; Rickart, C.E. 1960, General Theory of Banach Algebras, Van MATHS04 FLUID STATISTICAL MECHANICS IOcp within Universities and Hospitals. Perhaps the earliest developments of number systems and thei requivalents; scholastic demonstration of mathematics' useful application in (some areas Nostrand. Hours Aboul 27 lecture hours - Semester 2. mathematics; virtual motion; Renaissance quadrature/cubature of) physiology is the mid-nineteenth century derivation by Hagen, Rudin, W. 1973, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill. Examination One 2 hour paper. by infinitesimals and by "geometry"; Cartesian geometry; 17th from the basic equations of continuum motion, of Poiseuille's Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Content and 18th century calculus; rigorization of analysis in the 19th empirical f onnula for flow through narrow straight tubes; detailed Analysis, McGraw-Hill. century with stress on the developments of number systems, models of the cardiovascular circulatory system have recently Cluster-diagrammatic expansions - low density solutions; continuity, function concept, differentiability, integrability. been developed. Mathematical models have also beenformulated Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell. integrodifferential equations (BGY, HNC, PY) - high density for actions such as coughing, micturition and walking, as well as solutions; quantum liquids - Wu-Feenburg fermion extension; Rejerences Lists will be presented during the course. forthe more vital processes involved in gas exchange in the lungs, MATH503 CONVEX ANALYSIS lOcp numerical solution of integral equations; phase transitions - Students interested in this or other topics on aspects of the History mass transport between lungs and blood and blood and tissue, diagrammatic approach; critical phenomena; the liquid surface; of Mathematics should approach the lecturer concerned as soon Corequisite MATH310. metabolic exchanges within tissues, enzyme kinetics, signal liquid metals; liquid crystals; molecular dynamics and Monte as possible. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2. conduction along nerve fibres, spenn transport in the cervix. Carlo computer sim ulati on; irreversibility; trans port phenomena Indeed, mathematical engineering might now be said to be part of Examination One 2 hour paper. Polymeric systems. MATH507 LINEAR OPERATORS 10cp lhe conspiracy to produce super humans (e.g. see "Fast Running Conlenl Text Prerequisites MATH310 and MATH311. Tracks" in Dec. 1978 issue of Scientific American). Convexity has become an increasingly important concept in Croxton, C.A. 1975, introductiontoLiquidState Physics, Wiley. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. This course will examine in some detail a few of the previously analysis: much of current research in functional analysis concerns Reference Examination One 2 hour paper. mentioned mathematical models; relevant physiological material generaiising to convex functions, properties previously studies will be introduced as required. for the norm; much of interest in convexity has arisen from areas Croxton, C.A. 1974, Liquid State Physics - A Statistical Content References of applied mathematics related to fixed point theory and Mechanical Introduction , Cambridge. The theory of linear operators on Hilbert and Banach spaces is an optimisation problems. We begin with a study of convex sets and important theory particularly because of its applications to many Bergel, D.H. (cd.) 1972, Cardiovascular Fluid Dynamics (Vols functions defined on linear spaces: gauges of convex sets, areas of pure and applied science. We consider further aspects of I & II) Academic. 140 141 SECfION EIGHT SECfION EIGHT POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Caro,e.G., Pedley, T.J. 1978, TM MechanicsoftM Circulation, the methods of matched and composite asymptotic expansions. Hours About 27 lecture hours -Semester 1. Lagrangian and Hamiltonian fonnulations, and apply them to Oxford. The method of multiple scales. Examination One 2 hour paper. systems of particles with constraints and to rigid-body systems. Christensen, H.N. 1975, Biological Transport, W.A. Benjamin. References ConJenJ Thesecond part of the course will present Ute modem geometrical formulations of Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics. An ab Fung, Y.e. 1984, Biodynamics: Circulation, Springer. Bender, C.M. & Orszag, S.A. 1978, Advanced Math2matical lbis course studies various aspects ofsymmetry. Matters discussed initio introduction will be given to smooth vector fields and their Fung, Y.C. 1981,Biomechanics: MechanicalPropertiesofLiving Methodsfor ScienJists and Engineers, McGraw-Hill. may include: invariance of lattices, crystals and associated flows, differential fonns, the tangent and cotangent bundles. Tissues Springer. Cole, J.D. 1968, Perturbation Methods inAppJied Mathematics, functions and equations; pennutalion groups; finite geometries; Lagrangian mechanics will then be presented in tenus of flowson regular and strongly-regular graphs; de~igns; tactical Fung, Y.c., Perrone,N. & Anliker,M. (eds.) 1972,Biomechanics Blaisdell. the tangent bundle of configuration space, with Hamiltonian configurations, "classical" simple groups, Matrix groups, Its Foundations and Objectives, Prentice-Hall. mechanics taking place on the cotangent bundle. Nayfeh, A.H. 1981, Introduction to Perturbation Techniques, representalions, characters. Lightfoot, E.N. 1974, Transport PMnomenaandLiving Systems Wiley. If time (and student interest) permits topics that might be touched References , Wiley. Nayfeh, A.H. 1970, Perturbation Methods Wiley. upon include: Hamilton-Jacobi theory, action-angle variables, Biggs, N.L and White, A.T. 1979, Permutation Groups and approximation methods, classical field theory, geometrical Margaria, R. 1976, Biomechanics and Energetics of Muscular VanDyke, M. 1975, Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics Combinatorial Structures, Cambridge. quanti sat ion. Exercise Clarendon. , Parabolic. Carmichael, R.D. 1984, Groups of Finite Order, Dover reprint. References Pedley, T.J. 1980, The Fluid Mechanics ofLarge Blood Vessels, Cambridge. MATH511 QUANTUM MECHANICS IOcp Harris, D.C. & Bertolucci, M.D.1978, Symmetry and Arnold, V.I. 1978, GeometricalmethodsofClassicalMechanics, Spectroscopy, Oxford. Springer. West, J.B. (ed.) 1977, Bioengineering Aspects of the Lung Hours About 27 lecture hours -Semester 2. Marcel Dekker. Examination One 2 hour paper. Rosen, J. 1975, Symmetry Discovered, Cambridge. Abraham, R., Marsden, J.E. 1978, Foundations of Mechanics, Benjamin/Cummings. COnJenJ Shubnikov, A.V. & Koptsik, V.A. 1974, Symmetry in Science MATH509 NONLINEAR OSCILLATIONS IOcp and Art, Plenum Press. Crampin, M. , Pirani, F.A.E. 1986, Applicable Differential Operators; Schrodinger equation; one dimensional motion; parity; Prerequisite MATH304, MATH205 Geometry, CUP. harmonic oscillator; angular momentum; central potential; Weyl, H. 1973, Symmetry, Princeton. (and others to be advised). HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Full year eigenfunction; spinand statistics; Rutherford scattering; scattering White,A.T. 1973, Graphs, GroupsandSurfaces North-Holland. Examination One 2 hour paper. theory phase shift analysis; nucleon-nucleon interaction; spin­ MATH514 VISCOUS FLOW THEORY IOcp MATH516 CONCRETE GROUP THEORY IOcp ConJenJ dependent interaction; operators and stale vectors; Schrodinger equations of motion; Heisenberg equation of motion. Quantum Prerequisites MATH 306, MATH305. Prerequisites MATl1211. Physica1 problem soften give ri se to ordinary differential equations molecular orbitals; hybridization; LCAO theory; MO theory. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. which have oscillatory solutions. This course will be concerned Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. Texts with the existence and stability of periodic solutions of such Examination One 2 hour paper. Examination One 2 hour paper. differential equations, and will coverthefollowing subjects; two­ Croxton, C.A. 1974,lntroductoryEigenphysics, Wiley. ConJenJ ContenJ dimensional autonomous systems, limit sets, and the Poincare­ Matthews, P.T. 1968, inJroduction to QuanJwn Mechanics, A course on some aspects of group construction, which will Bendixson theorem. Brouwer's fixed point theorem and its use in Basic equations. Some exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes McGraw-Hill. include discussion of: presentation of a group by generators and finding periodic solutions. Non-critical linear systems and their equations. Approximate solutions: theory of very slow motion, relations; presentation of a group as a group of penuutations, and perturbations. The method of averaging. Frequency locking, boundary layer theory, etc. MATH512 RADICALS & ANNIHILATORS IOcp as a symmetry group or structure-preserving group; relations jump phenomenon, and subharmonics. Bifurcation of periodic Prerequisite MA TH312 References bet ween groups and some geometrical objects; representation of solutions. Attention will be paid to applications throughout the Batchelor, G.K. 1967, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, a group as a group of matrices; construction of groups in various course. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year Cambridge. ways from known groups; constructions preserving varietal and References Examination One 2 hour paper. categorical properties; construction of "generating" groups of Landau, LD. & lifshitz, E.M. 1959, FluidMechanics, Pergamon. Hale, J.K. 1969, Ordinary DijJerenJial Equations, Wiley. COnJenJ certain classes. Langlois, W.E 1964, Slow Viscous Flow, Macmillan. Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S. 1974, Differential Equations, This topic will briefly outline the classical theory of finite References Pai, S.1. 1956. Viscous Flow Theory Vol.!, Van Nostrand. Dynamical Systems and Linear Algebra, Academic. dimensional algebras and the emergence of the concepts of Burrow, M. 1965, Representation Theory of Finite Groups, radica1, idempotence, ring, chain conditions, etc. Hopefully thus Rosenhead, L. (ed.) 1963, Laminar Boundary Layers, Oxford. Marsden,J.E. & McCracken, M. 1976,TheHopfBifurcationand Academic Press. set in perspective, the next part will deal with the Artin-Hopkins­ its Applications, Springer. Schlichting, H. 1968, Boundary Layer Theory, McGraw-Hill. Coxeter, H.S.M. & Moser, W.O.J. 1957, GeneratorsandReiLJtions Jacobson ring theory and the significance of oth.er radicals when for Discrete Groups, Springe. Nayfeh, A.H. & Mook, D.T. 1979, Nonlinear Oscillations , finiteness conditions are dropped. The relations between various Ternan, R. Navier-Stokes 1976, Equations - Theory and Wiley. radicals, noetherian rings, left and right annihilators and the Nwnerical Analysis, North Holland. Feit, W.1. 1969,Clulracters of Finite Groups, Benjamin. Stoker, J.1. 1950, Nonlinear Vibrations, Wiley. Goldie-Small theorems will end the topic. Hall, Jr, M. 1962, The Theory of Groups ,Macmillan. MATH515 GEOMETRICAL MECHANICS IOcp References KUTOsh, A.G. 1960, The TMory ofGroups Vols.1 & II Chelsea, MATH510 PERTURBATION THEORY Recommended Companion Foundations of Modem Differential lOcp Cohn, P. 1977,Algebra Vol. 2, Wiley. Tr.& ed. K.A. Hirsch. Geometry. Prerequisites MATH201, 2m, 304. and other articles and books mentioned during the course. Divinsky, N. 1964, Rings and Radicals, Allen-Unwin. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2. HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. l-ierstein, IN. 1968, Non-commutative Rings, Wiley. Examination One 2 hour paper. Examination One 2 hour paper. MATH517 ANALYSIS OF TOPOLOGICAL Kaplansky, I. 1969, Fields and Rings, Chicago. STRUCTURES lOcp ConJenJ ConJenJ McCoy, N. 1965, The Theory ofRings ,McMillan. For all but the simplest systems Lagrangian or Hamiltonian Prerequisites MATH205. Regular perturbation methods, including parameter and coordinate formulations of mechanics are vastly superior (albeit equivalent) perturbations. A discussion of the sources of nonunifonnity in Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. MATH513 SYMMETRY IOcp to Newton's equations. Initially the course will introduce perturbation expansions. The method of strained coordinates and Examination One 2 hour paper. Prerequisite Some knowledge of Linear Algebra. 142 143 SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUAlE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Content current theory of gravitation. The subject will be presented usin, algebras". This is because these algebras are tailored to the 500AD. There will be 27 lectures. In addition students will be A topolo&ical space is the most basic structure for analysis study. methods of modem differential geometry. Relativity may be (and geometry of an orthogonal space. These algebras area vehicle for expected to read. in translation, substantial parts of original We develop separation axioms, including Urysohn's Lemma, will be) regarded as a special application of pseudo·Riemannilll the study of the (pseudo) orthogonal groups and their simply works and to interpret and comment upon those works verbally countable base properties, product and quotient topologies, geometry, where the manifold, here space-time, has a metric thal connected covers the Spin groups. and in writing. Links with the mathematics of other cultures will compactness and Tychonotrs Theorem. Toliok to metric spaces is not positive definite. The Clifford algebras are useful examples of associative linear also be explored. we outline Ute basic metrisation theorem. Particles, fluids and electromagnetic fields will be introduced algebras. They will be used as a paradigm in the study of such into arbitrary space-times. It will then be shown how these algebras. Thecourse will include Wedderbum'sstructure theorem MATH524 DEVELOPMENT OF We then study linear topologies and their special properties,local CONTEMPORARY ALGEBRA IOcp bases and locally convex topologies, the metrisation and sources of "malter" can generate the geometry of space-time via for semi-simple associative algebras and Froberuus' theorem for normability theorems. Gauges and Polars. The Hahn Banach Einstein's field equations. Applications of the theory will include real division algebras. This course of27 lectures will examine what mathematics can be Separation Properties are developed. The theory is applied to the introductions to black holes and to relativistic cosmology. The orthogonal and Spin groups will provide concrete examples considered "algebra" and how it has developed from Babylonian study of weak topologies on Banach spaces, the Banach-Alaoglu References of Lie groups. Their representations will be studied. In particular times to about 1930. It will concentrate on those streams which Theorem and Goldstine Theorems. the irreducible representations of the various Spin groups, the appear to have had a bearing on the present state of the subject O'Neill, Barrett. 1983, Semi-Riemannian Geometry with rather than on interesting sideshoots. Considerable use will be References spinor representations, will be classified. applications to Relativity, Academic. made of source material (mostly in English translation). Giles, J.R.1982. Con... ex Analysis with Application in tM Reference Hawking, S.W. & Ellis, G.F.R. 1973. TM lArge scale structure Hours Full year DijferentiaJion ofCon... ex Functions I Pitman. of space-lime Cambridge. Benn,I.M. and Tucker, R.W. 1988, An Introduclion to Spinors Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars. Jameson, GJ.O.1974, Topology and NormedSpaces, Chapman OtMrs to be advised. and Geometry, Adam Hilge. & Hall. Others to be advised. MATH525 ADVANCED TOPIC IN ANALYSIS IOcp Kelly, J.L. 1955. General topology, Van Nostrand. MATH520 C' - ALGEBRAS Hkp MATH522 INTRODUCTION TO CATEGORY Prerequisite MAT1I31O Kelly J.L. & Namioka, 1..1965, Linear topological spaces, Van Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. THEORY IOcp Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year. Nostrand. Examination One 3 hour paper. Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year Contenl Robertson, A.P. & W.J. 1964, Topological veclor spaces, Conlent Cambridge. Examination One 2 hour paper This will usually be a choice of one of the following. The object of the course is to explain the basic properties of C"'­ Simons, G.F. 1963,lnJroductiontotopologyandmodernanalysis, algebras, and to see some of the ways they arise in different areas Content Operatorlllcory: Linearoperators on Hilbert and general Banach McGraw-Hill. of mathematics. We aim to minimise the technical background This course is geared to an examination of the concept of spaces will be studied. The course will largely concentrate on spectral theory, in particular for compact and compact normal Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to Functional required, and to assume onI y a very basic background in functional "naturality" in mathematics. Categories and functors will be be operators. Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley. analysis. introduced as unifying concepts underl ying much of mathematics. Some connections with, and applications to Computer Science References Wilansky, A. 1978,Modernmethods in topological vector spaces, We start with a brief look at the mOre general Banach algebras, will be explored. Adjoint functors will be discussed in some McGraw-Hill. where we discuss the basic properties of the spectrum, and the Dunford.N. & Schwarts,J. 1950,LinearOperators, Interscience. Gelfandtransform, whichembedsacommutativeBanachalgebra depth and illustrated by applications to various branches of Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis. Blaisdell. Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to FWICtional in an algebra of continuous functions. The Gelfand-Naimark mathematics, particularly group theory. The existence of adjoint functors under certain conditions and a monadic approach to Analysis, Wiley. Willard, S. 1970, General topology, Addison-Wesley. theorem says that, when the algebra is a C"'-a1gebra, the Gelfand universal algebra will end the course. Fixed Point Theory and Applications: The basic theorems of trWlsform is an isomorphism, and we shall look at this theorem Brouwer. Schauder-Tychonoff, Kakutani and Leray-Schauder MATH518 LIE GROUPS AND ALGEBRAS and its applications in operator theory. We shall then discuss Text WITH APPLICATIONS TO degree theory will be developed, extended and applied. representations of C*-a1gebras -roughly speaking, the ways of MacLane, S. 1971, Categoriesforlhe Working Mathematician, DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS IOcp realising an abstract C*-a1gebra as an algebra of operators on Pringer. References Prerequisite MATH304. Hilbert space. There is a general construction which shows this Smart, D.R. 1974, Fixed Poinl Theorems, Cambridge University can always be done-due to GelfWld, Naimark and Segal-but we References Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. Press. shall focus on the way in which C*-algebras are used in the Arbib, M. & Manes, E.G.Arrows, 1975,StructuresandFunctors: Shashkin Yu, 1991, A. Fixed Poi.nts Amer. Math. Soc./Math. Examination One 2 hour paper. representation theory of groups and dynamical systems. The Categorical Imperative , Academi. Assoc. of Amer. Contem References Arbib, M. &Manes, E.G. 1986.Algebraic Approachesto Program The Geometric Theory of Banach Spaces: The contents will Introduction to lie groups, manifolds, vector fields and Lie SemanJics Springer. Conway, J.n. 1985, A Course in Functional Analysis, Springer­ include: reflexivity, dualities between convexity and smoothness, algebras. Symmetry groups of differential equations, Verlag. Barr, M. & Wells, C. 1990, Calegory Theory for Computing the external structure of convex sets, basic sequences, prolongations, group calculations and integration. Group invariant Murphy, G.J. 1990, C* -algebrasand Operator Theory, Academic Science, Prentice HajJ. superflexivity. rcnonnings and the theory of Type. solutions, classification, quotient manifolds. Conservation laws Press. Walters, R. F.e. 1991, CalegoriesandComputer Science,.Carslaw and groups. Generalized symmetries and recursion operators. References Tomiyama, J. 1987, Invitation to C*-algebras and topological MATH523 GREEK MATHEMATICS AND Beauzamy, n. 1985, Introduction to Banach Spaces and their MATH519 GENERAL RELATIVITY dynamics, World Scien. lOcp ITS HISTORY 10cp Geometry. North Holland. Recommended Companion Foundations of Modem Differential Jameson, GJ.O. 1974, Topology and Normed Spaces Chapman MATH521 CLIFFORD ALGEBRAS AND Hours Full year Geometry. and Hall. Sl'lNORS IOcp Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Semester 1. The choice of Topic may vary from year to year, in part based on Hours Approx. 27 hours- Full Year. References Presented during the course. Examination One 2 hour paper. sludent interesls. Examination One 2 hour paper. Contem Contenl Contenl An in-depth study of Greek mathematics from about 500RC to This topic presents an introduction to general relativity - the Clifford called the algebras that now bear his name "geometrical

144 145 SECfION EIGHT POSTGRADUA lE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION NINE

MATHS26 MODELS OF BIOLOGICAL PATTERN FORMATION 10cp Prerequisites MATH201. MATH202, MATH203, MATH213, MATH315.

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Full Year. Examination One 2 hour paper Conlent In 1952, Turing suggestedthal, under certain conditions, chemicals can react and diffuse in such a manner as to produce steady state heterogeneous spatial patterns of chemical Of "morphogen" concentration. This topic will discuss a number of models of pattern generation which lead to a system of reaction-

Number Subjecl Points Number Subjecl Points

LEVEL 100 SUBJECTS BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology 10 EAMSI01 Concepts of Ecology 10 BIOLl02 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution 10 EAMSIII Systems Approach in Ecology 10 CHEMIOI Chemistry 101 10 EAMSI02 Monitoring and Statistics I 10 CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 10 EAMSII2 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 COMPIOI Computer Science ] 20 EAMCI03 Contemporary Environmental Philosophy 10 GEOGIO! Introduction to Physical Geography 10 EAMCII3 Environment and Human Values I 10 GEOGI02 Introduction to Human Geography 10 EAMSI04 Environmental Planning and Pollution GEOLIOI The Environment 10 Control Legislation 10 GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 EAMSII4 Local and Regional Environmental Issues 10 INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems 10 AVlAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5 MAQMI35 Mathematics IA 20 AVlAIIO Introductory Navigation 5 MAQMI36 Mathematics IB 20 AVlAI II Introductory Aerodynamics 5 MAQMI46 Foundation Studies in Elementary AVlA112 Introductory Human Factors 10 Mathematics 15 AVlA113 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5 MAQMI47 Mathematics IEC 10 AVlAII4 Flight Rules & Procedures 5 MATH II I Mathematics III 10 AVlAII5 Reciprocating Engines 5 MATHII2 Mathematics 112 10 AVlA116 Commercial Meteorology 5 MATHI02 Mathematics 102 10 A VlAI 17 Navigation 5 MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 AVlAII8 Aerodynamics 5 PHYSIOI Physics 101 10 AVlAII9 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 AVlAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight PHYSI03 Physics 103 10 Rules and Procedures 10 PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10 AVlAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5 PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10 AVlAI23 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5 STATlO! Introductory Statistics 10

146 147 SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS SECfION NINE SECfION NINE SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS

Points Number Subject Points Number Subject Points Number SubjecI Number SubjecI Pow. 5 PSYC201 Foundations for Psychology LEVEL 200 SUBJECTS COMP206 Theory of Computation \0 BIOLJ09 Molecular Biology 10 5 PSYC202 Basic Processes 10 EAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 COMP212 Introduction to Programming BIOLJIO Microbiology 10 \0 PSYC203 Developmental & Social Processes 10 EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10 COMP241 Cognitive Science BIOLJl1 Environmental Biology 10 5 PSYC204 Individual Processes 10 EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data Analysis I 10 COMP299 Project BIOLJI2 Animal Development 10 \0 STATZOI Mathematical Statistics EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data Analysis II 10 GEOG201 Methods in Physical Geography 10 CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10 \0 STATZ02 Regression Analysis 10 EAMC203 Environment and Human Values II 10 GEOG202 Methods in Human Geography CHEM312 Chemometrics S 10 STATZ03 Queues & Simulation EAMC213 Development and Social Impact GEOG203 Biogeography & Qimatology 5 CHEM313 Industrial Chemical Analysis S Assessment 10 GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia \0 STA1'204 Non-parametric Statistics 5 CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental Systems S EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10 GEOG207 Population, Culture & Resources 10 STA1'205 Engineering Statistics 5 CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10 GEOG208 Cities and Regions 10 LEVEL 300 SUBJECTS CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding in ClUster Chemistry 5 EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology 10 GEOL211 Optical Mineralogy 5 EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10 CHEM323 Bioinorganic Co-ordination Chemistry 5 EAMS293 Animal Systematics and Animal Ecology 10 GEOL212 Introductory Petrology 10 EAMS311 Environmental Management TI \0 CHEM33 I Organic Chemistry 10 AVlA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 GEOL213 Ancient Environments & Organisms 10 EAMS302 Specialist Study 20 CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry 5 AVlA208 Instrument Navigation 5 GEOL214 Geological Structures & Resources 10 EAMS303 Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology 10 CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanism 5 AVlA209 Long Range Navigation 5 GEOL215 Geology Field Course 215 10 EAMC313 Social Aspects of Environmental Health 10 CHEM334 Identification of Natural Compounds 5 AVlA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5 GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216 5 EAMS304 Regional and National Environmental CHEM335 Organic Spectroscopy 5 Issues \0 AVlA211 Jet Engines 5 MAQM214 Quantitative Methods 10 CHEM341 Physical Chemistry 10 EAMS314 Environmental Impact Assessment 10 AVlA212 Human Factors 10 MAQM235 Mathematics IIA 20 CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5 EAMS390 Soil Conversation and Management 10 AVlA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 MAQM236 Mathematics IIB 10 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 EAMS391 Water and Soils Applications and AVlA214 Jet Aircraft Flight Planning 10 MAQM237 Mathematics TIC I CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 Modelling 10 AVlA218 Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance 5 MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 COMP301 Compiler Design 10 EAMS392 Rora Component of Environmental AVlA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 Impact Assessment 10 COMP302 Artificial Intelligence 10 AVlA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 EAMS393 Fauna Component of Environmental COMP303 Computer Networks AVlA221 Human Performance in Multi-Crew MATH204 Real Analysis 5 Impact Assessment 10 COMP304 Database Design 10 Operations 5 MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces 5 AVlA305 Aircraft Design 5 COMP305 Design and Analysis of Algorithms 10 AVlA222 Management in Aviation 5 MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 AVlA306 Advanced Aircraft Operations 10 COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 AVlA223 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5 MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 AVlA308 Aviation Instruction 10 COMP307 Software Engineering Principles 10 BIOL201 Biochemistry 10 MATH209 Algebra 5 AVlA310 Advanced Navigation 10 COMP308 Operating Systems 10 BJOL202 Animal Physiology 10 MATH210 Geometry 1 5 AVlA311 Advanced Aviation Instruction 10 COMP391 Special Topic 1 10 BIOL204 Cell & Molecular Biology 10 MATH211 Group Theory 5 AVlA312 Applied Aerodynamics 5 GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 10 BJOL205 Molecular Genetics 10 MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 AVlA314 Directed Study 10 GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography 10 BIOL206 Plant Physiology 10 MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 AVlA315 Advanced Aviation Management 5 GEOG304 The Biosphere & ConselVation 10 BIOL207 Ecology 10 MATH214 Mechanics 5 AVlA316 Flight Deck Perfonnance 5 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 MATH215 Operations Research 5 AVlA3I7 Aviation Climatology 5 GEOG306 Geography of Australia An Historical CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 Perspective 10 MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 AVlA318 Aircraft Stability and Control 5 CHEM231 Organic Chemistry 10 GEOG309 Society & Space 10 MATH217 Linear Algebra 1 5 AVlA320 Aviation Instruction Practicum r 5 CHEM241 Physical Chemistry 10 GEOG31O Directed Studies in Human Geography 10 MATH218 Linear Algebra 2 5 AVlA321 Aviation Instruction Practicum II 5 CHEM251 Applied Chemistry 10 GEOG311 Hydrology 10 PHlL207 Scientific Knowledge and Scientific BIOLJOI Cell Processes 10 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 Method 10 BIOL302 Reproductive Physiology 10 GEOG315 Production, Work & Territory 10 COMP201 Advanced Data Struct ure 5 PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology 10 GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography 10 COMP202 Computer Architecture 5 PHYS202 Mechanics & Thennal Physics 10 BIOLJ04 Whole Plant Development 10 GEOL311 Igneous Petrology &Crustal Evolution 10 COMP203 Assembly Language 5 PIIYS203 Solid State & Atomic Physics 10 BIOL305 Immunology 10 GEOL312 Metamorphic Petrology 10 COMP204 Programming Language Semantics 5 PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles, BIOLJ07 Molecular Biology of Plant Development 10 GEOL313 Structural Geology & Geophysics 10 COMP205 System Programming 5 Processes and Applications 10

148 149 SECTION NINE SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS SECfION NINE SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS Number Subject Points Number Subject Points Number Subject Points Number Subject GE0L314 Stratigraphic Methods 10 PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 10 Points PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 GE0L315 40 MATH520 Sedimentology 10 PSY009 Topics in Neural Science 10 C*·Algebras \0 PSYC403 Psychology 403 30 MATH521 GE0L316 Geology of Fuels 10 STAT301 Statistical Inference JO Clifford Algebras and Spioors \0 PSYC404 Psychology 404 50 MATH522 GE0L317 Resource & Exploration Geology 10 STAT302 Study Design JO Introduction to Category Theory JO PSYC405 Psychology Diploma 405 40 GEOL318 Geology Logging Course 318 5 STAT303 Generalized Linear Models \0 MATH523 Greek MaLhematics and its History PSYC406 10 Psychology Diploma 406 40 MATH524 GEOL319 Geology Field Course 319 5 STA T304 Time Series Analysis \0 Development of Contemporary Algebra JO STAT401 Probability Theory JO GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 LEVEL 400 SUBJECTS MATH525 Advanced Topic in Analysis JO STAT402 Analysis of Categorical Data GE0L321 Groundwater and Soils Not in 1993 10 EAMS401 Environmental Management 20 \0 MATH526 Models of Biological Pattern Fonnation 10 STAT403 Demography and Survival Analysis MAQM335 Mathematics lIlA 20 EAMS402 Seminar Series 20 \0 LEVEL 600 SUBJECTS STAT404 Robust Regression and Smoothing MAQM336 Mathematics IIIB 15 EAMS404 Research Project 40 \0 ASTK695 Foundations of Applied Science STAT405 Statistical Consulting MAQM337 Mathematics IIlC 15 AVIA401 Aviation Honours 401 20 \0 & Technology 40 STAT406 Methods for Quality Improvement ASTK696 MATH301 Logic & Set Theory 10 AVIA402 Aviation Research Methodology \0 JO Topics in Applied Science & Technology 40 STAT407 Advanced Topics in Statistics \0 ASTK697 MATH302 General Tensors & Relativity 10 AVIA403 Technology in Aviation \0 Advanced Topics in Applied Science STAT408 Project & Technology Not in 1993 40 MATH303 Variational Methods and Integral AVIA404 The Human Variable in Aviation \0 \0 STAT409 Project ASTK698 Project Not in 1993 40 Equations JO AVIA405 Aviation Honours - Thesis 40 20 EAMS695 MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 STAT4JO Project Foundations of Environmental 10 BIOL401 Biology Honours 401 40 30 Assessment & Management 40 MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 10 STAT4J1 Project 40 BI0L402 Biology Honours 402 40 EAMS696 Topics in Environmental MATH306 Auid Mechanics LEVEL SOO SUBJECTS JO BI0L405 Biology Diploma 405 40 Assessment & Management 40 GEOG591 Environmental Studies Major Project I MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics JO BI0L406 Biology Diploma 406 40 30 EAMS697 Advanced Topics in Environmental MATH308 Geometry 2 GEOG592 Environmental Studies Major Project II \0 CHEM40J Chemistry Honours 401 40 30 Assessment & Management Not in 1993 40 GEOG594 Environmental Studies Seminar 2 EAMS698 MATH309 Combinatorics \0 CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 40 20 Project Not in 1993 40 MATH310 GEOG595 Directed Environmental Study 1 BI0L695 Functional Analysis \0 CHEM405 Chemistry Diploma 405 40 \0 Foundations of Biological Sciences 40 GEOG596 Directed Environmental Study 2 BI0L696 MATH311 Measure Theory & Integration \0 CHEM406 Chemistry Diploma 406 40 \0 Topics in Biological Sciences 40 MATH312 Algebra \0 MATH501 Astrophysical Applications of BI0L697 Advanced Topics in Biological GEOG4OJ Geography Honours 401 40 Magnetohydrodynamics MATH313 \0 Sciences Not in 1993 40 Numerical Analysis (rheory) 10 GEOG402 Geography Honours 402 40 MATH502 Banach Algebra BJ0L698 MATH314 Optimization 10 10 Project Not in 1993 40 GEOG405 Geography Diploma 405 40 MATH503 Convex Analysis MATH315 \0 CHEM695 Foundations of Chemistry 40 Mathematical Biology \0 GEOG406 Geography Diploma 406 40 MATH504 Auid Statistical Mechanics CHEM696 MATH316 Industrial Modelling \0 Topics in Chemistry 40 \0 GEOG491 Environmental Studies Seminar 1 20 MATH505 Foundations of Modem Differential CHEM697 MATH317 Number Theory \0 Advanced Topics in Chemistry GEOG492 Environmental Studies Minor Project JO Geometry \0 Not in 1993 40 MATH318 Topology \0 GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 MATH506 History of Anal ysis to Around 1900 \0 CHEM698 Project Not in 1993 40 PHYS301 Mathematical Methods & Quantum GEOL402 Geology Honours 402 40 MATH507 Linear Operators GE0L695 Mechanics 10 \0 Foundations of Geology 40 GEOL405 Geology Diploma 405 40 MATH508 Mathematical Physiology GE0L696 Topics in Geology PHYS302 Electromagnetism & Electronics 10 \0 40 GE0L406 Geology Diploma 406 40 MATH509 Nonlinear Oscillations GE0L697 PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid State Physics 10 \0 Advanced Topics in Geology Not in 1993 40 MAQM435 Mathematics IVA \0 MATH5JO Perturbation Theory GEOL698 Project Not in 1993 40 PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 \0 MAQM436 MaLhematics IVB JO MATH5J1 Quantum Mechanics MATH695 Foundations of Mathematics 40 PHYS305 Nuclear Physics & Advanced \0 MAQM437 Mathematics IVC 10 MATH512 Radicals and Annihilators MATH696 Topics in Mathematics 40 Electromagnetism 10 I \0 MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 MATH513 Symmetry MATH697 PSYOOI Advanced Foundations for Psychology 10 I 10 Advanced Topics in Mathematics MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 40 MATH514 Viscous Flow Theory Not in 1993 40 PSY002 Independent Project 10 \0 MATH405 Mathematics Diploma 405 40 MATH515 Geometrical Mechanics MATII698 Project Not in 1993 40 PSY003 Basic Processes 1 10 \0 MATH406 Mathematics Diploma 406 40 I MATH516 Concrete Group Theory PHYS695 Foundations of Physics 40 PSY004 Basic Processes 2 10 10 PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 MATH517 Analysis of Topological Structures PHYS696 Topics in Physics 40 PSY005 Individual Processes 10 l, 10 PHYS402 Physics Honours 402 40 MATH518 Lie Groups and Algebras with PHYS697 Advanced Topics in Physics Not in 1993 40 PSY006 Advanced Social Processes 10 PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401 40 I Applications 10 Differential F..quations \0 PHYS698 Project Not in 1993 40 PSY007 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10 I MATH519 General Relali vii y 10 STAT695 Foundations of Statistics 40 150 I 151 ~ SECfION NINE SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS

Number Subject Points

STAT696 Topics in Statistics 40 STAT697 Advanced Topics in Statistics Not in 1993 40 STAT698 Project Not in 1993 40

I i I

I,

I,

II

152 THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE CAMPUS LAYOUT ~~

AE ABORIGINAL EDUCATION CENTRE RS SOCIAL SCIENCES BUILDING N ARCHITECTURE BUILDING SE SPECIAL EDUCATION CENTRE AT ART BUILDING SP SPORTS PAVILION L AUCHMUTY LIBRARY SH STAFF HOUSE NUR 2NUR-FM RADIO STATION TB TEMPORARY OFFICE BUILDINGS , /' /~/ AN ANIMAL HOUSE TC TENNIS COURTS AS ANIMAL STORE TG TRACTOR GARAGE ~'~,/ SC AUCHMUTY SPORTS CENTRE TA TUNRA ANNEXE ( \( \ M AVIATION BUILDING U UNIVERSITY UNION --"---./ Sports field 3 W BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES BUILDING US UNIVERSITY UNION - HUNTER , TG J BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES BUILDING VA VISUAL ARTS/ MEDIA STUDIES "~j' B B01: LECTURE THEATRE i '~ EG BULK SOLIDS ENGINEERING UC CENTRAL ADMINISTRATION: The Chancellery CG CENTRAL GARAGE I,l CE CERAMICS EB CHEMICAL AND MATERIALS ENGINEERING 2 G CHEMISTRY BUILDING CCK CHILD CARE CENTRE - KINT AlBA CCW CHILD CARE CENTRE - WONNA YBA ED CIVIL ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING CB COMMONWEALTH BANK CT COMPUTING TEACHING BUILDING Q DRAMA STUDIO p DRAMA THEATRE E EOl: LECTURE THEATRE EE ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING EA ENGINEERING ADMINISTRATION . EF ENGINEERING CLASSROOMS ES ENGINEERING SCIENCE C GEOLOGY BUILDING GH GREAT HALL GDT GRIFFITH DUNCAN THEATRE GY GYMNASIUM H HOl: BASDEN THEATRE HH HUNTER BUILDING HT HUNTER TECHNOLOGY CENTRE La LECTURERS OFFICES MW MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP v MATHEMATICS BUILDING A MCMULUN BUILDING EC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING K MEDICAL SCIENCES BUILDING sri !DENTS RESIDENCES D PHYSICS BUILDING EH EDWARDS HALL Y PROPOSED 2NUR-FM STUDIOS EV EVATT HOURS (with proposed extensions) RW RICHARDSON WING IH INTERNATIONAL HOUSE (with proposed SB SCIENCE BUILDING extenSions SH STAFF HOUSE UV Site for new student residential complex SW SCULPTURE WORKSHOPS currently University Village